Help Wiki - User contributions [en]

Parabolic Microphone Kit Gear Guide

2026-06-17T23:49:06Z

Zornesn:

Category:Film Cameras and Accessories

2026-06-17T23:41:08Z

Zornesn:

[[category:Media Loan Tests]]

Category:Digital Cameras and Accessories

2026-06-17T23:40:57Z

Zornesn:

[[category:Media Loan Tests]]

Light Meters Quick Guide

2026-06-17T23:39:46Z

Zornesn:

[[File:Light-meters-top.jpg|900x900px]]
===Precautionary Statements===
'''Light meters are delicate instruments, handle with care!<br />'''
'''Do not open, take apart, drop or handle roughly!<br />'''
'''Keep the strap around your neck when using the meter.<br />'''
'''Scratches can collect dirt which may slightly reduce light transmissions and affect the meter’s accuracy.<br />'''
'''Do not expose meters to magnetic fields, extreme heat, humidity, leave in a locked car or expose to direct sunlight for periods of time.<br />'''
'''Keep the meter in its case when not in use.'''

===Media Loan Light Meters===
Media Loan carries 3 basic types of light meters. Sekonic and Tundra analog meters, and a Sekonic digital meter.
===Reflected Light Readings===
<gallery>
File:reflective.jpg|Reflective Reading
</gallery>
Reflected Light Readings
All of Media Loan’s light meters will read reflected light, which is the light reflected off a subject (see image right). With the Lumigrid accessory, the Sekonic analog meters will measure the light reflected from a scene. The High Slide cannot be used with the Lumigrid accessory for a reflected light reading. Sekonic digital meters and Tundra meters require you to slide the sphere accessory to expose the window below. Use for landscapes and other distant objects.
===Grey Card Readings===
To get an accurate reflected light reading, use an 18 percent grey 'Neutral Test Card' as a substitute for your subject. This card is especially made to reflect 18 percent of the light falling on it, the equivalent of a middle grey on a scale between white and black. The meter will read the grey card as the ideal average scene. If using a grey card is not possible, measure the reflected light from an appropriately lit subject which closely approximates this middle grey tone. ('''Media Loan does not have grey cards.''')
===Incident Light Reading===
<gallery>
File:incident.jpg|Incident Reading
</gallery>
Incident light is the intensity of light coming from the source (sun, room light, etc.) and falling on a subject that can be measured. This is the equivalent of an 18 percent grey reading. Use for people and close objects.
===Measurement for Movie Camera===
The procedure for taking measurements when using a movie camera is the same as for taking ambient light measurements.
====Motion Picture Camera Shutter Speeds====
Standard frames per second = 24 FPS. Slow motion = 36 FPS or higher. Fast Motion = 18 fps or lower.

Shutter Speeds (at 24 FPS unless otherwise noted):<br />

'''Bolex'''
::1/80th of a second
::1/65th of a second (with RX lenses)
::1/30th of a second (single frame without RX lenses)
'''CP-16'''
::1/55th of a second
'''Oxberry Animation Stand 0.25 second''' (single frame)
===Sekonic Studio Deluxe Light Meters===
<gallery>
File:lightmeter2.jpg|Sekonic Analog Meter
</gallery>
The Sekonic light meter functions as a dual purpose exposure meter, reading either incident or reflected (luminance) light. This professional, versatile instrument is designed, however, to give the most accurate exposure information based on incident light readings.
====Accessories====
<gallery>
File:Extras.jpg|Accessories
</gallery>
=====Lumisphere=====
Shaped like a dome, the Lumisphere attachment simulates the curvature of a human face. Position it over the light sensor on the meter’s swivel head. The Lumisphere may only be used for incident light readings.<br />
=====Lumigrid=====
When an incident light reading cannot be taken (distant landscapes, wild animals, etc.), use the Lumigrid accessory to measure reflected light. Reflected light measurement with the Lumigrid accessory is possible only when the intensity of the reflected light exceeds 125 foot candles.<br />
Also, all Lumigrid readings are measured with the red ‘'''H'''' pointer without the High Slide inserted. This accessory works well for reading illuminated or neon subjects.<br />
=====Lumidisk=====
The Lumidisk measures illumination when pointed from the subject directly at an individual light source. It is often used for animation stand and light table work to measure light coming through back lit glass. The Lumidisk is also used to measure the difference between key and fill lights when trying to achieve specific contrast ratios as in close up, studio photography. Documenting these lighting ratios will allow you to control contrast for later duplication of the same scene or light quality. Knowing the contrast ratio is also important because photographic films have varying and limited light sensitivity ranges. Color film, for example, is limited to a four F-stop exposure range, the equivalent of a 16:1 contrast ratio. If the brightest area in a shot reads 160 foot candles, the darkest areas cannot read below 10 foot candles. Exceeding the 16:1 ratio would wash out highlights and blacken shadow details. To decrease contrast ratios, add light to dark areas and/or reduce light in bright areas.<br />
=====High Slide=====
Under brightly lit conditions (when the meter needle pegs to the right) inserting the High Slide into the slot on the top of the swivel head will convert the Sekonic to ‘high illumination measurement’ and readings will be measured in using the ‘'''H'''’ pointer. When the High Slide is not in use, readings should be measured using the ‘'''L'''’ pointer. (Except when using the Lumigrid as previously explained.) When the High Slide is not being used, store it in the meter’s back.
====Zeroing the Light Meter====
Before taking a reading, make sure the meter is zeroed. To do this:<br />
:Hold the light meter upright and eliminate all light reaching the sensor by covering the light port in the swivel head with your hand. This may be done with an accessory installed. Press the needle lock button and release it. The needle should point to zero on the incident light scale. If it doesn’t, return the meter to Media Loan and ask to have the meter zeroed.
====Taking a Light Reading====
Install the appropriate accessory by matching the white dots and turning the accessory clockwise until it stops. Select the film speed by turning the center dial until the appropriate ASA is indicated in the index window ('''ASA is the same as ISO'''). Point the Sekonic’s sensor from the area you want to be ideally exposed, on a line of axis with the camera lens. Be careful not to block light from the sensor. Push the needle lock button and release it. The needle will lock into reading position.
====Reading the Meter====
The needle will point to a foot candle number on the incident scale. Turn the outer dial until the white ‘'''L'''’ pointer corresponds to the foot candle number indicated by the needle. If the needle moves beyond the incident scale (pegs right), as mentioned in the accessories section, insert the High Slide re-measure the light, and line up the outer dial number with the red ‘'''H'''’ pointer. To determine the F-stop consult the Shutter Speed Scale on the bottom of the meter . Choose the shutter speed at which you will shoot. The correct F-stop will be located below the shutter speed.
====Filter Adjustments====
When using filters on your camera, the aperture may need to allow more light onto the film plane. Find out the factor for the filter you’re using and consult the X1/2, X2, and X4 symbols on both sides of the red ‘'''H'''’ and ‘'''L'''’ pointers to increase or decrease exposure. For instance, to double exposure for a filter factor of two, rest the X2 symbol (on the right side of the ‘'''L'''’ or ‘'''H'''’ pointer) under the foot candle number corresponding to your reading.
====EV Window====
=====Exposure Value or light Value=====
This number system is sometimes used to replace the traditional shutter speed and F-stop combinations and is used only with cameras equipped with an E.V.S. scale.
===Sekonic Flashmate Digital Meters===
====Setting the Film Speed====
Pressing down the '''ISO''' button, push up or down buttons to change setting.
====Incident Light Measurement====
For measuring ambient light, mount the lumisphere to swivel head. Switch the meter ON and point lumisphere to the camera from the position where subject is to be measured. Press measuring switch then measured value of F-stop or EV is displayed.<br />
For measuring illumination contrast, mount the lumidisc and switch the meter ON. Point the lumidisc directly toward center of main light. Press measuring switch in EV mode and read-out the measured value. In the same manner, read the EV number of fill-in light. Difference between EV numbers of main and fill-in lights becomes contrast ratio.<br />
For measuring luminance (Lux) set the ISO sensitivity to ISO 100 regardless of your film speed. Place the lumidisc parallel with the measured surface and read EV number in the same manner as for other measurements.
====Reflected Light Measurement====
Mount the lumigrid and switch the meter ON, then point the lumigrid directly toward part of subject to be measured. Measure reflected light from main point of subject as close as possible to the subject. Use adequate care in this case that the meter shadow does not interfere with the light to be measured.
====Post Measurement Calculation====
Calculation dependent upon change of film speed can be made by pressing either side of UP/DOWN key while depressing ISO selecting key.<br />
Calculation dependent dupon change of shutter speed can be made by pressing either side UP/DOWN key only.<br />
Conversion of measuring mode can be made by pressing F/EV selecting key.
====Measuring Range====
When measuring range is exceeded, F-stop or EV number will be replaced with E.o (error-over) or E.u (error-under) mark.
====Measurement for Movie Camera====
The procedure for taking measurements when using a movie camera is the same as for taking ambient light measurements.

[[Category:Cameras and Accessories Gear Guides]]

35mm SLR Camera Gear Guide

2026-06-17T23:39:27Z

Zornesn:

Vixia HD Camcorder Gear Guide

2026-06-17T23:38:46Z

Zornesn:

{{Media Loan Covid Message}}

<div class="container-fluid">

<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">

<div class="lead">

<div class="lead">[[File:Media Loan Logo.png|left|frameless|90x90px]]A camcorder designed for easily recording video. </div>

<div class="pull-right"></div>

</div>

==Overview==

Media Loan has several models of Vixia HD camcorders. The menu functions of the HF 200 are accessed by a joystick control on the LCD panel. The HF M300, HF M400 and HF M500 are operated by the touch screen LCD panel. Each camera comes with a 32 G SDHC memory card for almost 3 hours of recording time
==How to Use It==
=== Name of Parts ===
<gallery>
File:HF-M400-01-Name-of-parts.png|HF M400
File:HF-M400-02-Name-of-parts.png|HF M400
File:HF-M400-03-Name-of-parts.png|HF M400
File:HF-M400-04-Name-controller.png|HF M400
File:HF-M500-01-Name-of-parts.png|HF M500
File:HF-M500-02-Name-of-parts.png|HF M500
File:HF-M500-03-Name-of-parts.png|HF M500
</gallery>
=== Battery/AC Power ===
====Charging the Battery/Running Off AC====
Turn off the camcorder and attach the battery pack to the camcorder by lightly pressing the battery pack and sliding it down until it clicks. Plug the power adaptor into a power outlet. Connect the power adaptor to the camcorder’s DC IN terminal. The CHARGE indicator should starts flashing. The indicator will stay on when the charging is completed. Also, when the power adapter is connected, the camera can function without a battery pack.
====To Remove the Battery Pack====
Locate the battery release. On the HF 200, the battery release is on the bottom of the camera under the battery. On the HF 400 and HFM 500, it is on the side of the camera visible when the LCD display is flipped out. Slide the battery release to release the battery pack. Lift and pull out the battery pack.
<gallery>
File:HF-M400-05-battery-charge.png|HF M400 Charge Battery
File:HF-M400-07-battery-remove.png|HF M400 Remove Battery
File:HF-M500-04-battery-charge.png|HF M500 Charge Battery
File:HF-M500-08-battery-remove.png|HF M500 Remove Battery
</gallery>
====Battery Life====
When the camcorder is off, press the BATT.INFO button (3) to display your battery’s state. It will display charge status as a percentage as well as approximate recording time on this charge. The small and large batteries should record at least 45 and 100 minutes, respectively.
Lithium batteries begin to discharge once removed from charger. Although we charge these batteries at Media Loan, you should make sure they are fully charged before you need to use them.
====Battery Precautions====
*Do not expose battery to excessive heat or fire (it might explode!)
*Do not try to disassemble or modify battery
*Do not drop or knock battery
*Do not get battery wet
=== LCD/TOUCHSCREEN ===
<gallery>
File:HF-M400-08-lcd-rotate.png|HF M400 Rotate LCD Screen
File:HF-M400-06-lcd-rotate.png|HF M400 Rotate LCD Screen
File:HF-M400-09-lcd-backlight.png|HF M400 LCD Backlight
File:HF-M400-11-touchscreen-use.png|HF M400 Touchscreen
</gallery>
===Initialize the Memory Card===
Each camcorder comes with a Class 10 32G SDHC memory card which should prove adequate for your recording needs. (If you choose to use your own memory cards, take care to return the original card, undamaged, with the camera. Failure to do so will result in a replacement charge being billed to your student account.)<p>
<b> HF 200:</b> Press the [HOME] button. Other Settings > Tool Icon > Initialize [card icon] > Initialize > [Complete Initialization] > [Yes] > [OK] > [X] <p>
<gallery>
File:HF-M400-17-memorycard-insert.png|HF M400 Insert Memory Card
File:HF-M400-19-memory-initialize1.png|HF M400 Initialize Memory
File:HF-M500-06-memorycard.png|HF M500 Insert Memory Card
</gallery>
=== Operating Modes ===
<gallery>
File:HF-M400-12-opmodes-rec.png|HF M400 Record Mode
File:HF-M400-13-opmodes-play.png|HF M400 Play Mode
</gallery>
===Using the Menus===
<b>HF200:</b> The Function menu is accessed by pressing the function button from camera mode. A menu will appear containing options to adjust AE mode, white balance, image effects, digital effects, recording quality, and simultaneous recording. An icon is also present to access the “setup menu.” Navigation is done using the joystick. Scroll up and down the menu using the joystick, and then select the desired option by scrolling left and right. Certain options (like custom white balance) require triggering by pressing the joystick in (set). <p>
<b>HF M300:</b> The function menu is accessed by touching the [FUNC] key in camera mode.<p>
<b>HF M500:</b> With the LCD display open, press the <b>HOME</b> button on the side of the camcorder to open the HOME menu. The available options vary according to whether the camcorder is in recording or playback mode.
* The <b>Main Functions</b> panel contains frequently used shooting functions and is available only when the camcorder is in recording mode. Alternatively, you can touch <b>FUNC.</b> in the upper-left portion of the recording screen. Touch the function you want to set or adjust.
* The <b>Camera Mode</b> menu, available only in recording mode, allows you to change whether you record movies in AUTO, Manual [M] mode or to use "cinema-look" filters.
* <b>Recording Standard</b> is also only available in recording mode. It allows you to select whether you will record in AVCHD or MP4 format.
<gallery>
File:500 homebutton.png|HF M500 Home
File:HF-M400-14-menu-func.png|HF M400 FUNC. Menu
File:HF-M400-15-menu-edit.png|HF M400 Edit Menu
File:HF-M400-16-menu-setup.png|HF M400 Setup Menu
</gallery>
===Recording===
<b>HF 200:</b> Make sure the camera is powered on and that the mode dial is set to the middle setting (video camera icon).<p>
<b>HF M300:</b> With the camera powered on, set the mode switch to [M]. Make sure the camera icon is at the top of the LCD screen. Otherwise, you can enter video mode by touching the camera icon at the bottom right corner of the screen.<p>
<b>HF M500:</b> Press [START/STOP] to begin and pause recording.<p>
Use the LCD display to compose, and press the record start/stop button to begin recording. Press again to stop recording. The recording time remaining is displayed at the top of the LCD screen.
<gallery>
File:HF-M400-22-manual.png|HF M400 Record in Manual Mode
File:HF-M400-26-framerate.png|HF M400 Frame Rate
File:HF-M400-29-prerecord.png|HF M400 Pre-record
File:HF-M400-23-manual-review.png|HF M400 Review Last Scene
File:HF-M400-21-playback.png|HF M400 Playback
File:HF-M500-07-recordmanual.png|HF M500 Record in Manual Mode
File:HF-M400-25-rectimes.png|Approx. Record Times
</gallery>
===Using the zoom===
The zoom lever, located on the top of the camera, is used to zoom in and out. Toggle it in either direction to zoom in or out. The “W” side of the toggle stands for wide angle or “zoomed out,” and the T side for telephoto or “zoomed in.” When menu settings are typical, you may vary the speed of zooming by using this toggle either gently (for slower zoom) or firmly (for faster zoom).
<gallery>
File:HF-M400-20-zoom.png|HF M400 Zoom
</gallery>
===Manual Focus===
<b>HF 200:</b> In camera mode, press the joystick upwards or downwards to access the joystick menu. Navigate to the focus option and press joystick in (set) to select it. Pressing joystick in again will change the focus mode. In manual mode (M), moving the joystick to the left (towards person icon) will focus closer, while pushing it towards the right (mountain icon) will focus farther away. To revert to auto-focus mode, simply press the joystick in again to change back to auto-focus.<br />
<b>HFM300:</b> With the touchscreen interface, the camera is able to focus on any part of the frame that the user touches while in record mode. The camera takes note of the pixel configuration of the subject you select, thus allowing it to track a moving subject, adjusting the focus to compensate for it’s changing position. If you would like to manually focus, touch the [FUNC] button at the top-right corner of the screen. Tap on the [FOCUS] button, then tap on the [MF] button at the bottom of the screen so the yellow indicator turns on. You are now in manual focus mode. You can either toggle focus using the two buttons that appear on the left, or touch the part of the screen you would like camera to focus on (this will lock the focus and will NOT track the subject).
<gallery>
File:HF-M400-34-focus2.png|HF M400 Manual Focus
</gallery>

===Exposure Compensation===
Exposure compensation is used to override how bright or dark the camera makes your shot. The camera usually takes in a medium-grey/average amount of light. This may be too much or too little light for your shot. To preserve the darkness of a night shot, or the glaring brightness of a backlit subject, for example, requires the use of exposure compensation.<p>
Exposure comp. is accessed similarly to the focus option mentioned previously:<p>
<b>HF200:</b> Push the joystick up or down and navigate to the “exposure” setting. Then move the joystick to the left or right to make your shot darker or brighter, respectively.<p>
<b>HF M300:</b> Touch the [FUNC] button at the top-right corner of the screen. Tap on the [EXPOSURE] button, then tap on the [M] button at the bottom of the screen so the yellow indicator turns on. You are now in manual exposure mode. You can either toggle exposure by sliding the “dial” that appears on the left, or touch the part of the screen you would like camera to focus on.<p>
Make sure to change this option back to neutral position before your next shot!
<gallery>
File:HF-M400-32-exposure.png|HF M400 Exposure
</gallery>
===White Balance===
White balance determines what the camera sees as “white.” Because light sources have different colors, the camera must be “balanced” to prevent color casts in your footage. “WB” is the second option down in the function menu. Settings include automatic, sunlight, shade, flourescent, etc., as well as a custom setting. To use custom white balance, highlight the “custom WB” icon, point the camera at a white or color-neutral surface (such as a wall or sidewalk) and press [SET]. You will be able to see the color effect of your choice (or custom setting) on the LCD screen.
<p>
<b> HF M500:</b> [FUNC.] > [WB White Balance] > Desired option > [X]
<gallery>
File:HF-M400-36-whitebalance.png|HF M400 White Balance
</gallery>
===AE Mode===
AE mode is the first option in the function menu. It determines where the camera gets its light from. Options include Program AE (camcorder automatically adjusts the aperture and shutter speed), Tv (shutter priority - you set the shutter speed value and the camcorder sets the aperture value), Av (aperture priority - you set the aperture value and the camcorder sets the shutter speed), and scene mode, as well as a more image-altering mode called “Cine,” which achieves a cinematic look. Program is the more typically automatic setting, and recommended for new users. In some situations, Av and Tv modes may be useful. Another option is SCN or scene mode: highlighting this mode and pressing the joystick (set) will bring up a menu of different recording situations such as “sports” or “sunset.” Unlike P, Tv, Av, and Cine, Selecting one of these scene modes also sets other options like white balance, preventing the user from controlling these options manually.<p>
Aperture refers to a variable iris which opens up and stops down, letting more or less light into the camera. It has a side effect of altering “depth of field” or “depth of focus,” that is, how far the range of in-focus objects extends towards and away from the camera. Aperture priority mode (Av) takes advantage of this: the user specifies an aperture value to use and the camera automatically makes up the difference of light using other variables. To use Av mode, select it using the joystick. Then press the joystick (set), which will summon a sub-menu in which to select your desired aperture. Selecting a smaller number (e.g. f/2.0) will reduce depth of field. A larger number (e.g. f/8.0) will increase it. The icon will blink if your selection is too extreme for the camera to make up the difference in light, and this should be avoided.<p>
Shutter speed is a second variable which lets more or less light in, and shutter priority mode (Tv) mode works similarly. Any changes made on these AE options will be visible on the LCD screen, including depth of field changes and loss of light from extreme selections. For a fuller discussion of these modes, as well as cine and portrait modes, refer to the full manual available on the Media Loan web site.<p>
<b> HF 200:</b> Open the joystick guide by pushing up on the joystick. Using the joystick, navigate to [Exposure]. Push the joystick to the left or right to adjust the exposure. Press the joystick in gently to set.
<p>
<b> HF M500:</b> [FUNC.] > [Rec. Programs > [TV Shutter-Pri. AE] > or [AV Aperture-Pri. AE] > [Left Arrow] or [Right Arrow] to set the desired shutter speed (TV) or aperture value (AV) > [X]
<gallery>
File:HF-M400-30-shutter.png|HF M400 Shutter/AE
File:HF-M400-31-shutter-aperture-guidelines1.png|Shutter Speed and Aperture Value Guidelines
</gallery>
===Image Stabilizer===
When image stabilizer is set to “on,” the lens elements in the camera float freely. This is useful to dampen motion from hand-holding the camera. When attached to a tripod this setting should be off. When this setting is on, after panning on a tripod, the image will “jitter” back and forth as the elements settle. Because the tripod offers a steadied image already, make sure to turn this option off when tripod-mounted.<p>
<b>HF M500:</b> Press [HOME]. Other Settings > Camera Icon > [Image Stabilizer] > Desired IS mode > [X]. Dynamic - compensates for a higher degree of shake, such as when shooting when walking. Standard - Compensates for a lower degree of shake. Off - use when mounted on tripod.
<gallery>
File:HF-M400-27-imgstabilization.png|HF M400 Image Stabilization
File:HF-M400-28-poweredis.png|HF M400 Powered IS
</gallery>
===Audio Recording Level===
You may change the audio levels which get recorded to your sound track, whether recording with the built-in microphone or an external one. If the signal is too low, your audio track will be faint, and will lose quality as you boost volume during playback. If the signal is too high, your audio track will “clip,” having too much data to record at once, and sound garbled. The default setting adjusts this audio level automatically, but it may sometimes be necessary to override this.<p>
This setting is changed similarly to exposure compensation and manual focus. On the <b>HF M300</b>, it is the second button in the right column of the Function Menu. For the <b>HF 200:</b> Move the joystick up or down, while in recording mode, to access the joystick menu. Navigate (using the joystick) to the “Mic. Level” option. Pressing the joystick in (set), at this point, will change to manual control mode, which can be adjusted by moving the joystick to the left or right. Pressing the joystick in once more will toggle back to automatic level control. Refer to p. 76 of the full manual for more information.
<gallery>
File:HF-M400-38-audioreclevel.png|HF M400 Audio Recording Level
File:HF-M400-40-micdir.png|HF M400 Microphone Direction
File:HF-M400-43-headphones1.png|HF M400 Headphones
</gallery>
===Connections===
The camera can be connected to external microphones, TVs, headphones, VCRs, and some computer monitors.
Supplied with the camera are a component video cable, as well as an RCA (red, white, and yellow) A/V cable. The camera also has a HDMI port which can connect to newer computer monitors, LCD TVs, and other newer A/V devices. Media Loan does not supply this cable.<p>
The AV/headphones port is used to connect to RCA devices (such as many TVs and VCRs) via the supplied AV-RCA cable. It can also be used to provide audio only as a standard headphone jack. Because this port also contains a video connection, the headphone/AV option must be set correctly (HF200: located in the fourth tab of the setup menu, HFM300: Third tab in the Main Menu). When using headphones, set it to headphones, and, when connecting via RCA, set it to AV. If headphones are inserted while on the AV setting, they will pick up video signal and output it as garbled noise. If the RCA cable is connected but the option is set to headphones, you will get no video signal.<p>
Component video (red, green, and blue jacks) transmits with higher quality than the (yellow) RCA video jack. A cable is supplied, which plugs into the camera through the component out port.<p>
External microphones can be connected via the microphone terminal. Different microphones can be used to achieve different audio pickup patterns as well as increased sensitivity and flexibility in placement. Media Loan carries compatible microphones.
<gallery>
File:HF-M400-45-terminals.png|HF M400 Terminals
</gallery>
===Uploading/Saving Footage===
Power camera off and connect it to a computer via the supplied USB cable, then power on the camera. Alternatively, remove the SD card while the camera is powered down, and connect the card directly to a computer. The camera’s memory should appear as a drive, from which your footage files can be copied to your computer. (Note: when connecting via USB on mac in MP4 recording mode, the camera data may only be available by importing within the Photos application.) Never remove the camera’s memory card when connected via USB, and remember to safely eject the device before disconnecting. <br />

'''IMPORTING AVCHD DATA''' <p>
On Mac computers:
*Connect the camera SD card (or the camera via USB, in playback mode).
*Open the "CANON" disk that appears on the desktop or in the Finder sidebar.
*Open the "private" folder.
*Within that folder, right click on the file titled "AVCHD" and select "Show Package Contents."
*Within that folder, right click on the file titled "BDMV" and select "Show Package Contents."
*Within that folder, open the "STREAM" folder. This folder will contain .MTS video files of all AVCHD format clips on the memory card. From here, the .MTS video files can be copied or imported to the computer or other storage drive as needed. While compatible with most media players and video editors, the .MTS files can be converted to .mp4 files (using a software or internet based file converter) for wider compatibility and ease of use, if needed. <p>
On Windows computers:
*Connect the camera SD card (or the camera via USB, in playback mode).
*Navigate to the Windows File Explorer and open the "CANON (E:)" disk that appears in the File Explorer sidebar.
*Open the "PRIVATE" folder.
*Within that folder, open the "AVCHD" folder.
*Within that folder, open the "BDMV" folder.
*Within that folder, open the "STREAM" folder. This folder will contain .MTS video files of all AVCHD format clips on the memory card. From here, the .MTS video files can be copied or imported to the computer or other storage drive as needed. While compatible with most media players and video editors, the .MTS files can be converted to .mp4 files (using a software or internet based file converter) for wider compatibility and ease of use, if needed.

==Media Loan Gear it Connects With Well==

See the [[Media Loan Catalog]] for more info about the below items.

* Video Tripod
* Camera Mountable Rode Microphone


</div>

<div class="col-md-1"></div>

<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">

{{GA Proficiency Information

|Testlink= [https://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Vixia_HD_Camcorder_Proficiency_Test Vixia Proficiency Test]

}}



{{Precautions, Help, and Other Wikis for all Media Loan Gear

|Exceptions=

*'''For This Gear Specifically'''

** Avoid condensation, especially when taking the camera from indoors into colder weather, place the camcorder in an airtight plastic bag and let it adjust to temperature changes slowly before removing it from the bag. When condensation is detected the camcorder automatically shuts off, the warning message “CONDENSATION HAS BEEN DETECTED” appears for approx. 4 seconds and a water drop icon starts flashing.
After the condensation warning stops flashing, wait for 1 more hour before resuming use.
**Do not leave the viewfinder exposed to direct sunlight as it may melt

}}





</div>


</div>


</div>

__NOEDITSECTION__<p>
[[Category:Cameras and Accessories Gear Guides]]

GoPro Hero 4 Gear Guide

2026-06-17T23:37:48Z

Zornesn:

{{Media Loan Covid Message}}

<div class="container-fluid">

<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">

<div class="lead">

<div class="lead">[[File:Media Loan Logo.png|left|frameless|90x90px]]A versatile camera for action and underwater video production. </div>

<div class="pull-right"></div>

</div>
[[file:IMG 0110.jpg|thumb|300x300px|GoPro Hero4]]
[[file:IMG 0114.jpg|thumb|300x300px|Housing & Monopod]]
==Overview==
The GoPro HERO4 can shoot video, photo, and timelapse footage. It is a small video camera that delivers super slow motion at 240 frames per second, high-resolution 4K30 and 2.7K60 video combines with 1080p120 and 720p240 slow motion to enable stunning, immersive footage. Waterproof to 131 feet (40 meter) with 12MP photos at 30 frames per second and improved audio.
[http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/images/e/ef/GoPro_manual.pdf Complete Manual GoPro HERO4]
==Kit Contents==
* GoPro HERO4 Camera
* Durable plastic housing
* Monopod
* Head-mount & locking bolt
* One Micro USB 32GB memory card
* 2 Batteries
* Mini USB cable & wall charger

==How to Use It==
===NAVIGATION & OPERATION===
There are multiple ways to operate this camera. You can access the menus and functions by using the exterior buttons, as illustrated in the diagram. You can also navigate through the camera using the touch display, as described below the "parts" list.

[[file:GoPro parts.png|thumb|800px|center|GoPro Hero4 Parts]]

Exterior Parts:
# Camera Status Light (Red)
# Shutter/Select Button: use to record video, take pictures, and make selections in the menus
# Wireless Status Light (blue)
# Camera Status Screen
# Power/Mode Button: use to power the camera on/off, as well as cycle through the various camera modes
# Micro HDMI Port (cable not included)
# MicroSD Card slot (never remove included card)
# Mini-USB port (supports composite A/V cable & 3.5mm stereo mic adapter, not included)
# Audio Alert
# Microphone
# HERO Port
# Touch Display: use to navigate the functions/settings of the camera
# Touch Display Sleep/Wake Button
# Settings/Tag Button: use to change the settings of the selected camera mode
# Battery Door
<br />

====POWER ON/OFF====
'''On:''' Press the '''Power/Mode button''', located on the front of the camera. The status light will flash three times. When the camera status displays information, the camera is on.<br />
'''Off:''' Press and hold '''Power/Mode''' button for a few seconds, until the red light flashes mulitple times.

====TOUCH DISPLAY OPERATION====
Located on the back of the camera, the touch display lets you control the cameras settings and playback your photos/videos. It also functions as a viewfinder.<br />
* ''Swipe left'' to switch camera '''Modes'''
* ''Swipe right'' to display the last captured video or photo
* ''Swipe up'' from the bottom to access '''Mode Settings'''
* ''Swipe down'' from top to close menus
* ''Swipe up/down'' to navigate the menus
* ''Tap'' to make a selection
* ''Double tap'' to change the field of vision (FOV) in '''Preview Mode'''
* Press on display for two seconds to lock the touch display. This is useful if you are capturing handheld footage.

===MODES===
The GoPro has multiple modes, listed below. Each mode is explained in the following corresponding sections.<br />

'''To access the various modes''': either ''swipe left'' on the '''touch display screen''' and ''tap'' to select your desired mode, OR cycle through the modes by pressing the '''Power/Mode''' button. The modes are listed below, as well as their location within the mode menu screen.

* Video (top right)
* Photo (top center)
* Multi-shot (top left)
* Playback (bottom left)
* Set up (bottom right)
<br />

'''Adjust mode settings:''' each mode has specific mode settings that you can adjust. To do so, either ''swipe up'' on the display or press the '''Settings''' button.<br />

'''Note:''' as you change the capture settings in video, photo, and multi-shot, a different icon will appear in the mode menu. The image below shows the various icons that represent these modes depending on the selected capture setting.

[[file:Go pro mode menu.png|thumb|500px|center|Video, Photo, and Multi-Shot Mode Icons]]

====VIDEO MODE====
To capture video in '''Video Mode''', simply press the '''Shutter/Select''' button to start and stop recording. <br />

=====VIDEO SETTINGS=====
To adjust the settings for video mode, either ''swipe up'' when in video mode OR press the '''Settings Button.''' Listed below are all the settings you can control in this menu.
* '''Mode:''' refers to video capturing modes, as explained in the section below.
* '''Resolution:''' change the video resolution, as explained below.
* '''Frames per second:''' choose between 24-60 FPS (24fps is the cinematic standard, 60fps is for slow-motion).
* '''Field of View (FOV):''' select the FOV. Choices depend on video resolution.
* '''Low-Light:''' enable for low-light environments. Camera will automatically adjust FPS.
* '''Spot Meter:''' allows you to record from a dark space while pointing into a brighter settings, such as in a car.
* '''Protune:''' enables the protune settings. See '''PROTUNE''' section.

=====VIDEO CAPTURING MODES=====
Video Mode contains 4 different capturing modes, located in the '''Video Settings.'''
* '''Video''' is the standard capturing mode to record video.
* '''Time Lapse''' mode creates video from frames captured at specific intervals. It is available only in 4K and 2.7K 4:3 resolutions and is captured without audio.
* '''Photo+Video''' will capture a photo at selected intervals while you record video.
* '''Looping''' lets you continuously record but only save select moments. Available intervals for Looping are 5, 20, 60 and 120 minutes. Only the most recent interval (ex: 5 minutes) is saved when you stop recording. If you record for an interval and do not press the Shutter/Select button to stop recording and save, the camera begins a new interval by recording over your previous footage. If you select '''Max Video''' as the interval, the camera records until the memory card is full, then overwrites the content. Monitor your footage carefully in looping mode!

=====VIDEO RESOLUTIONS=====
Adjust the video resolution in the '''Video Settings.''' <br />

Resolution correlates to the amount of pixels and frame rate of your footage. There are a few factors that will go into deciding which resolution you would like to film at (e.g. how much space is available on your memory card, what you will be filming). This camera is capable of filming at nine different resolutions and each one has its own practical usage. Keep in mind that the higher the resolution, the more room it will take up on your memory card.

====PHOTO MODE====
When in '''Photo Mode''', you can take a photo by pressing the '''Shutter/Select''' button.

=====PHOTO SETTINGS=====
To adjust the settings for photo mode, either "swipe up" when in photo mode OR press the '''Settings button.''' Listed below are all the settings you can control in this menu.
* Mode: change the way the camera captures images, as described in the section below
* Megapixels: adjust the size photos, shown in the chart below.
* Spot Meter: allows you to capture photos from a dark space pointing the camera into a brighter setting such as from a car.
* Protune: enables the protune settings. See '''PROTUNE''' section for full explanation.

=====PHOTO CAPTURING MODES=====
Adjust the photo capturing mode in the '''Photo Settings.'''
* Single: this mode will take a single photo adjusted to the manual settings.
* Continuous Shooting: will take pictures as long as the shutter button is pressed down.
* Night: allows you to manually adjust the shutter speed to get a properly exposed image.

=====PHOTO RESOLUTIONS=====
Select the photo resolution that best fits your needs. Keep in mind that the more Megapixels (MP), the more space the images will take up on the memory card. Adjust the photo resolution in the '''Photo Settings.'''

* 12MP/Wide & 7MP/Wide: Largest field of view (FOV). Good for action shots in which you want to capture as much as possible within the frame.
* 7MP/Medium & 5MP/Medium: Mid-range FOV.

====MULTI-SHOT MODE====
Multi-shot mode is a photo mode that contains three capture settings, described below. <br />

=====MULTI-SHOT SETTINGS=====
To change the '''Multi-shot Mode''' settings, either ''swipe up'' while in multi-shot mode OR press the '''Settings''' button. Below is the settings you will be able to change.<br />
* Mode: change the multi-shot capture mode, described in the section below.
* Rate (burst mode only): adjust the rate in which photos are captured.
* Interval (timelapse and nightlapse modes only): adjust the intervals in which time lapse photos are taken.
* Megapixels: described in the '''PHOTO RESOLUTION''' section.
* Spot meter: allows you to capture photos from a dark space pointing the camera into a brighter setting such as from a car.
* Protune: enables the protune settings. See '''PROTUNE''' section for full explanation.

=====MULTI-SHOT CAPTURE MODES=====
Adjust the Multi-shot captures modes in the '''Multi-Shot Settings.'''
* Burst (default): captures up to 30 photos in 1 second. Perfect for action shots. Change the rate under the Multi-shot settings.
* Time Lapse: captures a series of photos at specified intervals, which you can adjust in the Multi-shot settings.
* Night Lapse: captures a series of photos at specific intervals and exposure times, which you can adjust in the Multi-shot settings. Use this in low-light environments, such as the night sky.

====PLAYBACK MODE====
In Playback mode you can review your images. Select videos/pictures to view by ''tapping'' them, OR using the '''Power/Mode''' button to cycle through the files and selecting them with the '''Shutter/Select''' button.<br />

In video playback, you will see four icons on the bottom of the screen:
* '''Delete:''' will delete the selected file
* '''Play/ Pause:''' use this to pause the video, giving you the option to choose which frame to stop on.
* '''Scissors icon''': allows you to create a short clip from your video. This does not affect the original footage. The clip will be saved as a new file.
<br />

To exit Playback mode, ''tap'' the '''X''' in the top right hand corner.

====SET-UP MODE====
Use the '''Set-up Mode''' to control the following functions of the camera.
* '''Wireless:''' allows you to pair the camera with a smartphone/tablet or GoPro remote (not included)
* '''Touch display:''' change the sleep, brightness, etc
* '''Orientation:''' changes the orientation of the display (set this to auto)
* '''Default Mode:''' select which mode the camera is automatically set to when powered on
* '''QuickCapture:''' quickly turn your camera on and begin capturing video / time lapse photos. The options for this setting are on and off (default).

* '''LED's:''' control the status lights
* '''Beeps'''
* '''Video format:''' keep in '''NTSC'''
* '''On Screen Display:''' toggle to show more/less file info during playback
* '''Auto-Off'''
* '''Date/Time'''
* '''Delete:''' use this to format your card before/after usage
* '''Camera Reset:''' to restore default camera settings. If your camera is behaving strangely, use this function
* '''Reset Wi-Fi'''

===PROTUNE===
Protune enables manual control of additional settings for advanced control and customization of your video footage and photos. <br />
To turn '''Protune''' on/off, access the settings (in video, photo, or multi-shot mode) by either ''swiping up'' on the display, OR by pressing the '''Settings''' button. Navigate to "Protune" and toggle on/off.<br />

Enabling protune will give you access to the following settings:
* '''White balance:''' choose between auto, 3000K, 5500K, 6500K, and native (minimal color correction)
* '''Color:''' "GoPro Color" and "Flat"
* '''ISO limit:''' restrict the max ISO the camera can use
* '''Sharpness:''' low-high increased sharpness
* '''EV Compensation:''' exposure compensation
* '''Reset:''' restore default protune settings
<br />
'''DO NOT ENABLE PROTUNE IF YOU ARE UNFAMILIAR WITH THE ABOVE TERMS.'''

===FILE TRANSFER===
To save your footage or photos, connect the camera to a computer using the included USB cable. '''DO NOT REMOVE THE INCLUDED SD CARD.'''

# Remove input/output cover, located on the side of the camera. '''DO NOT LOSE THIS COVER.'''
# Connect the camera to a computer with the included USB cable. Insert the mini end into the camera, and the other into the computer.
# Press the power button. The camera and computer will automatically connect.
# Locate the camera on your computer.
# Drag & drop (or use your preferred transfer method) the files into the desired location on the computer.

===BATTERIES===
The battery compartment is located on the bottom side of the camera. <br />

====CHARGING====
To charge this camera, connect it with the included USB cable to a computer or other USB charging adapter. The camera status light will turn on during charging and off when completely charged.<br />

'''DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CHARGE WITH A CABLE NOT INCLUDED IN KIT, CAN RESULT IN FIRE AND/OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.'''
===Proper Housing Cleaning===
Rinse in fresh water and shake dry or let air dry. Do not dry with a cloth, as lint may compromise the seal. If the seal is broken, water may leak through and permanently damage the camera. Re-install the seal into the grooves in the backdoor of the camera housing.

==Troubleshooting==

See [[Troubleshooting Media Equipment]] Guide for general information.

==Media Loan Gear it Connects With Well==

See the [[Media Loan Catalog]] for more info about the below items.

* DolphinEar Hydrophone is capable of recording audio underwater and could be used in tandem with the GoPro. Just plug the Hydrophone into an H4n and record it while the the GoPro is recording.
* Have a multi-camera shoot with a go pro and Canon Rebel T6i or Vixia Camcorder
* Record high quality audio with the H4n and sync it with your footage gathered on the GoPro.


</div>

<div class="col-md-1"></div>

<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">

{{GA Proficiency Information

|Testlink= [https://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/GoPro_Hero_4_Proficiency_Test GoPro Hero 4 Proficiency Test]

}}



{{Precautions, Help, and Other Wikis for all Media Loan Gear

|Exceptions=

*'''For This Gear Specifically'''
** You actually can put this in water, but only when sealed in the housing. Don't expose any other media loan gear to water.
**Keep the plastic camera housing on the camera during all filming.
** Make sure the rubber lining of the housing is completely clean before exposing the camera to water.
** Make sure the locking bolt is always secured tightly.
** Transfer your footage with the included USB cable '''(do not remove card)'''
** Don't remove Micro SD card from GoPro - they are very small and easy to lose track of
}}





</div>


</div>


</div>



__NOEDITSECTION__

[[Category:Cameras and Accessories Gear Guides]]

Canon Rebel T5i/T6i/T7i Gear Guide

2026-06-17T23:37:29Z

Zornesn:

{{Media Loan Covid Message}}

<div class="container-fluid">

<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">

<div class="lead">

<div class="lead">[[File:Media Loan Logo.png|left|frameless|90x90px]]Our most popular camera for both photo and video. </div>

<div class="pull-right"></div></div>

{{#ev:youtube|z-hYgQuEDRc|800|center}}

==Overview==
The Canon Rebel can be easy to use for beginners and has many features and controls for advanced users as well. This camera can be used with many other items at Media Loan, especially our variety of lenses, giving camera users the ability to get a wide variety of shots. We have many models for Canon Rebels. Starting form oldest to newest model, they are: XSi, T1i, T2i, T5i, T6i and T7i.
[http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/images/8/8b/Rebel_t5i_guide.pdf Canon Rebel T5i Complete Manual]<gallery>
[[File:Canon T6i Front Diagram.png|none|thumb|186x186px|T6i Front Diagram ]][[File:Canon Rebel T6i Back Diagram.png|none|thumb|177x177px|T6i Back Diagram]][[File:Canon T6i Mode Dial.png|none|thumb|178x178px]]
</gallery>

==How to Use It==
===Battery===

To insert a battery into the Canon Rebel:
# Open the battery door located on the bottom of the camera by pulling on the latch and swinging the door open.
# Align the battery attachment on the camera to the attachment in the slot.
# Slide the battery into place and lock it in.
# Close the battery door.

The battery will only fit in one way, so if it does not seem to fit properly, the battery is not oriented correctly. When powering the camera off, it takes several seconds for it to clean the sensor, so make sure that the "Sensor Cleaning" logo is no longer on the screen before removing the battery.
To charge the battery, slide it into the provided charger and then plug the charger into a standard 120 VAC outlet. '''Do not charge more than 24 hours. Do not use any charger other than the one provided with the camera.'''

====Battery Life====
The Canon Rebel shows charge level in three stages: "Battery OK", "Battery Low", and "Needs to be Charged". To conserve battery life, the Rebel will go into a sleep mode after a period of disuse with default settings. To wake the camera, press the shutter button down halfway. If you know you will not be using the camera, it is best to fully turn the camera off.

===Camera Memory===
The T5i/T6i/T7i can use SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards. Most Media Loan Rebels will come with a 16 gigabyte card already in the camera. If you wish to use your own card, make sure the speed rating is at least Class 4 for RAW photos, and Class 10 45mb/s for video.
To switch memory cards, open the door on the back of the camera's hand grip, and press the back of the memory card. The card will pop out far enough to grab the back. Remove the card. To insert a new card, make sure it is oriented correctly, and insert the new memory card until it stops.

===Canon Rebel Lenses===
The Canon Rebel will accept any Canon EF of EF-S bayonet lenses. Media Loan has several different zoom and prime lenses that can be checked out alongside a Canon Rebel. Prime lenses (fixed focal length) are recommended for faster apertures and picture quality, while zoom lenses are recommended for changing shooting settings, or long telephoto applications.
====Removing and Replacing Lenses====
'''Please do not remove the included kit lens from the camera unless you intend to attach a different lens immediately.''' On the Canon Rebel, there is a half-circle shaped button on the right side of the lens mount (viewed from the front of the camera). To remove the lens, press this button, and turn the lens approximately 90 degrees clockwise. To attach a new lens, find the guide mark on the lens body. If it is an EF lens, the guide mark will be a red circle. If the lens is EF-S, the guide mark will be a white square. Line up the guide mark with the matching mark on the Canon rebel body, set the lens into the mount, and turn it approximately 90 degrees counter clockwise until it locks into place.

When attaching or detaching the lens, '''take care to prevent dust from entering the camera through the lens mount.''' Removing the lens can cause debris to get inside the camera making the camera highly susceptible to serious damage. If the lens is removed, avoid putting your fingers inside the camera. If the mirror, or any other part of the inside of this camera gets dirty, please do not try to clean it yourself and bring it to Media Loan so that a qualified staff member can service the camera.
====Auto / Manual Focus Switch====
The Canon Rebel uses an in-lens focusing system, which is switched on and off on the body of the lens. Regardless of the settings on the camera body, if the switch on the lens is set to MF (Manual Focus), the camera will not perform AF (Auto Focus) functions.
====Image Stabilization====
Some canon lenses feature an optical IS (Image Stabilization) function. This can be useful for shooting fast-moving hand-held shots, shots in low-light environments, etc. Because the IS is optical, it will not deteriorate the quality of the image as digital image stabilization does. However, using the IS feature on a lens will drain the battery much faster. Due to power consumption concerns, we recommend that the IS be turned off when shooting from a tripod, or at high enough shutter speeds that hand movement will not be a concern. The IS controlled on the lens body, and if the lens has an IS feature, the switch will be next to the AF/MF switch next to the lens mount.

===Controls===
The T6i has two added buttons on top of the camera body, above the Mode Dial: DISP. and one for Auto-Focus (AF) functionality. The DISP. button will turn the LCD screen on/off when Live View is disengaged, and the AF allows for quick access to Auto-Focus settings.
====Mode Dial====
<gallery>

</gallery>
=====A-DEP=====
A-DEP (Automatic DEPth of Field) mode on the Canon Rebel is designed to maximize focus across a picture, and is primarily intended for landscapes or large groups of people. A-DEP must be used with AF turned on, as the camera will use the AF sensor array to search through the frame for the distance of all subjects, then determine aperture and shutter values to create a depth of field that will keep all subjects in focus. A-DEP is not recommended for moving subjects, portraits, or shots where foreground and background de-focus is desired. The only controllable exposure settings in A-DEP mode are ISO and Exposure compensation.

=====M=====
M (Manual) mode offers full control over all features on the Canon Rebel. All exposure settings and picture styles must be changed by the user. This allows for the most creative control over the camera, but also demands an understanding of the camera's features, and basic principals of photography. In manual mode, the shutter speed is controlled by the dial next to the shutter release button. Aperture is controlled by the same dial while the AV button on the back of the camera is pressed. ISO can be set by pressing the button on the top of the camera between the Mode Dial and the Shutter Speed Dial. While in M, you can choose Auto ISO.

=====Av=====
Av (Aperture Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed to let the user choose aperture values, and automatically determine shutter speed for correct exposure. While in Av mode, the dial next to the shutter button will control the aperture. ISO is controlled the same way as in M mode, and shutter speed is determined by the camera. Av mode is designed to let the user control depth of field in a shot (to customize deep of shallow focus), but may not be good for high speed subjects, as the camera may use a slow shutter speed to acquire correct exposure.

=====Tv=====
Tv (Shutter Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed for photography where shutter speed is crucial. In Tv mode, the shutter speed is controlled with the dial next to the shutter button. In this mode, the user determines shutter speed, and the camera will automatically determine an aperture value for correct exposure. ISO is controlled in the same manner as in M mode. Tv mode is designed for applications such as sports photography, where depth of field is not particularly important, but fast shutter speeds to minimize motion blur are desired.

=====P=====
P (Program Auto-Exposure) mode allows the camera to control both the shutter speed and the aperture value. Users may still set the ISO as in M mode. In P mode, the user may change the shutter / aperture combination by turning the dial next to the shutter button. When the user changes the shutter / aperture setting like this, the camera will automatically change both shutter speed and aperture value simultaneously to maintain correct exposure. This mode is good for shooting in rapidly changing environments, or learning how the combination of shutter and aperture change both exposure and visual elements within the picture.

=====CA=====
CA (Creative Auto) mode operates exactly like full automatic mode with several more user controlled options allowed. In CA mode, the user may turn the flash on or off, change exposure compensation, choose picture styles, and change the drive mode of the camera. All other values are locked to camera-control.

=====Auto (Green Square)=====
Auto mode locks all options into camera control. User cannot override any options on the camera, including exposure, picture style, or drive mode. Auto mode is not recommended for any shooting situation.

=====Other Still Photo Modes=====
The Canon Rebel has several specialized automatic modes, designed for various different applications. They mimic the manual control modes without giving the user any actual manual control of the camera. '''Flash Off''' mode runs like full auto, but locks out the flash. '''Portrait''' mode uses a wide aperture to defocus the background and emphasize the subject. '''Landscape''' mode uses a small aperture to create deep focus from the foreground to the background. '''Macro''' mode attempts to optimize exposure and shutter drive for close-up photography (NOTE: the close-focus distance of the rebel is determined by the lens, and will not change regardless of what mode the camera body is set to. To take photos with small subjects near the camera, check out a macro-specialized lens from Media Loan). '''Sports''' mode will use the fastest shutter speed possible to minimize motion blur in pictures. '''Night Portrait''' mode will fire the flash to get a clear photo of the foreground subject, and use a long shutter speed to capture the background. Although each of these modes has specific applications, manual camera modes will offer more control in any situation.

====Video Mode====
The T5i/T6i cameras have full-manual HD video functionality. Unlike other Rebel models at Media Loan, the video mode on the T5i/T6i is activated on the same switch '''near the Mode Dial as ON/OFF'''. This allows the user to easily change '''exposure modes with the mode dial''' while shooting video.
Turn the switch to the video camera icon to engage video mode. The mirror will open, and live view will automatically activate '''(the Q menu is disabled in video mode)'''. To record or stop recording video, press the live view button. You can change the exposure and image settings the same way in video mode as in photo mode (exterior buttons, touch screen). You can also adjust image settings in the '''MENU'''. Pressing '''INFO''' will display more or less information.
====Aperture / Exposure Compensation Button====
The '''Aperture / Exposure Compensation''' button (Av +/-) allows control over the aperture while in manual shooting mode. While in other modes, the button controls exposure compensation, allowing the user to make the camera expose lighter or darker than the internal meter would under normal operation.

====Quick Control Button (Q) / Q Menu====
The '''Quick Control (Q)''' button allows camera settings to be controlled via the cross keys when the '''Q Menu''' is engaged. To use the quick control feature, turn off Live View and press the Q button. You can then use the cross keys to select the setting you wish to change.

====Display Button====
'''T6i ONLY'''. The '''Display''' (DISP) button on the camera will turn the the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the '''Display''' button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.

====Info Button====
The '''INFO''' button on the camera will turn the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the INFO button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.
When Live View mode is engaged, the INFO button will display exposure settings on the LCD screen. Press the INFO button multiple times to display more or less settings.

====Depth-of-field Preview Button====
The aperture opening changes only at the moment when the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open. Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the LCD screen, the depth of field will look narrow. Press the depth-of-field preview button (located on the camera body near the lens mount) to stop down the lens to the current aperture setting and check the actual depth of field (range of acceptable focus). This will darken the viewfinder considerably. This button can also be used to display the exposure settings in the bottom of the viewfinder.

===Live View===
Both the T5i/T6i are capable of shooting in Live View mode. This will open up the mirror and the shutter in the camera body and display a live image from the camera's sensor on the screen. To turn live view on or off, press the button on the camera next to the eyepiece with the circular red Record logo and a small logo of the camera back. You can enable/disable Live View mode in the MENU.
While in Live View, auto focus will be severely limited. All video is shot in Live View mode. While the camera is in Live View, '''DO NOT''' point the camera at the sun, as the sensor is exposed and will be damaged. Note that the appearance of the image on the screen in live view mode does not reflect the brightness of the actual picture. Always use the meter or histogram, as the brightness of the LCD cannot be trusted.
While the camera is in video mode, live view mode will turn on automatically. In this case, the '''Live View''' button becomes the '''Record / Stop''' button for video recording.

===Metering Modes===
The Canon Rebels have built-in light meter systems. The metering modes measure the light of an image in order to determine whether or not it is properly exposed. The light meter is displayed in multiple places, including in the bottom of the viewfinder, in the Q Menu, and the bottom of the LCD screen in Live View mode.
T5i/T6i both have four different modes to meter the lighting in a scene.
* '''Evaluative Metering''' is the camera's standard metering mode. It is suited for most shooting situations, including some moderate back-lighting of a subject.
* '''Partial Metering''' is effective when the background is significantly brighter or darker than the subject.
* '''Center-Weighted Average Metering''' takes the average of lighting across the frame with slight preference given to lighting in the center of the frame.
* '''Spot Metering''' meters from a small area in the center of the frame. Spot metering is the most accurate, but only accounts for a small part of the picture, so several meter readings may be necessary to evaluate the lighting of a scene.

===Shutter Drive Modes===
Shutter drive modes determine the way the camera will react when the shutter button is pressed. The T5i/T6i both have:
* '''Single Shooting''' will take a picture each time the shutter button is fully depressed.
* '''Continuous Shooting''' will take pictures as long as the shutter button is pressed down. The camera will take pictures as fast as the shutter mechanism and the data buffer will allow. (max. aprox. 3 shots/second)
* '''Self Timer / Remote Control''' will allow the shutter to be released via wired or wireless remote, or, if the shutter button is depressed, take a single shot after 2 or 10 seconds.
The T6i has some additional drive features that the T5i doesn’t:
* '''Single silent shooting''' is single shooting with less sound
* '''Silent continuous shooting''' is continuous shooting with less sound
* '''Self-timer: Continuous''' Press the up and down arrow keys to set the number of multiple shots (2 to 10) to be taken with the self-timer. 10 seconds after you press the shutter button, the set number of multiple shots will be taken.

===Image Size and Quality===
All Rebels have a number of image size and quality options. In most cases, the best option is to shoot at the highest resolution and quality possible, but space and processing limitations can make high-resolution images impractical.
===RAW Images===
Raw images are a direct feed from the camera's image sensor. Due to this, Raw files are extremely large and versatile. Raw image files have far better dynamic range than JPEG image files. Settings such as ISO and White balance can be changed during post processing, because Raw image files do not bake info into the image.

====JPEG Images====
JPEG images are compressed image files that save memory space by removing some of the detail and dynamic range from photographs. Canon Rebels apply a noise reduction process during the creation of JPEG images, which can make images look smoother in low-ISO situations, but can create a large amount of digital artifacts in high-ISO images. The T5i and T6i both have various resolution and quality settings for JPEG image capture.

===Menu System===
The full menu system of the Rebels can be accessed by pressing the '''MENU''' button on the back of the camera by the viewfinder. Image quality settings, picture style customization, memory management, screen brightness, and more are controlled from within the main menu. Use the cross keys to navigate the menu. Use the '''SET''' button to choose the highlighted option. At any time you can return to the main menu by pressing the '''MENU''' button again, or the home screen by halfway depressing the '''shutter release'''.

===Quick Exposure Settings Guide===
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the T5i/T6i. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder (enable with the depth-of-field preview button) and the LCD screen. The main ways to adjust exposure settings is with the top scroll wheel, the touch screen, set and cross keys, and the ISO and Av buttons.
The exposure settings can be adjusted in multiple ways:
* '''Exterior buttons:''' In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. To adjust the shutter speed, scroll back and forth with the top wheel. Aperture can be changed while holding down the Av button and scrolling with the top wheel. To adjust the ISO, press the ISO button (located on top of the camera near the mode dial) and then use the scroll wheel to make a selection.
* '''Q Menu (Live View Off):''' Enable the Q menu by turning off Live View. You can then adjust exposure settings in manual shooting modes. Press the Q button to enable selections and set button to go into specific settings. You can use the touch screen instead of buttons, as well as the exterior buttons.
* '''Live View:''' Enable the manipulation of the exposure settings in Live View by pressing the INFO button. Multiple depressions of INFO will enable various settings. Once engaged, you can use the touch screen or exterior buttons.

=== Custom White Balance ===
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure under the actual light source to be used.

'''Photograph a white object.'''
* The plain, white object should fill the spot metering circle.
* Focus manually and set the standard exposure for the white object.
* You can have have any white balance set for initial photograph--AWB, daylight, etc.

'''Select Custom White Balance in the menus.'''
* Under the second camera sub menu, select Custom White Balance, then press set.
* The photo you took should appear and then select OK and this white balance data will be imported.
* When the menu reappears, press the MENU button to exit the menu.

'''Make sure you are on the custom white balance setting.'''
* Press the WB button or the Quick Menu and select custom white balance and press set.
[[File:Media Loan Custom White Balance.png|none|thumb|100x100px|alt=Icon for Custom White Balance with 2 triagles on the bottom corners and a rounded black rectangle in the middle.]]
=== Putting your Media onto a Computer ===
There are two ways to put photos and videos onto a computer from you camera.
* '''SD card:''' Remove the SD card from your camera. Use a card reader from media loan to connect it to the computer via a USB mini to USB A cable. a folder should pop up automatically to the computer desktop, or be seen in the computer's file management system like Apples “Finder”. Remember to “eject” the folder before disconnecting the SD card.
* '''Direct connection:''' Connect your camera to the computer using a USB mini to USB A cable. the cable connects to a socket on your camera labeled “A/V out Digital” behind a rubber flap. Once connected turn on you camera and open a photo viewing software like Apples “Photos” desktop application. Within the application, your photos from the camera should be available as a folder. It should work similarly on the equivalent Windows photo application.

==Troubleshooting==

See [[Troubleshooting Media Equipment]] Guide for general information.

==Media Loan Gear it Connects With Well==

See the [[Media Loan Catalog]] for more info about the below items.
* EF and EF-S Lenses like the fisheye (shown right)
* Flash to add on top (shown right)
* Tripods and other stabilizers
* Other cameras for a multi-cam shoot
* Remote for time-lapse or wireless triggering
* Lighting for video and lighting control tools
* Zoom H4n Audio Recorder and microphones for higher quality audio


</div>

<div class="col-md-1"></div>

<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">

{{GA Proficiency Information

|Testlink= [https://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Canon_Rebel_Proficiency_Test Rebel Proficiency Test]

}}



{{Precautions, Help, and Other Wikis for all Media Loan Gear

|Exceptions=

*'''For This Gear Specifically'''

** Don't point camera toward Sun.
** Don't leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!
** Don't use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera
** Don't store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals
** Don't touch the mirror or sensor
** Don't please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!
}}





</div>


</div>


</div>



__NOEDITSECTION__
[[Category:Cameras and Accessories Gear Guides]]

Canon Speedlite Flashes

2026-06-17T23:36:02Z

Zornesn:

[[File:Speedlite-top.jpg]]
<br />
Media Loan offers two stand-alone speedlite flashes, the 430EX II and 580EX II. These do not require a proficiency and are checked out separately, unlike the Speedlite Kit offered at Media Loan, and work with all Canon Rebel cameras. These are multi-feature flash units for Canon EOS cameras and work automatically with E-TTL II, E-TTL, and TTL autoflash systems. They both can be used as on-camera flashes and as part of a wireless, multi-Speedlite flash systems.

===Basic Operation===

[[File:Flash front.png|300px|thumb|front]]
[[File:Flash back.png|300px|thumb|back]]
'''To use:''' <br>
1. Attach the flash to the camera by inserting it into the hot shoe mount on top. <br>
2. On the mounting foot, slide the lock lever to the right until it clicks into place. <br>
3. Flip the switch to "on". The "pilot" indicator should light up red.

Note: The hot shoe mount allows the flash to sync with the camera, however it does not send power to the flash. Make sure you have AA batteries to power the flash.

<br><br><br>
Flashes normally automatically sync up with Rebels. If not, you can adjust the mode on the flash itself as well as on the camera's menu under "flash control". Here you can enable/disable flash firing as well as set up which type of flash mode you want to use (E-TTL II, Manual, Multi).
<br><br><br>
To remove: press the lock release button and push the level to the left. This will release the flash and you can pull it out of the hot shoe.

===Other features===
====C.Fn.====
Custom functions can be set up on these speedlites. These can be adjusted in the Rebel's menu under "Flash Control" > "External flash C.fn setting".
====Mode====
Use this button to set the desired flash mode (E-TTL II, Manual, Multi).
====High-Speed Sync====
This enables the flash to synchronize with all shutter speeds. This is convenient when you want to use aperture priority for fill-in portraits.
====Zoom====
The flash coverage can be set to match the lens focal length. This can be set manually, press the "ZOOM" button and use the dial to adjust. 480EX II adjusts from 24-105mm, and the 580EX II adjusts from 28mm-105mm.

Exposure compensation can also be adjusted on the flash itself by pressing the "SET/SEL" button and turning the wheel to the dial to the desired setting.

'''Access the full guides here:''' <br>
430EX II <br>
http://www.the-digital-picture.com/Owners-Manuals/Canon-Speedlite-430ex-Flash-Manual.pdf <br>
http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_Speedlite430EXII_QuickGuide.pdf

580EX II <br>
http://mfaphoto.schoolofvisualarts.edu/pdfs/manuals/Canon_Speedlite%20580EXii_Flash.PDF <br>
http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_580EXII_QuickGuide.pdf
[[category:Media Loan Tests]]

Nissin Flashes for Rebel Quick Guide

2026-06-17T23:35:45Z

Zornesn:

'''This flash is to be used only with the Canon Digital Rebel Cameras. It is the only external flash to be used with the Rebels.'''
===General Precautions===
'''Care must be taken as burns can occur from touching hot parts.<br />
'''Do not operate flash if it has been dropped or damaged until it has been examined by a Media Loan assistant.<br />
'''Let flash cool before storing.<br />
'''Do not get the flash wet.<br />
'''The same care should be given to Canon speedlite flashes, with link for 430EX II at-http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_Speedlite430EXII_QuickGuide.pdf, and for 580EX II at-http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_580EXII_QuickGuide.pdf
<gallery>
File:mainviews.jpg|Nissin Rebel Flash
</gallery>

===Batteries===
<gallery>
File:batteries.jpg|Installing Batteries
</gallery>
With the power off, slide the battery cover off and place batteries in as indicated by the marks inside the battery compartment. Use only AA alkaline batteries.
===Attaching the Flash===
<gallery>
File:hotshoe.jpg|Attaching Flash
</gallery>
Loosen the lock ring, located at the bottom of the flash, and slide flash into hot shoe of camera. Make sure to tighten the lock ring before turning the flash on.
===Using the Flash===
Turn the power switch to the ON position, and the flash will begin charging. When the flash is charged the ready lamp will be steadily on. Adjust your camera’s settings for use with a flash. With the Rebel, you can set the camera to an automatic setting or in manual mode, set the shutter speed. You can set the shutter speed to anything slower than 1/200, but 1/60 is recommended for use with flash. Point camera at subject and press the shutter button half way down. The camera and flash will sync with camera. Once done adjusting press the shutter down fully to take the picture.
::'''If idle for 3 minutes, the flash will go into power saving mode and shut off. To turn the flash back on, press the shutter button.'''
===Bounce Head===
To avoid direct/harsh flash lighting, adjust the flash to reflect off a surface. Use a ceiling or wall that is white to avoid discoloring the image.
===Zoom head===
The zoom head should be adjusted to the focal length of the lens or wider. If too narrow the entire image will not be properly lit.
===Removing the Flash===
Turn the power switch to the OFF position and loosen the lock ring. Pull the flash back from the hot shoe to remove.

[[category:Media Loan Tests]]

Vivitar Flashes Quick Guide

2026-06-17T23:35:30Z

Zornesn:

A proficiency test is not required to check this equipment out.
===General Precautions===
* Care must be taken as burns can occur from touching hot parts.
* Do not operate flash if it has been dropped or damaged until it has been examined by a Media Loan assistant.
* Let flash cool before storing.
* Do not get the flash wet.
* Do not use with digital cameras.
<gallery>
File:vivitar-flash.jpg|
</gallery>
===Powering On===
The power switch on the back of the flash should show red for the power to be ON. The flash will emit a high pitch as it is charging, and when it is ready, the Open Flash control lights. If the Open Flash push-button blinks, this is indicating a battery-saving circuit is in operation. If the button does not light within 30 seconds, your batteries should be replaced.
====Power====
The flash uses four (4) AA batteries which fit into a holder in the battery compartment, next to the swivel head hinge, or with an optional AC power adapter the flash can be plugged into a standard wall outlet for power (this adapter is available through Media Loan). To insert the batteries, rotate the head to the 0 degree position, and slide the battery compartment door toward the rear of the body. Do not try to completely remove the compartment door. It stays attached to the flash unit. The holder may now be removed. Align the +/- ends as indicated on the holder body. Use alkaline batteries, others may be cheaper, but they will not last as long and may not function properly. Insert so the bare ends of the cells enter first. Press the holder into the cavity, and hold it down against the spring pressure as shut the cover.

===Modes of Operation===
There are multiple methods for taking pictures with these flashes: Using the automatic exposure control, using partial power or determining the flash manually.
===Setting Focal Length on the 285===
When using different focal lengths with the 285 you can adjust between wide (35), norm (50/55) and tele (105). 28mm wide inserts and diffusers are also available.
===Calculator Dial===
On the end of the flash hinge is the calculator (calc.) dial with three concentric inner rings, and one outside. The calculator dial is not connected to the flash and does not control functions. It is a tool to help you find the correct aperture setting for your camera based on distance from your subject, ASA of your film, or flash power setting (285 only). You will want the camera's shutter speed set to recommended settings. Media Loan's cameras should be set to 1/60 of a second, or "x".
====Using the Dial on the 283====
Select your film speed (ASA) by turning the dial until the black arrow lines up with your desired setting. Either estimate or measure the distance from the flash to the subject being illuminated. In the colored section go to the distance in either feet (ft) or meters (m). Set the thyristor (sensor unit on the front of the flash) to the color shown and your camera to the number given in f-stops above that color.
====Using the Dial on the 285====
If using an automatic mode: Select your film speed (ASA) by rotating the outside ring. Make sure the next ring has the black arrow pointing at FULL. Now using the distance from flash to subject find the distance on the inner most ring, again in either feet (ft) or meters (m). Using the color that covers your distance range, set the thyristor, and your camera using the f-stops given just above the distance and color indicators.
::'''If using partial power settings:''' Select how much power you wish to use by adjusting the dial on the thyristor (1/16, 1/4, or 1/2). Select your film speed (ASA) with the outermost ring, and what power you wish to use with the next ring in. As with the auto modes, find your distance and set your f-stops accordingly.
===Auto Exposure Control===
On the front of the flash is the Auto Thyristor Sensor. This small device detects the amount of light present when the flash is triggered, metering the level of illumination on the subject. The outer collar of the sensor is the mode selector. This rotates to set for different aperture ranges while in the automatic mode, or to set for manual operation. Holding the unit upright and pointed to the right, the small window on the side of the sensor shows the ranges in different colors, flash power or M for manual.
====Thyristor (Sensor Socket) Settings====
:'''M''' - Manual, the maximum amount of light will be output in this setting at all times. When in manual mode you can determine F-stop using the calculator dial, but disregard the color bands.<br />
:'''Yellow''' - The widest lens opening for shallowest depth of field. This will allow the greatest depth of flash illumination while in an automatic mode, from 5 to 43 feet.<br />
:'''Red''' - A medium lens opening for greater depth of field, but shorter operating distance, from 4 to 30 feet.<br />
:'''Blue''' - Greater still depth of field, shorter depth of illumination, 2 to 15 feet.<br />
:'''Purple''' - Maximum depth of field, smallest aperture and minimum range of illumination, 2 to 11 feet.<br />
===Bounce Lighting===
In situations where reflective surfaces are above your subject, you can "bounce" the light from the flash unit off the ceiling to diffuse the illumination. This will reduce shadows and soften the glare normally associated with flash photos. When using bounce techniques, be sure to calculate the flash to reflective surface to subject distance when setting the f-stop. The reflective surface's light absorption characteristics will affect the amount of illumination that gets to the subject. The color will also be transmitted to the subject, so choose neutral colored surfaces. When bouncing off absorbent surfaces, open the calculated f-stop one additional stop.
===Sufficient Light Indicator===
The SLI will slow for 2-3 seconds after a flash if the sensor reads the correct light level during the illumination. You can check your exposure before taking a shot by manually triggering the flash unit and watching the SLI. If it doesn't light, you can do a number of things to correct the illumination. Set the Mode Selector to a value which will allow a wider f-stop and reduce the subject and flash distance; bounce the light from a more reflective surface.
::'''NOTE:''' The SLI will not work in manual mode.
===Flash Guide Numbers===
Flash guide numbers will help you calculate f-stops for exposures using the manual position or when you bounce your illumination.<br />
Measure the flash-reflector-subject distance, and divide the total into the Flash Guide number listed for the ASA film you are using. Round off the result to the nearest f-stop and open one stop wider.<br />
Example: using ASA 25 film with a camera-reflector subject-distance of 20 feet -- Guide #20 divided by 20 equals 3 (f2.8 approximate) open an additional stop to f2.<br />
You can estimate flash bounce settings in other ways. In average rooms, a general rule is to open two stops from where you would set a direct shot.<br />
OR, using the Calculator Dial, estimate the camera-reflector-subject distance and open one more stop from what is indicated on the dial.<br />
::{| class="wikitable"
|-
! Guide Numbers
|-
| ASA || || 25 || 64 || 80 || 100 || 125 || 160 || 200 || 400 || 800
|-
| Guide # || 60 || 96 || 108 || 120 || 135 || 150 || 170 || 240 || 340 ||
|}
[[category:Media Loan Tests]]

Light Meters Quick Guide

2026-06-17T23:33:05Z

Zornesn:

Cables and Adapters Catalog

2026-06-17T23:25:42Z

Zornesn:

Obsolete wikipage

This is a list of most of the cables and adapters that Media Loan offers as part of general access (meaning any enrolled students can check them out). The Table should provide enough information to determine which cable or adapter you need, but for more information call or visit media loan for assistance.

In the name column, you will see P or S as part of some names, this is to indicate of the connector is a Plug or a Socket. Plug and Socket is a more technical and appropriate term than the often used connector description of Male and Female to describe if the connector is an extruding piece of metal (plug, male) or a hole that the metal goes into (socket, female). A dash mark in the name column indicates that the cable has 2 different ends like ''1/4"-Mini'' means that it is a 1/4" on one end and it goes to a Mini on the other end.
{| class="wikitable"
!'''Group'''
!'''Name'''
!'''Category'''
!'''Most Common Use'''
!'''Description'''
|-
!AUDIO
|Mini - 1/4" Dual
|AUDIO
|iPod
|Mini (1/8") splits to two 1/4" for stereo audio output from an iPod or laptop to other audio equipment.
|-
!AUDIO
|1/4" - Mini
|AUDIO
|Headphones
|Headphones plug adapter
|-
!AUDIO
|Mini - 1/4"
|AUDIO
|Headphones
|Headphones plug adapter
|-
!AUDIO
|Mini w/Screw - 1/4"
|AUDIO
|Headphones
|Headphones plug adapter
|-
!AUDIO
|Mini - RCA Dual
|AUDIO
|iPod
|Typically used to get stereo audio signal from an iPod or laptop and send it into a device with 2 RCA sockets for 2 channels of the stereo signal
|-
!AUDIO
|RCA Stereo
|AUDIO / VIDEO
|Home Audio
|For connecting stereo speakers or other audio devices that have two RCA connectors at both ends.
|-
!AUDIO
|Headphone Splitter
|AUDIO
|Headphones
|A cable that connects Mini (1/8") plug to two Mini (1/8") sockets. It allows two headphones to connect to one socket and both get stereo signal.
|-
!AUDIO
|RCA P - S
|AUDIO / VIDEO
|Home Audio
|RCA extended that has an RCA plug on one end and socket on another. This is not advised to be used to make really long RCA connections because this is an "unbalanced signal" and is vulnerable to adding noise at longer lengths.
|-
!AUDIO
|RCA P - P
|AUDIO / VIDEO
|Home Audio
|A standard RCA plug to plug cable that could be used for a single signal audio left, right or video.
|-
!AUDIO
|MINI P - S
|AUDIO
|iPod
|Mini (1/8") extender is used for increasing the reach of a mini connection.
|-
!AUDIO
|MINI P - P
|AUDIO
|iPod
|Mini (1/8") cable used to connect an iPod (among other things) with audio equipment.
|-
!AUDIO
|1/4" - RCA
|AUDIO
|PA
|1/4" plug to RCA plug connects various audio equipment with compatible sockets.
|-
!AUDIO
|1/4" S Barrel
|AUDIO
|PA
|1/4" socket barrel allows two 1/4" plugs to connect. It is advised to have the same pin count on both sides like 2 pin to 2 pin or 3 pin to 3 pin.
|-
!AUDIO
|1/4" TS
|AUDIO
|Guitar/ keyboards
|1/4" audio cable is TS (Tip, Sleeve) meaning it is used for unbalanced signals.
|-
!AUDIO
|1/4" TRS
|AUDIO
|PA
|1/4" audio cable is TRS (Tip, Ring, Sleeve) meaning is is used to 1 balanced signal or can carry two unbalanced signals.
|-
!AUDIO
|1/4" TRS P - S
|AUDIO
|PA
|1/4" audio extended plug to socket is TRS (Tip, Ring, Sleeve) meaning is is used to 1 balanced signal or can carry two unbalanced signals.
|-
!AUDIO
|DI Box
|AUDIO
|Guitar/ keyboards
|Connects an unbalanced 1/4" cable to a balanced XLR Cable. It additionally helps with ground loops, impedance matching and preventing electromagnetic noise from being introduced to the signal. The DI Box has the added benefit of switches for a pad, ground lift, as well as an unchanged output of the input so you could connect a guitar cable to the DI Box and have that output to an amp via "1/4" thru" as well the balanced XLR output for connecting to a mixer.
|-
!AUDIO
|1/4" to XLR Hilow
|AUDIO
|Guitar/ keyboards
|Connects an unbalanced 1/4" socket to a balanced XLR Cable. It additionally helps with ground loops, impedance matching and preventing electromagnetic noise from being introduced to the signal.
|-
!AUDIO
| XLR S Barrel
|AUDIO
|PA
|XLR barrel with sockets at both ends, used for connecting 2 XLR plugs.
|-
!AUDIO
| XLR P Barrel
|AUDIO
|PA
|XLR barrel with plugs at both ends, used for connecting 2 XLR socket.
|-
!AUDIO
|XLR P - 1/4" TRS
|AUDIO
|PA
|XLR plug to 1/4" plug with TRS (Tip, Ring, Sleeve) for getting a balanced signal from XLR to 1/4" likely to be used for mixer to speaker connections.
|-
!AUDIO
|XLR S - 1/4" TRS
|AUDIO
|PA
|XLR socket to 1/4" plug with TRS (Tip, Ring, Sleeve) for getting a balanced signal from XLR to 1/4" likely to be used for mixer to speaker connections.
|-
!AUDIO
|XLR - USB B
|AUDIO / COMPUTER
|Mic
|This can be used to put an XLR microphone signal into a computer. It is a small interface for a single XLR connection to be digitized and turned into a USB type B (version 2) connection. Media Loan also has other interfaces if you want to record more signals.
|-
!AUDIO
|Mic Splitter
|AUDIO
|Mic
|Allows a XLR connection to be doubled so the same signal be send to difference places. If in an Audio Studio, this could instead be done in the patch bay via the mults.
|-
!VIDEO
|RCA Triple
|VIDEO / AUDIO
|Video Display
|3 RCA connectors bundled for Audio Left (White), Audio Right (Red), and Composite Video (Yellow).
|-
!VIDEO
|Component Adapter
|VIDEO / AUDIO
|Video Display
|3 RCA connectors bundled and connected to a DSLR connector. No audio is carried, but instead send video on a red, green, and blue channel as component video.
|-
!VIDEO
|S Video
|VIDEO / AUDIO
|Video Display
|An older video cable for an older video format.
|-
!VIDEO
|RCA - Mini TS
|AUDIO
|Camera Audio
|RCA to Mini (1/8") TS (Tip, Sleeve) for connecting audio for a consumer level camera.
|-
!VIDEO
|RCA Triple - Mini TRRS
|VIDEO / AUDIO
|Camera A/V
|3 RCA connectors bundled and connected to a Mini (1/8") TRRS (Tip, Ring, Ring, Sleeve) for carrying Audio Left (White), Audio Right (Red), and Composite Video (Yellow).
|-
!VIDEO
|RCA Triple - Canon Connector
|VIDEO / AUDIO
|Camera A/V
|3 RCA connectors bundled and connected to a Canon Brand connector for carrying Audio Left (White), Audio Right (Red), and Composite Video (Yellow).
|-
!VIDEO
|BNC
|VIDEO
|Video
|Video cable most commonly used for SD SDI or HD SDI.
|-
!VIDEO
|XLR S w/Transformer - Mini TRS
|AUDIO
|Camera Audio
|This cable connects a professional mic to a consumer level camera. It may be preferable to instead record audio to a dedicated audio recorder like the Olympus Recorder rather than the consumer level camera
|-
!DISPLAY
|Mac DVI - VGA
|COMPUTER / VIDEO
|Video Display
|Mac DVI to VGA
|-
!DISPLAY
|Mac Thunderbolt - VGA
|COMPUTER / VIDEO
|Video Display
|Mac Thunderbolt (MiniDisplayPort) to VGA
|-
!DISPLAY
|DVI - VGA
|COMPUTER / VIDEO
|Video Display
|DVI to VGA
|-
!DISPLAY
|VGA mini - VGA
|COMPUTER / VIDEO
|Video Display
|VGA mini to VGA
|-
!DISPLAY
|HDMI
|COMPUTER / VIDEO
|Video Display
|Normal HDMI cable
|-
!DISPLAY
|HDMI micro
|COMPUTER / VIDEO
|Video Display
|HDMI to HDMI micro
|-
!DISPLAY
|HDMI - VGA
|COMPUTER / VIDEO
|Video Display
|HDMI to VGA
|-
!DISPLAY
|HDMI - Thunderbolt
|COMPUTER / VIDEO
|Video Display
|Thunderbolt
|-
!DISPLAY
|VGA w/Audio
|COMPUTER / VIDEO
|Video Display
|VGA cable, these don't carry audio, but there is a Mini (1/8") cable bundled for carrying audio.
|-
!DISPLAY
|VGA
|COMPUTER / VIDEO
|Video Display
|VGA cable, these dont carry audio.
|-
!DISPLAY
|HDMI Mini
|COMPUTER / VIDEO
|Video Display
|HDMI to HDMI mini
|-
!DISPLAY
|USB C Display Adapter
|COMPUTER / VIDEO
|Video Display
|An adapter that uses a USB C connector like from a modern laptop and connects to the display connector types; HDMI, VGA, DVI.
|-
!COMPUTER
|USB A - B
|COMPUTER
|Data
|For Data Connections
|-
!COMPUTER
|Card Reader
|COMPUTER
|Data
|Transfurs various data cards (includeing SD) to USB mini
|-
!COMPUTER
|USB mini
|COMPUTER
|Data
|For Data Connections from USB normal to mini
|-
!COMPUTER
|USB micro
|COMPUTER
|Data
|For Data Connections from USB normal to micro
|-
!COMPUTER
|USB P - S
|COMPUTER
|Data
|For USB Extensions
|-
!COMPUTER
|Firewire
|COMPUTER
|Data
|For Data Connections
|-
!COMPUTER
|Phone connector
|COMPUTER
|Phone
|Phone Connector
|-
!COMPUTER
|Ethernet
|COMPUTER
|Data
|Cable often used to connect a computer to a router for internet access without relying on Wifi
|-
!COMPUTER
|Coax
|COMPUTER
|Data
|Often used for RF receiver connection, transmitting home internet and cable, and other things. (Technical side-note, the cable is Coaxial [ the same as BNC and RCA] while the connector is called F-Type)
|}
[[category:Media Loan Tests]]

Cables and Adapters Catalog

2026-06-17T23:24:40Z

Zornesn:

Microphone Catalog

2026-06-17T23:20:01Z

Zornesn:

{{Media Loan Covid Message}}

<div class="container-fluid">

<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">

<div class="lead">

<div class="lead">[[File:Media Loan Logo.png|left|frameless|90x90px]] All Mics Available in Media Loan. </div>

<div class="pull-right"></div>

</div>

"General Access" mic is a category of Media Loan microphones that are accessible to all enrolled students. The General Access section of Media Loan is different from the "Audio Studio" section, which is just for advanced audio classes and to be used exclusively inside the audio facilities on campus. For help learning about mics, check our [https://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Audio_Fundamentals#MICROPHONES Microphone Basics] section inside our [[Audio Fundamentals]] page.

==== Explanation of Columns ====
* '''Type''': The most common category used to describe each mic.
* '''Usage''': The most common use the mic is built for.
* '''Power Source''': Power needed, see the Microphone Basics page to learn about Condensers and Dynamics and what type of transducer needs power to work.
This catalog has sortable columns. Click on the triangle and the top of the column to put the catalog in the order of contents within that column. You can also press Command F (on Mac) and Control F (on Windows) to search for specific details on this web page.

__NOTOC__

</div>

<div class="col-md-1"></div>
<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">
{{Media Loan Basic Sidebar}}


</div>


</div>


</div>

__NOEDITSECTION__

== GENERAL ACCESS MICROPHONES ==
{| class="wikitable sortable" style="text-align: center;"
|-
! Type
!Brand/Model
! Image !! Pattern !! Standard Usage !! Transducer !! Power Source!! Connector
|-
|Stage
|Shure
SM58
|[[File:MHA-SureSM58.jpg]]
|Cardioid
[[File:Cardioid.png|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Shure
SM57
|[[File:MHE-SureSM57.jpg]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Shure
Beta 57A
|[[File:MHC-ShureBeta57A.jpg]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Sennheiser
MD 421-II
|[[File:MNA-Sennheiser421.jpg]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|| Broadcast
|Electrovoice RE-27 N/D||[[File:RE 27 Photo.jpeg|frameless]]
| Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
| Voice
|Dynamic
|Not required|| XLR
|-
|Broadcast
|Sennheiser MD46
|[[File:MSM-SureMD46.jpg]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Isolating from noise
|Beyerdynamic M88 TG
|[[File:MTG-BeyerDynamicM88TG.jpg]]
|Hypercardioid[[File:HyperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Vocals and instruments, specifically to capture lower frequency sounds
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Broadcast
|Beyerdynamic M58
|[[File:MBD-BeyerDynamicM58.jpg]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|75x75px|frameless]]

|Voice
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Broadcast
|Electrovoice 635A
|[[File:MED-EV-635A.jpg]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Isolating from noise
|Electrovoice RE18
|[[File:MEG-EV-RE16.jpg]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
||Isolating from noise
|Electrovoice RE16|| [[File:MER-EV-RE15.jpg]]
|Supercardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
| Voice and instruments ||Dynamic
|Not required|| XLR
|-
|Isolating from noise
|Electrovoice RE15
|[[File:MER-EV-RE18.jpg]]
|Supercardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|All purpose studio
|Aston
Origin
|[[File:AstonOrigin.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|General purpose condenser mic, used on instruments and vocals
|Condenser

| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|All purpose studio
|Pacific Pro Audio
LD1
|[[File:LD1.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|General purpose condenser mic, used on instruments and vocals
|Condenser

| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|All purpose studio
|Marshall MXL2003
|[[File:MXL2003.jpg|frameless|110x110px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:MXL2003.jpg]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|General purpose condenser mic, used on instruments and vocals
|Condenser

| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Stereo pair
|Studio
Projects C4
|[[File:SPC4.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: Cardioid, Omni
|General purpose condenser mic, used on instruments
|Condenser
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Combo Kit
|Sennheiser
K6
|[[File:MNC-SennheiserK6Combo.jpg]]
|Variable: Cardioid, Omni, Super Cardioid
|Can cater to almost all settings. Great for video, stage use, and studio recording. 1 module + 3 different capsules.
|Condenser
|1 AA Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Shotgun
|Audio Technica 835B
|[[File:MAU-AT835B.jpg]]
|Hypercardioid[[File:HyperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Video, broadcast, and field work.
|Condenser
|1 AA Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Shotgun
|Rode
NTG1
|[[File:MCNTG-RodeNTG1.jpg]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Video, broadcast, and field work.
|Condenser
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Lavalier
|Shure
MX185
|[[File:MOX-SureMX185.jpg]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Interview, broadcast, and presentation.
|Condenser
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Lavalier
|Audio Technica 899
|[[File:MOJ-AT8537.jpg]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Interview, broadcast, and presentation.
|Condenser
|1 AA Battery
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Shure
SM86
| [[File:MSCC-SureSM86.jpg]]
| Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
| Voice ||Condenser|| +48v Phantom Power || XLR
|-
|Stereo
|Audio Technica AT825
|[[File:MAI-AT825.jpg]]
|Stereo: X/Y Dual Cardioid capsules
|Instruments and video
|Condenser
|1 AA Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Stereo
|Rode
NT4
|[[File:MCNTG4-RodeNT4.jpg]]
|Stereo: X/Y Dual Cardioid capsules
|Instruments and video
|Condenser
|1 9V Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Shotgun
|Rode
VideoMic
|[[File:MCV-RodeVideoMic.jpg]]
|Super Cardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Video, broadcast, and field work.
|Condenser
|1 9V Battery
|1/8”
|-
|Stereo
|Sony
ECM-MS957
|[[File:MOS-SonyECM-MS957.jpg]]
|Stereo
|Recording live concerts, conferences, interviews and sound effects.
|Condenser
|1 AA Battery
|XLR
|-
|Lavalier
|Sennheiser ME2
|[[File:MON-SennheiserME2.jpg]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Interview, broadcast, and presentation.
|Condenser
|1/8" plug-in power
|1/8”
|-
|PZM
|Crown Optimus Sound Grabber|| [[File:MCPX-CrownPZM.jpg]]
| Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
| Pressure zone mic for recording conferences, interviews, and lectures. ||Condenser||1 AA Battery|| XLR
|-
|USB
|Blue
Yeti Pro
|[[File:MBY-BlueYeti.jpg]]
|Variable: Cardioid, Omni, Bidirectional & Stereo.
|Voice
|Condenser
|Powered by USB, +48v Phantom Power for XLR
|USB & XLR
|-
|Parabolic
|Parabolic Kits with Sennheiser K6
|[[File:MGP K6.jpg]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Includes K6 power module, cardioid capsule, rollable dish, dish transport bag, pistol grip handle, tripod adapter, dish cover and duffle bag. Designed for distant low level sounds such as bird calls. Proficiency required.
|Condenser
|1 AA Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|}
Most recent update: February 2025.

[[Category:Media Loan Catalogs]]
__NOEDITSECTION__

Microphone Catalog

2026-06-17T23:03:07Z

Zornesn:

{{Media Loan Covid Message}}

<div class="container-fluid">

<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">

<div class="lead">

<div class="lead">[[File:Media Loan Logo.png|left|frameless|90x90px]] All Mics Available in Media Loan. </div>

<div class="pull-right"></div>

</div>

"General Access" mic is a category of Media Loan microphones that are accessible to all enrolled students. The General Access section of Media Loan is different from the "Audio Studio" section, which is just for advanced audio classes and to be used exclusively inside the audio facilities on campus. For help learning about mics, check our [https://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Audio_Fundamentals#MICROPHONES Microphone Basics] section inside our [[Audio Fundamentals]] page.

==== Explanation of Columns ====
* '''Type''': The most common category used to describe each mic.
* '''Usage''': The most common use the mic is built for.
* '''Power Source''': Power needed, see the Microphone Basics page to learn about Condensers and Dynamics and what type of transducer needs power to work.
This catalog has sortable columns. Click on the triangle and the top of the column to put the catalog in the order of contents within that column. You can also press Command F (on Mac) and Control F (on Windows) to search for specific details on this web page.

__NOTOC__

</div>

<div class="col-md-1"></div>
<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">
{{Media Loan Basic Sidebar}}


</div>


</div>


</div>

__NOEDITSECTION__

== GENERAL ACCESS MICROPHONES ==
{| class="wikitable sortable" style="text-align: center;"
|-
! Type
!Brand/Model
! Image !! Pattern !! Standard Usage !! Transducer !! Power Source!! Connector
|-
|Stage
|Shure
SM58
|[[File:MHA-SureSM58.jpg]]
|Cardioid
[[File:Cardioid.png|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Shure
SM57
|[[File:MHE-SureSM57.jpg]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Shure
Beta 57A
|[[File:MHC-ShureBeta57A.jpg]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Sennheiser
MD 421-II
|[[File:MNA-Sennheiser421.jpg]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|| Broadcast
|Electrovoice RE-27 N/D||[[File:RE 27 Photo.jpeg|frameless]]
| Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
| Voice
|Dynamic
|Not required|| XLR
|-
|Broadcast
|Sennheiser MD46
|[[File:MSM-SureMD46.jpg]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Isolating from noise
|Beyerdynamic M88 TG
|[[File:MTG-BeyerDynamicM88TG.jpg]]
|Hypercardioid[[File:HyperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Vocals and instruments, specifically to capture lower frequency sounds
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Broadcast
|Beyerdynamic M58
|[[File:MBD-BeyerDynamicM58.jpg]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|75x75px|frameless]]

|Voice
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Broadcast
|Electrovoice 635A
|[[File:MED-EV-635A.jpg]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Isolating from noise
|Electrovoice RE18
|[[File:MEG-EV-RE16.jpg]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
||Isolating from noise
|Electrovoice RE16|| [[File:MER-EV-RE15.jpg]]
|Supercardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
| Voice and instruments ||Dynamic
|Not required|| XLR
|-
|Isolating from noise
|Electrovoice RE15
|[[File:MER-EV-RE18.jpg]]
|Supercardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|All purpose studio
|Aston
Origin
|[[File:AstonOrigin.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|General purpose condenser mic, used on instruments and vocals
|Condenser

| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|All purpose studio
|Pacific Pro Audio
LD1
|[[File:LD1.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|General purpose condenser mic, used on instruments and vocals
|Condenser

| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|All purpose studio
|Marshall MXL2003
|[[File:MXL2003.jpg|frameless|110x110px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:MXL2003.jpg]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|General purpose condenser mic, used on instruments and vocals
|Condenser

| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Stereo pair
|Studio
Projects C4
|[[File:SPC4.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: Cardioid, Omni
|General purpose condenser mic, used on instruments
|Condenser
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Combo Kit
|Sennheiser
K6
|[[File:MNC-SennheiserK6Combo.jpg]]
|Variable: Cardioid, Omni, Super Cardioid
|Can cater to almost all settings. Great for video, stage use, and studio recording. 1 module + 3 different capsules.
|Condenser
|1 AA Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Shotgun
|Audio Technica 835B
|[[File:MAU-AT835B.jpg]]
|Hypercardioid[[File:HyperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Video, broadcast, and field work.
|Condenser
|1 AA Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Shotgun
|Rode
NTG1
|[[File:MCNTG-RodeNTG1.jpg]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Video, broadcast, and field work.
|Condenser
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Lavalier
|Shure
MX185
|[[File:MOX-SureMX185.jpg]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Interview, broadcast, and presentation.
|Condenser
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Lavalier
|Audio Technica 899
|[[File:MOJ-AT8537.jpg]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Interview, broadcast, and presentation.
|Condenser
|1 AA Battery
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Shure
SM86
| [[File:MSCC-SureSM86.jpg]]
| Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
| Voice ||Condenser|| +48v Phantom Power || XLR
|-
|Stereo
|Audio Technica AT825
|[[File:MAI-AT825.jpg]]
|Stereo: X/Y Dual Cardioid capsules
|Instruments and video
|Condenser
|1 AA Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Stereo
|Rode
NT4
|[[File:MCNTG4-RodeNT4.jpg]]
|Stereo: X/Y Dual Cardioid capsules
|Instruments and video
|Condenser
|1 9V Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Shotgun
|Rode
VideoMic
|[[File:MCV-RodeVideoMic.jpg]]
|Super Cardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Video, broadcast, and field work.
|Condenser
|1 9V Battery
|1/8”
|-
|Stereo
|Sony
ECM-MS957
|[[File:MOS-SonyECM-MS957.jpg]]
|Stereo
|Recording live concerts, conferences, interviews and sound effects.
|Condenser
|1 AA Battery
|XLR
|-
|Lavalier
|Sennheiser ME2
|[[File:MON-SennheiserME2.jpg]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Interview, broadcast, and presentation.
|Condenser
|1/8" plug-in power
|1/8”
|-
|PZM
|Crown Optimus Sound Grabber|| [[File:MCPX-CrownPZM.jpg]]
| Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
| Pressure zone mic for recording conferences, interviews, and lectures. ||Condenser||1 AA Battery|| XLR
|-
|USB
|Blue
Yeti Pro
|[[File:MBY-BlueYeti.jpg]]
|Variable: Cardioid, Omni, Bidirectional & Stereo.
|Voice
|Condenser
|Powered by USB, +48v Phantom Power for XLR
|USB & XLR
|-
|Hydrophone
|DolphinEar Pro
|[[File:MHP-DolphinEar.jpg]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Designed to capture underwater sounds to depths of 100 meters. Not ideal for shallow water. Proficiency required.
|Contact
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Parabolic
|Parabolic Kits with Sennheiser K6
|[[File:MGP K6.jpg]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Includes K6 power module, cardioid capsule, rollable dish, dish transport bag, pistol grip handle, tripod adapter, dish cover and duffle bag. Designed for distant low level sounds such as bird calls. Proficiency required.
|Condenser
|1 AA Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|}
Most recent update: February 2025.

[[Category:Media Loan Catalogs]]
__NOEDITSECTION__

Microphone Catalog

2026-06-17T22:56:41Z

Zornesn:

{{Media Loan Covid Message}}

<div class="container-fluid">

<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">

<div class="lead">

<div class="lead">[[File:Media Loan Logo.png|left|frameless|90x90px]] All Mics Available in Media Loan. </div>

<div class="pull-right"></div>

</div>

"General Access" mic is a category of Media Loan microphones that are accessible to all enrolled students. The General Access section of Media Loan is different from the "Audio Studio" section, which is just for advanced audio classes and to be used exclusively inside the audio facilities on campus. For help learning about mics, check our [https://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Audio_Fundamentals#MICROPHONES Microphone Basics] section inside our [[Audio Fundamentals]] page.

==== Explanation of Columns ====
* '''Type''': The most common category used to describe each mic.
* '''Usage''': The most common use the mic is built for.
* '''Power Source''': Power needed, see the Microphone Basics page to learn about Condensers and Dynamics and what type of transducer needs power to work.
This catalog has sortable columns. Click on the triangle and the top of the column to put the catalog in the order of contents within that column. You can also press Command F (on Mac) and Control F (on Windows) to search for specific details on this web page.

__NOTOC__

</div>

<div class="col-md-1"></div>
<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">
{{Media Loan Basic Sidebar}}


</div>


</div>


</div>

__NOEDITSECTION__

== GENERAL ACCESS MICROPHONES ==
{| class="wikitable sortable" style="text-align: center;"
|-
! Type
!Brand/Model
! Image !! Pattern !! Standard Usage !! Transducer !! Power Source!! Connector
|-
|Stage
|Shure
SM58
|[[File:MHA-SureSM58.jpg]]
|Cardioid
[[File:Cardioid.png|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Shure
SM57
|[[File:MHE-SureSM57.jpg]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Shure
Beta 57A
|[[File:MHC-ShureBeta57A.jpg]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Sennheiser
MD 421-II
|[[File:MNA-Sennheiser421.jpg]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|| Broadcast
|Electrovoice RE-27 N/D||[[File:RE 27 Photo.jpeg|frameless]]
| Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
| Voice
|Dynamic
|Not required|| XLR
|-
|Broadcast
|Sennheiser MD46
|[[File:MSM-SureMD46.jpg]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Isolating from noise
|Beyerdynamic M88 TG
|[[File:MTG-BeyerDynamicM88TG.jpg]]
|Hypercardioid[[File:HyperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Vocals and instruments, specifically to capture lower frequency sounds
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Broadcast
|Beyerdynamic M58
|[[File:MBD-BeyerDynamicM58.jpg]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|75x75px|frameless]]

|Voice
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Broadcast
|Electrovoice 635A
|[[File:MED-EV-635A.jpg]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Isolating from noise
|Electrovoice RE18
|[[File:MEG-EV-RE16.jpg]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
||Isolating from noise
|Electrovoice RE16|| [[File:MER-EV-RE15.jpg]]
|Supercardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
| Voice and instruments ||Dynamic
|Not required|| XLR
|-
|Isolating from noise
|Electrovoice RE15
|[[File:MER-EV-RE18.jpg]]
|Supercardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|All purpose studio
|Aston
Origin
|[[File:AstonOrigin.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|General purpose condenser mic, used on instruments and vocals
|Condenser

| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|All purpose studio
|Pacific Pro Audio
LD1
|[[File:LD1.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|General purpose condenser mic, used on instruments and vocals
|Condenser

| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|All purpose studio
|Marshall MXL2003
|[[File:MXL2003.jpg|frameless|110x110px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:MXL2003.jpg]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|General purpose condenser mic, used on instruments and vocals
|Condenser

| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Stereo pair
|Studio
Projects C4
|[[File:SPC4.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: Cardioid, Omni
|General purpose condenser mic, used on instruments
|Condenser
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Combo Kit
|Sennheiser
K6
|[[File:MNC-SennheiserK6Combo.jpg]]
|Variable: Cardioid, Omni, Super Cardioid
|Can cater to almost all settings. Great for video, stage use, and studio recording. 1 module + 3 different capsules.
|Condenser
|1 AA Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Shotgun
|Audio Technica 835B
|[[File:MAU-AT835B.jpg]]
|Hypercardioid[[File:HyperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Video, broadcast, and field work.
|Condenser
|1 AA Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Shotgun
|Rode
NTG1
|[[File:MCNTG-RodeNTG1.jpg]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Video, broadcast, and field work.
|Condenser
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Lavalier
|Shure
MX185
|[[File:MOX-SureMX185.jpg]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Interview, broadcast, and presentation.
|Condenser
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Lavalier
|Audio Technica 899
|[[File:MOJ-AT8537.jpg]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Interview, broadcast, and presentation.
|Condenser
|1 AA Battery
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Shure
SM86
| [[File:MSCC-SureSM86.jpg]]
| Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
| Voice ||Condenser|| +48v Phantom Power || XLR
|-
|Stereo
|Audio Technica AT825
|[[File:MAI-AT825.jpg]]
|Stereo: X/Y Dual Cardioid capsules
|Instruments and video
|Condenser
|1 AA Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Stereo
|Rode
NT4
|[[File:MCNTG4-RodeNT4.jpg]]
|Stereo: X/Y Dual Cardioid capsules
|Instruments and video
|Condenser
|1 9V Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Shotgun
|Rode
VideoMic
|[[File:MCV-RodeVideoMic.jpg]]
|Super Cardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Video, broadcast, and field work.
|Condenser
|1 9V Battery
|1/8”
|-
|Stereo
|Sony
ECM-MS957
|[[File:MOS-SonyECM-MS957.jpg]]
|Stereo
|Recording live concerts, conferences, interviews and sound effects.
|Condenser
|1 AA Battery
|XLR
|-
|Lavalier
|Sennheiser ME2
|[[File:MON-SennheiserME2.jpg]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Interview, broadcast, and presentation.
|Condenser
|1/8" plug-in power
|1/8”
|-
|PZM
|Crown Optimus Sound Grabber|| [[File:MCPX-CrownPZM.jpg]]
| Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
| Pressure zone mic for recording conferences, interviews, and lectures. ||Condenser||1 AA Battery|| XLR
|-
|USB
|Blue
Yeti Pro
|[[File:MBY-BlueYeti.jpg]]
|Variable: Cardioid, Omni, Bidirectional & Stereo.
|Voice
|Condenser
|Powered by USB, +48v Phantom Power for XLR
|USB & XLR
|-
|Hydrophone
|DolphinEar Pro
|[[File:MHP-DolphinEar.jpg]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Designed to capture underwater sounds to depths of 100 meters. Not ideal for shallow water. Proficiency required.
|Contact
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Parabolic
|Parabolic Kits with Sennheiser K6
|[[File:MGP K6.jpg]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Includes K6 power module, cardioid capsule, rollable dish, dish transport bag, pistol grip handle, tripod adapter, dish cover and duffle bag. Designed for distant low level sounds such as bird calls. Proficiency required.
|Condenser
|1 AA Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|}
Most recent update: February 2025.

"Audio Studio" microphones are not available for checkout. This page is only here for reference. They are only used by the advanced audio classes and are to be used exclusively in the audio facilities on campus.

== AUDIO STUDIO MICROPHONES (Advanced Audio Classes Only) ==
{| class="mw-collapsible sortable mw-collapsed wikitable" style="text-align: center;"
|+ style="white-space:nowrap" | Expand to see Audio Studio Microphones
|-
!Type
!Brand/Model!! Image !! Pattern !! Standard Usage !! Transducer !! Power
Source
! Connector
|-
|Stage
|AKG
D202E
|[[File:AKGD202E.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Designed to eliminate proximity effect, very flat frequency response.
|Dynamic
|Not required||XLR
|-
|High SPL
|AKG
D224E
|[[File:AKGD224E.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|High SPL, good for loud sources.
|Dynamic
|Not required||XLR
|-
|Instrument
|AKG
460B
|[[File:AKGC460B.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Low self-noise. Equipped with low cut filters or 10db pad.
|Condenser
(Small diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Drum mic
|AKG
D112
|[[File:AKGD112.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Used primarily on kick drums. Handles high SPL.
|Dynamic
|Not required||XLR
|-
|All purpose studio
|AKG
C414
|[[File:C414XL2.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: Cardioid, bidirectional, hypercardioid, omnidirectional, subcardioid
|All purpose studio standard mic. Comes in varying versions, B-ULS (vintage, warm tone), XLS (modern, warm tone), and XLII (modern, bright tone)
|Condenser
(Large diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Tube mic
|Audio
Technica 4060
|[[File:AT4060.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Vacuum tube condenser. Used on vocals, instruments and amps.
|Tube condenser
(Large diaphragm)
|External power supply
|XLR
|-
|Stereo pair kit
|Neumann
KM84
|[[File:KM84.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Great detail on acoustic instruments and drum overheads.
|Condenser
(Small diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|All purpose studio
|Neumann
U87
|[[File:U87.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional
|Used on vocals instruments, flat frequency response and great detail
|Condenser
(Large diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Instruments
|Neumann
KM83
|[[File:KM83.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Omnidirectional equivalent of the KM84.
|Condenser
(Small diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|All purpose studio
|Neumann

U47 (FET)
|[[File:U47.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Hypercardioid[[File:HyperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Great for vocals, also used on instruments.
|Condenser
(Large diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Stereo mic
|Avantone
CK40
|[[File:CK40.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional
|Stereo condenser with adjustable pickup patterns and swiveling capsule. Good for recording a room or in a bidirectional pattern.
|Condenser
(Large diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Stereo mic
|Rode
NT4
|[[File:RodeNT4.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Stereo: X/Y Dual Cardioid capsules
|Instruments and video
|Condenser
|1 9V Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|PZM
|Crown
PZM
|[[File:CrownPZM.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Used for recording multiple voices in a conference or meeting setting.
|PZM
|2 9V Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Broadcast
|Electrovoice

635A
|[[File:MED-EV-635A.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice and room mic
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Isolating from noise
|Electrovoice RE16
|[[File:RE16.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Isolating from noise
|Electrovoice RE15
|[[File:RE15.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Broadcast
|Electrovoice RE55
|[[File:RE55.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice and room mic
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Instruments
|Electrovoice CS15
|[[File:CS15E.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: cardioid and omnidirectional
|Versatile instrument use
|Condenser
(Small diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Broadcast
|Electrovoice RE20
|[[File:EVRE20.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice for recording and broadcast
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Isolating from noise
|Electrovoice RE18
|[[File:RE18.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Voice, designed to reduce handling noise.
|Dynamic
|Not required||XLR
|-
|Drum mic
|Electrovoice 408B
|[[File:EV408B.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|High SPL, good for loud sources.
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Drum mic
|Electrovoice 308B
|[[File:EV308B.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Cardioid version of the 408B.
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Reference mic
|Earthworks

TC20
|[[File:TC20.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Flat reference microphone, high SPL. Good for sound measurement and loud sources.
|Condenser
(Small diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Ribbon
|Cascade Fathead
|[[File:Fathead.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Bidirectional[[File:Bidirectional.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Dark tone for instruments and vocals, often used in mid-side pair.
|Ribbon
|Do NOT supply +48v Phantom Power, ribbons will be damaged!
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Shure
SM58
|[[File:SM58.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Shure
Beta 87A
|[[File:ShureBeta87A.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Hand held vocal mic with good feedback rejection
|Condenser
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Voice
|Shure
SM53
|[[File:SM53.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Hand held vocal mic, reduces proximity effect.
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Shure
SM57
|[[File:MHE-SureSM57.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Instruments
|Shure
SM81
|[[File:SM81.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Used on instruments, popular for pianos.
|Condenser
(Small diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Stereo
|Shure
VP88
|[[File:ShureVP88.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: cardioid and bidirectional
|Stereo, used in broadcasting.
|Condenser
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|All purpose studio
|Shure
KSM32
|[[File:KSM32.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|General purpose condenser mic
|Condenser
(Large diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Instruments
|Shure
KSM137
|[[File:KSM137.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Instruments.
|Condenser
(Small diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Voice
|Shure
SM7B
|[[File:SM7B.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Popular vocal mic for recording and broadcast
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Drum mic
|Shure
Beta 52A
|[[File:ShureBeta52A.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|High SPL and good low end, for kick drums
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Sennheiser MD 421-II
|[[File:Sen421.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Instruments
|Sennheiser MKH40
|[[File:MKH40.jpg|centre|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Great detail on acoustic instruments and drum overheads.
|Condenser
(Small diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Drum mic
|Sennheiser E604 Kit
|[[File:SenE604.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Clip on mics for snares and toms
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Combo Kit
|Sennheiser K6
|[[File:SenComboKit.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: Cardioid, Omni, Super Cardioid
|Can cater to almost all settings. Great for video, stage use, and studio recording. 1 module + 3 different capsules.
|Condenser
(Small diaphragm)
|1 AA Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Voice
|Sennheiser 441
|[[File:Sen441.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Binaural mic
|Dr. Normar's Binaural head
(Sennhesier MKE 2002)
|[[File:MKE2002.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Sennheiser binaural microphone pair to record a 3d stereo field for playback over headphones.
|Condenser
|1 9V Battery
|XLR
|-
|Lavalier
|Sony
ECM50
|[[File:ECM50.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Interview, broadcast, and presentation.
|Condenser
|1 E90 Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Ribbon
|Beyerdynamic M160
|[[File:M160.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Hypercardioid[[File:HyperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Instruments, popular on strings.
|Ribbon
|Do NOT supply +48v Phantom Power, ribbons will be damaged!
|XLR
|-
|Ribbon
|Coles
4038
|[[File:Coles4038.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Bidirectional[[File:Bidirectional.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Classic instrument and voice mic
|Ribbon
|Do NOT supply +48v Phantom Power, ribbons will be damaged!
|XLR
|-
|Ribbon
|RCA
77DX
|[[File:RCA77DX.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional
|Vintage ribbon mic, popular in broadcasting for vocals.
|Ribbon
|Do NOT supply +48v Phantom Power, ribbons will be damaged!
|XLR
|-
|Ribbon
|Royer
R121
|[[File:R121.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Bidirectional[[File:Bidirectional.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Instruments
|Ribbon
|Do NOT supply +48v Phantom Power, ribbons will be damaged!
|XLR
|-
|Tube mic
|Chameleon Labs
TS-1
|[[File:TS1.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable:
cardioid, omnidirectional
|Instruments
|Tube condenser
(Small diaphragm)
|External power supply
|XLR
|-
|Tube mic
|Chameleon Labs
TS-2
|[[File:TS2.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional
|General purpose condenser mic
|Tube condenser
(Large diaphragm)
|External power supply
|XLR
|-
|Tube mic
|sE Electronics sE5000
|[[File:SE5000.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|General purpose condenser mic
|Tube condenser
(Large diaphragm)
|External power supply
|XLR
|-
|Tube mic
|sE Electronics sE5600
|[[File:SE5600.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional, with 5 intermediate stages selectable on power supply
|General purpose condenser mic
|Tube condenser
(Large diaphragm)
|External power supply
|XLR
|}

[[Category:Media Loan Catalogs]]
__NOEDITSECTION__

Media Loan APS Catalog

2026-06-17T22:54:34Z

Zornesn:

{{Media Loan Covid Message}}

<div class="container-fluid">

<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">

<div class="lead">

<div class="lead">[[File:Media Loan Logo.png|left|frameless|90x90px]] APS Gear that is only available to students in specific coordinated Media classes. </div>

<div class="pull-right"></div>

</div>

'''APS:''' This catalog shows all "APS" gear available at Media Loan. APS (Assigned Program Support) gear requires students to be in specific advanced media classes that have coordinated the use of the gear. APS is a different category of Media Loan Gear than "General Access". If you aren't in a media class that has coordinated APS gear, we recommend looking at the [[Media Loan Catalog]] that has all the General Access items that any enrolled student can use.

'''Proficiency:''' In the "Proficiency Required?" column, you can see if you need to pass a proficiency test to use the gear. Many APS items require a proficiency test. The "Gear Guide" column has the links to pages for information to become proficient. Proficiency may also be offered through class workshops.

__NOTOC__

</div>

<div class="col-md-1"></div>
<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">
{{Media Loan Basic Sidebar}}


</div>


</div>


</div>

__NOEDITSECTION__
== APS (Assigned Program Support) ==
{| class="mw-collapsible wikitable" style="text-align: center; vertical-align:middle;"
|+ style="white-space:nowrap" |
!Item
!Brand & Model
!Gear Guide
!Description
!Proficiency Required?
!Access
|-
|Full-Frame DSLR
|[[File:Canon 6D.png|frameless|150x150px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Canon_6D.png]]

Canon 6D video kit
|[[Canon 6D Gear Guide]]
|Canon 6D kit with 3 cine lenses and a variety of filters. Cine Lenses make this kit good for video production and can be connected to other APS gear like the 6D shoulder rig and other equipment listed in the "Grip" section below. We also have additional cine lenses like the 16mm fisheye, 50mm, and 100mm macro.
|Required

|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Full-Frame DSLR
|[[File:Canon 6D.png|alt=A Canon 6D DSLR camera with two cine lenses next to it.|153x153px|centre|frameless|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Canon_6D.png]]
Canon 6D Photo kit
|[[Canon 6D Gear Guide]]
|Used primarily for photography and also video. Can create higher resolution pictures than the Rebel T6i.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Medium Format DSLR
|[[File:IMG 0125.jpeg|frameless|150x150px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:IMG_0125.jpeg]]
Pentax 645Z
|[[Pentax 645Z Digital Medium Format Gear Guide]]
|Only a few people will be allowed to use this camera because we only have one.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Medium Format
|[[File:Mamiya-top.jpg|frameless|150x150px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Mamiya-top.jpg]]Mamiya Twin lens
|[[Medium Format Cameras Gear Guide]]
|A camera that uses bigger film that results in higher resolution images. We have many kinds of Medium format Cameras. Check the Guide for information about each kind. We also have Pentax 6x7, Bronica 645, Bronica 6x6.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Large Format
|[[File:LargeFormat.png|frameless|150x150px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:LargeFormat.png]]
Calumet
|[[Large Format (4x5) Camera Gear Guide]]
|Our biggest film cameras. They use large sheets of film resulting in the highest resolution image possible. We also have a Graflex camera
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Audio Recorder
|[[File:Zoom H6n.png|frameless|150x150px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Zoom_H6n.png]]

Zoom H6n
|[[APS/AS Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Operating Guide]]
|A portable 6 channel audio recorder. Comes with 2 stereo mic attachments and 4 additional XLR inputs for external mics and other sources.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Mic Boom Kit
|[[File:Mic Boom Kit MKH416.png|centre|frameless|161x161px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Mic_Boom_Kit_MKH416.png]]

MKH-416
|No Guide
|Shotgun microphone with all relevant parts to make boom kit. Used to extend the microphone and have it just out of the shot for video production
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Mic Blimp Kit
|[[File:Mic Blimp Kit MKH416.png|frameless|158x158px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Mic_Blimp_Kit_MKH416.png]]

MKH-416
|No Guide
|Shotgun microphone with all relevant parts to make blimp kit. Used to reject as much wind noise as possible.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Mic
|Shotgun Mic:

Audio-Technica AT4073
|No Guide
|Microphone ideal for getting just the sound it is pointed at and rejecting others.
|No
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Mic
|Wireless Lavalier Sennheiser EW 100 G3
|No Guide
|A tiny but high quality microphone that an be attached to a performers shirt collar and a thin cable that runs to a little transmitter that can be clipped to a belt. The transmitter has a corresponding receiver that wirelessly picks up the signal and can be sent to a recorder.
|No
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Mic
|[[File:MHP-DolphinEar.jpg|frameless|120x120px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:MHP-DolphinEar.jpg]]
Underwater

DolphinEar Pro
|[[DolphinEar/PRO Hydrophone Gear Guide]]
|Our only Microphone that can record underwater.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|LED light
|[[File:Dracast DR LED1000 BV Light.png|frameless|130x130px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Dracast_DR_LED1000_BV_Light.png]]

Dracast DR-LED1000 BV
|[[APS Lighting Equipment Guide]]
|A powerful bicolored LED that comes with barn doors and difuser.
|No
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Hot light
|[[File:3 Light Arri.png|frameless|150x150px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:3_Light_Arri.png]]

3 light Arri kit
|[[APS Lighting Equipment Guide]]
|A 3 light kit of Arri light with barn doors. It comes in 650W or 1000W depending on how much power you need.
|No
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Hot light
|[[File:Arri Soft Key.png|frameless|156x156px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Arri_Soft_Key.png]]

3 light Soft Key Arri kit
|[[APS Lighting Equipment Guide]]
|The soft key kit comes with three hot light, 1 of which is good for soft lighting, result in shadows that don't have hard edges.
|No
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Tripod
|[[File:Large video tripod.png|frameless|225x225px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Large_video_tripod.png]]Many Models
|No Guide
|Tripods available for both Bolex and DSLRs
|No
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Jib Arm
|Varizoom Solo Jib
VZ-KT75A
|[[APS VariZoom Solo Jib Operating Guide]]
|A small crane with a tripod used to get cinematic movements. Can be mounted on top of the Dolly (listed below) to get complex shots.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Dolly Track
|Varizoom
VZD50 Dolly
|[[APS VariZoom Dolly Track Operating Guide]]
|A track that a normal tripod or Jib Arm can be placed on to get smooth movement in one direction.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Track Sliders
|Revo RS-1200
|No Guide
|A thin track that is 47" long and can be placed on a table or mounted to a large tripod. A camera can be mounted onto the track and get movements similar to the Dolly (listed above) but much smaller and easier to set-up.
|No
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|DSLR Gimbal
|DJI Ronin S
|No Guide
|Automated Stabilizer for handheld camera work
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|}
[[Category:Media Loan Catalogs]]

Media Loan APS Catalog

2026-06-17T22:53:48Z

Zornesn:

{{Media Loan Covid Message}}

<div class="container-fluid">

<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">

<div class="lead">

<div class="lead">[[File:Media Loan Logo.png|left|frameless|90x90px]] APS Gear that is only available to students in specific coordinated Media classes. </div>

<div class="pull-right"></div>

</div>

'''APS:''' This catalog shows all "APS" gear available at Media Loan. APS (Assigned Program Support) gear requires students to be in specific advanced media classes that have coordinated the use of the gear. APS is a different category of Media Loan Gear than "General Access". If you aren't in a media class that has coordinated APS gear, we recommend looking at the [[Media Loan Catalog]] that has all the General Access items that any enrolled student can use.

'''Proficiency:''' In the "Proficiency Required?" column, you can see if you need to pass a proficiency test to use the gear. Many APS items require a proficiency test. The "Gear Guide" column has the links to pages for information to become proficient. Proficiency may also be offered through class workshops.

__NOTOC__

</div>

<div class="col-md-1"></div>
<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">
{{Media Loan Basic Sidebar}}


</div>


</div>


</div>

__NOEDITSECTION__
== APS (Advanced Production Services) ==
{| class="mw-collapsible wikitable" style="text-align: center; vertical-align:middle;"
|+ style="white-space:nowrap" |
!Item
!Brand & Model
!Gear Guide
!Description
!Proficiency Required?
!Access
|-
|Full-Frame DSLR
|[[File:Canon 6D.png|frameless|150x150px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Canon_6D.png]]

Canon 6D video kit
|[[Canon 6D Gear Guide]]
|Canon 6D kit with 3 cine lenses and a variety of filters. Cine Lenses make this kit good for video production and can be connected to other APS gear like the 6D shoulder rig and other equipment listed in the "Grip" section below. We also have additional cine lenses like the 16mm fisheye, 50mm, and 100mm macro.
|Required

|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Full-Frame DSLR
|[[File:Canon 6D.png|alt=A Canon 6D DSLR camera with two cine lenses next to it.|153x153px|centre|frameless|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Canon_6D.png]]
Canon 6D Photo kit
|[[Canon 6D Gear Guide]]
|Used primarily for photography and also video. Can create higher resolution pictures than the Rebel T6i.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Medium Format DSLR
|[[File:IMG 0125.jpeg|frameless|150x150px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:IMG_0125.jpeg]]
Pentax 645Z
|[[Pentax 645Z Digital Medium Format Gear Guide]]
|Only a few people will be allowed to use this camera because we only have one.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Medium Format
|[[File:Mamiya-top.jpg|frameless|150x150px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Mamiya-top.jpg]]Mamiya Twin lens
|[[Medium Format Cameras Gear Guide]]
|A camera that uses bigger film that results in higher resolution images. We have many kinds of Medium format Cameras. Check the Guide for information about each kind. We also have Pentax 6x7, Bronica 645, Bronica 6x6.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Large Format
|[[File:LargeFormat.png|frameless|150x150px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:LargeFormat.png]]
Calumet
|[[Large Format (4x5) Camera Gear Guide]]
|Our biggest film cameras. They use large sheets of film resulting in the highest resolution image possible. We also have a Graflex camera
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Audio Recorder
|[[File:Zoom H6n.png|frameless|150x150px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Zoom_H6n.png]]

Zoom H6n
|[[APS/AS Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Operating Guide]]
|A portable 6 channel audio recorder. Comes with 2 stereo mic attachments and 4 additional XLR inputs for external mics and other sources.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Mic Boom Kit
|[[File:Mic Boom Kit MKH416.png|centre|frameless|161x161px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Mic_Boom_Kit_MKH416.png]]

MKH-416
|No Guide
|Shotgun microphone with all relevant parts to make boom kit. Used to extend the microphone and have it just out of the shot for video production
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Mic Blimp Kit
|[[File:Mic Blimp Kit MKH416.png|frameless|158x158px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Mic_Blimp_Kit_MKH416.png]]

MKH-416
|No Guide
|Shotgun microphone with all relevant parts to make blimp kit. Used to reject as much wind noise as possible.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Mic
|Shotgun Mic:

Audio-Technica AT4073
|No Guide
|Microphone ideal for getting just the sound it is pointed at and rejecting others.
|No
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Mic
|Wireless Lavalier Sennheiser EW 100 G3
|No Guide
|A tiny but high quality microphone that an be attached to a performers shirt collar and a thin cable that runs to a little transmitter that can be clipped to a belt. The transmitter has a corresponding receiver that wirelessly picks up the signal and can be sent to a recorder.
|No
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Mic
|[[File:MHP-DolphinEar.jpg|frameless|120x120px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:MHP-DolphinEar.jpg]]
Underwater

DolphinEar Pro
|[[DolphinEar/PRO Hydrophone Gear Guide]]
|Our only Microphone that can record underwater.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|LED light
|[[File:Dracast DR LED1000 BV Light.png|frameless|130x130px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Dracast_DR_LED1000_BV_Light.png]]

Dracast DR-LED1000 BV
|[[APS Lighting Equipment Guide]]
|A powerful bicolored LED that comes with barn doors and difuser.
|No
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Hot light
|[[File:3 Light Arri.png|frameless|150x150px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:3_Light_Arri.png]]

3 light Arri kit
|[[APS Lighting Equipment Guide]]
|A 3 light kit of Arri light with barn doors. It comes in 650W or 1000W depending on how much power you need.
|No
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Hot light
|[[File:Arri Soft Key.png|frameless|156x156px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Arri_Soft_Key.png]]

3 light Soft Key Arri kit
|[[APS Lighting Equipment Guide]]
|The soft key kit comes with three hot light, 1 of which is good for soft lighting, result in shadows that don't have hard edges.
|No
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Tripod
|[[File:Large video tripod.png|frameless|225x225px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Large_video_tripod.png]]Many Models
|No Guide
|Tripods available for both Bolex and DSLRs
|No
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Jib Arm
|Varizoom Solo Jib
VZ-KT75A
|[[APS VariZoom Solo Jib Operating Guide]]
|A small crane with a tripod used to get cinematic movements. Can be mounted on top of the Dolly (listed below) to get complex shots.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Dolly Track
|Varizoom
VZD50 Dolly
|[[APS VariZoom Dolly Track Operating Guide]]
|A track that a normal tripod or Jib Arm can be placed on to get smooth movement in one direction.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Track Sliders
|Revo RS-1200
|No Guide
|A thin track that is 47" long and can be placed on a table or mounted to a large tripod. A camera can be mounted onto the track and get movements similar to the Dolly (listed above) but much smaller and easier to set-up.
|No
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|DSLR Gimbal
|DJI Ronin S
|No Guide
|Automated Stabilizer for handheld camera work
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|}
[[Category:Media Loan Catalogs]]

Media Loan APS Catalog

2026-06-17T19:06:05Z

Zornesn:

{{Media Loan Covid Message}}

<div class="container-fluid">

<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">

<div class="lead">

<div class="lead">[[File:Media Loan Logo.png|left|frameless|90x90px]] APS Gear that is only available to students in specific coordinated Media classes. </div>

<div class="pull-right"></div>

</div>

'''APS:''' This catalog shows all "APS" gear available at Media Loan. APS (Assigned Program Support) gear requires students to be in specific advanced media classes that have coordinated the use of the gear. APS is a different category of Media Loan Gear than "General Access". If you aren't in a media class that has coordinated APS gear, we recommend looking at the [[Media Loan Catalog]] that has all the General Access items that any enrolled student can use.

'''Proficiency:''' In the "Proficiency Required?" column, you can see if you need to pass a proficiency test to use the gear. Many APS items require a proficiency test. The "Gear Guide" column has the links to pages for information to become proficient. Proficiency may also be offered through class workshops.

__NOTOC__

</div>

<div class="col-md-1"></div>
<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">
{{Media Loan Basic Sidebar}}


</div>


</div>


</div>

__NOEDITSECTION__
== APS (Advanced Production Services) ==
{| class="mw-collapsible wikitable" style="text-align: center; vertical-align:middle;"
|+ style="white-space:nowrap" |
!Item
!Brand & Model
!Gear Guide
!Description
!Proficiency Required?
!Access
|-
|Full-Frame DSLR
|[[File:Canon 6D.png|frameless|150x150px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Canon_6D.png]]

Canon 6D video kit
|[[Canon 6D Gear Guide]]
|Canon 6D kit with 3 cine lenses and a variety of filters. Cine Lenses make this kit good for video production and can be connected to other APS gear like the 6D shoulder rig and other equipment listed in the "Grip" section below. We also have additional cine lenses like the 16mm fisheye, 50mm, and 100mm macro.
|Required

|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Full-Frame DSLR
|[[File:Canon 6D.png|alt=A Canon 6D DSLR camera with two cine lenses next to it.|153x153px|centre|frameless|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Canon_6D.png]]
Canon 6D Photo kit
|[[Canon 6D Gear Guide]]
|Used primarily for photography and also video. Can create higher resolution pictures than the Rebel T6i.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Medium Format DSLR
|[[File:IMG 0125.jpeg|frameless|150x150px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:IMG_0125.jpeg]]
Pentax 645Z
|[[Pentax 645Z Digital Medium Format Gear Guide]]
|Only a few people will be allowed to use this camera because we only have one.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Camcorder
|[[File:Hxr side.png|frameless|150x150px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Hxr_side.png]]Sony HXR
NX5U
|[[APS Sony HXR HD Camcorder Operating Guide]]
|A large professional camcorder designed a variety of video productions. Can be handheld or mounted to a tripod. Can connect to other APS gear like a field monitor.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Medium Format
|[[File:Mamiya-top.jpg|frameless|150x150px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Mamiya-top.jpg]]Mamiya Twin lens
|[[Medium Format Cameras Gear Guide]]
|A camera that uses bigger film that results in higher resolution images. We have many kinds of Medium format Cameras. Check the Guide for information about each kind. We also have Pentax 6x7, Bronica 645, Bronica 6x6.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Large Format
|[[File:LargeFormat.png|frameless|150x150px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:LargeFormat.png]]
Calumet
|[[Large Format (4x5) Camera Gear Guide]]
|Our biggest film cameras. They use large sheets of film resulting in the highest resolution image possible. We also have a Graflex camera
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Audio Recorder
|[[File:Zoom H6n.png|frameless|150x150px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Zoom_H6n.png]]

Zoom H6n
|[[APS/AS Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Operating Guide]]
|A portable 6 channel audio recorder. Comes with 2 stereo mic attachments and 4 additional XLR inputs for external mics and other sources.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Mic Boom Kit
|[[File:Mic Boom Kit MKH416.png|centre|frameless|161x161px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Mic_Boom_Kit_MKH416.png]]

MKH-416
|No Guide
|Shotgun microphone with all relevant parts to make boom kit. Used to extend the microphone and have it just out of the shot for video production
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Mic Blimp Kit
|[[File:Mic Blimp Kit MKH416.png|frameless|158x158px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Mic_Blimp_Kit_MKH416.png]]

MKH-416
|No Guide
|Shotgun microphone with all relevant parts to make blimp kit. Used to reject as much wind noise as possible.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Mic
|Super Cardioid: Electrovoice RE10
|No Guide
|Microphone ideal for getting just the sound it is pointed at and rejecting others.
|No
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Mic
|Shotgun Mic:

Audio-Technica AT4073
|No Guide
|Microphone ideal for getting just the sound it is pointed at and rejecting others.
|No
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Mic
|Wireless Lavalier Sennheiser EW 100 G3
|No Guide
|A tiny but high quality microphone that an be attached to a performers shirt collar and a thin cable that runs to a little transmitter that can be clipped to a belt. The transmitter has a corresponding receiver that wirelessly picks up the signal and can be sent to a recorder.
|No
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Mic
|[[File:MHP-DolphinEar.jpg|frameless|120x120px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:MHP-DolphinEar.jpg]]
Underwater

DolphinEar Pro
|[[DolphinEar/PRO Hydrophone Gear Guide]]
|Our only Microphone that can record underwater.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|LED light
|[[File:Dracast DR LED1000 BV Light.png|frameless|130x130px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Dracast_DR_LED1000_BV_Light.png]]

Dracast DR-LED1000 BV
|[[APS Lighting Equipment Guide]]
|A powerful bicolored LED that comes with barn doors and difuser.
|No
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Hot light
|[[File:3 Light Arri.png|frameless|150x150px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:3_Light_Arri.png]]

3 light Arri kit
|[[APS Lighting Equipment Guide]]
|A 3 light kit of Arri light with barn doors. It comes in 650W or 1000W depending on how much power you need.
|No
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Hot light
|[[File:Arri Soft Key.png|frameless|156x156px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Arri_Soft_Key.png]]

3 light Soft Key Arri kit
|[[APS Lighting Equipment Guide]]
|The soft key kit comes with three hot light, 1 of which is good for soft lighting, result in shadows that don't have hard edges.
|No
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Tripod
|[[File:Large video tripod.png|frameless|225x225px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Large_video_tripod.png]]Many Models
|No Guide
|Tripods available for both Bolex and DSLRs
|No
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Jib Arm
|Varizoom Solo Jib
VZ-KT75A
|[[APS VariZoom Solo Jib Operating Guide]]
|A small crane with a tripod used to get cinematic movements. Can be mounted on top of the Dolly (listed below) to get complex shots.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Dolly Track
|Varizoom
VZD50 Dolly
|[[APS VariZoom Dolly Track Operating Guide]]
|A track that a normal tripod or Jib Arm can be placed on to get smooth movement in one direction.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Track Sliders
|Revo RS-1200
|No Guide
|A thin track that is 47" long and can be placed on a table or mounted to a large tripod. A camera can be mounted onto the track and get movements similar to the Dolly (listed above) but much smaller and easier to set-up.
|No
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|DSLR Gimbal
|DJI Ronin S
|No Guide
|Automated Stabilizer for handheld camera work
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|}
[[Category:Media Loan Catalogs]]

Media Loan APS Catalog

2026-06-17T19:05:14Z

Zornesn:

{{Media Loan Covid Message}}

<div class="container-fluid">

<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">

<div class="lead">

<div class="lead">[[File:Media Loan Logo.png|left|frameless|90x90px]] APS Gear that is only available to students in specific coordinated Media classes. </div>

<div class="pull-right"></div>

</div>

'''APS:''' This catalog shows all "APS" gear available at Media Loan. APS (Assigned Program Support) gear requires students to be in specific advanced media classes that have coordinated the use of the gear. APS is a different category of Media Loan Gear than "General Access". If you aren't in a media class that has coordinated APS gear, we recommend looking at the [[Media Loan Catalog]] that has all the General Access items that any enrolled student can use.

'''Proficiency:''' In the "Proficiency Required?" column, you can see if you need to pass a proficiency test to use the gear. Many APS items require a proficiency test. The "Gear Guide" column has the links to pages for information to become proficient. Proficiency may also be offered through class workshops.

__NOTOC__

</div>

<div class="col-md-1"></div>
<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">
{{Media Loan Basic Sidebar}}


</div>


</div>


</div>

__NOEDITSECTION__
== APS (Advanced Production Services) ==
{| class="mw-collapsible wikitable" style="text-align: center; vertical-align:middle; background:#C5d2ba;"
|+ style="white-space:nowrap" |
!Item
!Brand & Model
!Gear Guide
!Description
!Proficiency Required?
!Access
|-
|Full-Frame DSLR
|[[File:Canon 6D.png|frameless|150x150px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Canon_6D.png]]

Canon 6D video kit
|[[Canon 6D Gear Guide]]
|Canon 6D kit with 3 cine lenses and a variety of filters. Cine Lenses make this kit good for video production and can be connected to other APS gear like the 6D shoulder rig and other equipment listed in the "Grip" section below. We also have additional cine lenses like the 16mm fisheye, 50mm, and 100mm macro.
|Required

|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Full-Frame DSLR
|[[File:Canon 6D.png|alt=A Canon 6D DSLR camera with two cine lenses next to it.|153x153px|centre|frameless|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Canon_6D.png]]
Canon 6D Photo kit
|[[Canon 6D Gear Guide]]
|Used primarily for photography and also video. Can create higher resolution pictures than the Rebel T6i.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Medium Format DSLR
|[[File:IMG 0125.jpeg|frameless|150x150px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:IMG_0125.jpeg]]
Pentax 645Z
|[[Pentax 645Z Digital Medium Format Gear Guide]]
|Only a few people will be allowed to use this camera because we only have one.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Camcorder
|[[File:Hxr side.png|frameless|150x150px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Hxr_side.png]]Sony HXR
NX5U
|[[APS Sony HXR HD Camcorder Operating Guide]]
|A large professional camcorder designed a variety of video productions. Can be handheld or mounted to a tripod. Can connect to other APS gear like a field monitor.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Medium Format
|[[File:Mamiya-top.jpg|frameless|150x150px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Mamiya-top.jpg]]Mamiya Twin lens
|[[Medium Format Cameras Gear Guide]]
|A camera that uses bigger film that results in higher resolution images. We have many kinds of Medium format Cameras. Check the Guide for information about each kind. We also have Pentax 6x7, Bronica 645, Bronica 6x6.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Large Format
|[[File:LargeFormat.png|frameless|150x150px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:LargeFormat.png]]
Calumet
|[[Large Format (4x5) Camera Gear Guide]]
|Our biggest film cameras. They use large sheets of film resulting in the highest resolution image possible. We also have a Graflex camera
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Audio Recorder
|[[File:Zoom H6n.png|frameless|150x150px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Zoom_H6n.png]]

Zoom H6n
|[[APS/AS Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Operating Guide]]
|A portable 6 channel audio recorder. Comes with 2 stereo mic attachments and 4 additional XLR inputs for external mics and other sources.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Mic Boom Kit
|[[File:Mic Boom Kit MKH416.png|centre|frameless|161x161px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Mic_Boom_Kit_MKH416.png]]

MKH-416
|No Guide
|Shotgun microphone with all relevant parts to make boom kit. Used to extend the microphone and have it just out of the shot for video production
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Mic Blimp Kit
|[[File:Mic Blimp Kit MKH416.png|frameless|158x158px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Mic_Blimp_Kit_MKH416.png]]

MKH-416
|No Guide
|Shotgun microphone with all relevant parts to make blimp kit. Used to reject as much wind noise as possible.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Mic
|Super Cardioid: Electrovoice RE10
|No Guide
|Microphone ideal for getting just the sound it is pointed at and rejecting others.
|No
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Mic
|Shotgun Mic:

Audio-Technica AT4073
|No Guide
|Microphone ideal for getting just the sound it is pointed at and rejecting others.
|No
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Mic
|Wireless Lavalier Sennheiser EW 100 G3
|No Guide
|A tiny but high quality microphone that an be attached to a performers shirt collar and a thin cable that runs to a little transmitter that can be clipped to a belt. The transmitter has a corresponding receiver that wirelessly picks up the signal and can be sent to a recorder.
|No
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Mic
|[[File:MHP-DolphinEar.jpg|frameless|120x120px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:MHP-DolphinEar.jpg]]
Underwater

DolphinEar Pro
|[[DolphinEar/PRO Hydrophone Gear Guide]]
|Our only Microphone that can record underwater.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|LED light
|[[File:Dracast DR LED1000 BV Light.png|frameless|130x130px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Dracast_DR_LED1000_BV_Light.png]]

Dracast DR-LED1000 BV
|[[APS Lighting Equipment Guide]]
|A powerful bicolored LED that comes with barn doors and difuser.
|No
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Hot light
|[[File:3 Light Arri.png|frameless|150x150px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:3_Light_Arri.png]]

3 light Arri kit
|[[APS Lighting Equipment Guide]]
|A 3 light kit of Arri light with barn doors. It comes in 650W or 1000W depending on how much power you need.
|No
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Hot light
|[[File:Arri Soft Key.png|frameless|156x156px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Arri_Soft_Key.png]]

3 light Soft Key Arri kit
|[[APS Lighting Equipment Guide]]
|The soft key kit comes with three hot light, 1 of which is good for soft lighting, result in shadows that don't have hard edges.
|No
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Tripod
|[[File:Large video tripod.png|frameless|225x225px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Large_video_tripod.png]]Many Models
|No Guide
|Tripods available for both Bolex and DSLRs
|No
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Jib Arm
|Varizoom Solo Jib
VZ-KT75A
|[[APS VariZoom Solo Jib Operating Guide]]
|A small crane with a tripod used to get cinematic movements. Can be mounted on top of the Dolly (listed below) to get complex shots.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Dolly Track
|Varizoom
VZD50 Dolly
|[[APS VariZoom Dolly Track Operating Guide]]
|A track that a normal tripod or Jib Arm can be placed on to get smooth movement in one direction.
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|Track Sliders
|Revo RS-1200
|No Guide
|A thin track that is 47" long and can be placed on a table or mounted to a large tripod. A camera can be mounted onto the track and get movements similar to the Dolly (listed above) but much smaller and easier to set-up.
|No
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|-
|DSLR Gimbal
|DJI Ronin S
|No Guide
|Automated Stabilizer for handheld camera work
|Required
|APS:
Specific Coordinated Classes and Coordinated ILC's only
|}
[[Category:Media Loan Catalogs]]

Parabolic Microphone Kit Gear Guide

2026-06-17T18:59:14Z

Zornesn:

Elinchrom Studio Flash Kit Gear Guide

2026-06-17T18:56:34Z

Zornesn:

{{Media Loan Covid Message}}

<div class="container-fluid">

<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">

<div class="lead">

<div class="lead">[[File:Media Loan Logo.png|left|frameless|90x90px]]A kit with two flashing lights on stands for studio photography. </div>

<div class="pull-right"></div>

</div>

</div></div></div>

<div class="col-md-8"><div class="container-fluid">

<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">
==Overview==
These lights brightly flash in response to taking a picture automatically. The kit works wirelessly or wired, with most cameras, like the digital Canon Rebels and 6D as well as the 35mm Pentax K1000s. The kit comes with 2 lights, 2 stands, remote, sync cable, hot shoe adapter and various light covers.

==How to Use It==

===Set Up===
#Remove black cover from light, apply any attachments you would like (listed below) and turn on.
#Test the flash on the light itself with the top right button (with the star shaped image) of the light.
#Test the remote by pressing the only button on it and check if both lights respond.
#Test if the camera triggers the remote by installing the remote onto the camera's hot shoe mount on top. The “hot” in hot shoe refers to an electrical connection. By pressing the camera’s shutter release button to take a picture, it sends out a trigger to the light kit via the remote.
*If the above tests work but not the camera trigger, then make sure the camera is out of live view mode (the little button with the image of the camera on it) and be sure to do a full-press and not just a half-press on the shutter release (picture taking button).
*If the above test doesn’t work, there is also the option to use a wired connection for triggering the lights instead of the remote. There is an adapter in a small box that attaches to the hot shoe of the camera. Connect the wire in the kit from the 3.5mm sync socket on the light to the adapter. Be sure that the light not connected via the cable has the button with the picture of an eye in the on position. This enables the disconnected light to be triggered when it detects light from the light connected to the camera.

===Changing Bulb===
If you need to change the bulb, make sure it is off, wait for it to cool. Do not touch the bulb with bare hands or the bulb could explode, use the gloves to protect the bulb from your hand oils. When returning equipment, inform Media Loan that a bulb was used. Do not replace the flash tubes, just the standard looking 100watt bulbs stored with kit.

===Pack up===
Be sure to store with black hard cover over the light protecting the bulbs and lock in place with the blue switch.

===Controls===
Screen: Displays light Intensity of flash.
*Arrows: Adjusts contents of screen.
*Bulb Button: This allows you to adjust and toggle the modeling light which is the standard bulb that remains on before and after flashes.
*Eye Button: Enables the light to detect and respond to another light flash going off and triggering its own light flash simultaneously. This is only needed if using the sync cable method and not the remote control for triggering lights.
*Music Button: This enables the light to make an annoying beep sound after triggering the lights to flash as soon as the light is prepared to flash bulbs again.
*Star Button: This is used to make test flashes.

===Attachments===
there are two attachments in the kit to choose from
*The grey reflector is a single item installed after unlocking the blue switch on the side of the light
*The soft box is constructed from the white softbox bad and the contents of a small black bag including 4 black rods and 2 covers, 1 white and the other silver and black.
</div></div></div>

=== Film Cameras ===
This flash kit can also be connected to most film cameras available at Media Loan. Rather than connecting the transmitter to a hot shoe, you can connect the camera to the lights with the 385HV PC Sync Cable included in the kit. There will be a small circular port, likely near the lens on the front of the camera body, that connects to the PC cable. Do not wiggle or twist the cable in this port: insert it straight in and straight out. The other end plugs into a port on the back of the lights. The camera and lights should sync as soon as they are plugged into each other (there are no buttons or settings that need to be adjusted). If the flash does not fire when a picture is taken, the cable was either not fully inserted or may be broken.

==Media Loan Gear it Connects With Well==

See the [[Media Loan Catalog]] for more info about the below items.

* Canon Rebel T6i


</div>

<div class="col-md-1"></div>

<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">

{{GA Proficiency Information

|Testlink= [[Elinchrom Studio Flash Kit Proficiency Test]]

}}



{{Precautions, Help, and Other Wikis for all Media Loan Gear

|Exceptions=

*'''For This Gear Specifically'''

** To avoid potentially lethal conditions, this unit must be connected to a 3-wire grounded outlet.
** Do not operate with two-wire extension cords or use an adapter to connect to ungrounded outlets.
** This unit contains high voltages and internal components, which can store dangerous voltages even when the unit is unplugged. The use of water around this equipment is not recommended.
** The flash-tube and modeling lamp can get extremely hot. Do not allow finger oils to contact the lamps as this can cause excess heating and premature lamp failure.
** Do not attempt to change flash tubes (the normal bulbs are okay to replace) or disassemble the units. Please bring it back to Media Loan for maintenance.
** Before attempting to operate the unit, ensure that it is securely mounted to a light stand.
** Do not allow unattended children around studio flash equipment as potentially dangerous conditions may result. These dangers may include burns and electrical shock hazards as well as the possibility of falling equipment if cords are tripped over.

}}





</div>





__NOEDITSECTION__
[[category:Media Loan Tests]]

APS Sound Devices 302 Portable Field Mixer

2026-06-17T18:55:23Z

Zornesn:

===INTRO===
[[File:302bag.jpg|thumbnail|Look at this neat bag!]]
Designed to capture audio for film, this high-end mixer features three XLR inputs and two XLR outputs. Our kit includes a power adapter but can also be powered by three AA batteries for use in the field. Each channel has both input gain and volume knobs, 12V or 48V phantom power, a variable low-cut filter, and a pan selector switch. This mixer's other capabilities like stereo outputs (hence the 3 inputs with only 2 outputs) makes is a versatile tool. Its daylight-visible LED meter, carrying bag that can consolidate the mixer, recorder, and cables makes it convenient for quickly capturing professional audio.

===GETTING SET UP===
Depending on your power source move the power switch in the bottom right corner to the correct position (INT for using battery bower, EXT for power adapter). Some lights should light up to indicate the mixer is on.
====INS AND OUTS====
[[File:302ins.jpg|thumbnail|Input Panel]]
[[File:302outs.jpg|thumbnail|Output Panel]]
Plug your inputs into the left side of the mixer, outputs go in the right side. Next to each input is a mic/line switch and and mic powering switch. Select "PH" to activate phantom power on that input. Either 12V or 48V phantom power can be selected with the switch in the upper right corner. This applies to all inputs with "PH" selected. Most condenser mics that need phantom power will use 48V, but ''always double check and know your microphones!'' "DYN" stands for "dynamic". Dynamic microphones don't need phantom power. The "T" setting stands for T-power which is wired differently for a few older microphones. T-power is almost never needed. DO NOT USE T POWER WITH RIBBON MICROPHONES BECAUSE IT CAN DESTROY THEM!

Despite being an output, the headphone jack is located on the left side of the mixer with the rest of the inputs.

Plug your outputs into the right side of the mixer. There are two XLR outputs. This is for stereo recording and will be explained below. For now, plug in your outputs and connect them to their destination, usually a recording device.

You will have to tell the mixer where to send each input. This allows for greater control of your signal flow and is done using the "L C R" pan switch assigned to each channel on the front panel of the mixer. Switched to "L" sends that channel to the left output and "R" to the right. "C" sends the channel equally to both outputs.

Here are some scenarios to help understand when to use each pan setting:
*You have two microphone and want the greatest control over your levels both while recording and in post-production. If one mic is close to your subject and the other is capturing more ambient room noise or is positioned in a place that is exposed to wind, this would be and ideal situation to pan your two inputs to separate outputs (L + R).
*You are filming two people talking and are using a lavalier mic on each person (inputs 1 & 2). You are also using a boom mic to capture the fuller sound of the room (input 3). Sending both lav mics to the same track will make editing in post-production much easier since they will already be consolidated and just need to be synced with the video. These could both be assigned to the left output (L). The boom however will sound different than the lavs and you might want to adjust the levels independently in post or use different effects to process its audio. Sending the boom to the right output (R) will allow you to keep the sources separate while still being able to capture audio from a variety of sources and save you time in post.
*If you needed to have three input sources, capturing similar sources, you could use the pan switches to send all of your inputs bunched together to one output while isolating one of those inputs to its own output channel in order to have more freedom in post. For example, if you wanted input 2 to be an isolated recording, you would pan input 1 right, input 2 center (so it's sending to both outputs), and input 3 right. Now the right output will include all three microphones on one track and the left will keep input 2 isolated.

====SETTING LEVELS====
Now that your inputs and outputs are setup, it's time to set the levels. This is done from the front panel of the mixer. Each channel has a coarse and a fine trim knob. The course knob should be set first. This is the smaller black knob to the upper right of the fine trim, larger knob. The coarse trim knob is spring loaded. Pushing it in will make it pop out so it can be adjusted. Push it back in so it will be out of the way and safe from accidental movements while recording. Your subject needs to be making noise before you set your levels. If you're recording a person, have them talk while you do this. Ask them about their breakfast, or something like that.
To set this knob, first set the fine trim knob to 0dB (when a level is at 0, it is at "unity"). Then adjust the coarse trim so the LED meter is registering somewhere in the mid range.
Now use the fine trim knob to bring the level up so it sits around -6dB on the meter. The fine trim knob is useful for making quick and small adjustments while recording. This is especially useful if the subject does not have a consistent volume.

====LOW-CUT & LIMITER====
Each channel has the option to apply a low-cut filter (also known as a high-pass filter). The switch is variable and can used for rolling off at 80Hz or 160Hz. This filter attenuates sound at a rate of 12dB per octave. Use this option to reduce low and unwanted rumbles that can come from wind, room noise, and other background muddiness. A low-cut filter is almost always a good choice for recording voices.

There is a single limiter switch located just right of the third gain knob. It has three positions, OFF, LIM, and LINK. LIM is for dual-mono use and applies a limiter to inputs and outputs. LINK is for stereo operation. By default, the limited is set to a threshold of +20dB.

===MONITORING//METERING===
While a decent pair of headphones should always be used to monitor when recording audio (also available as APS and Media Loan,) a visual meter is the primary way to confirm that levels are set and being adjusted properly. This mixer has an LED array that displays the level of each channel.

====LED METER====
By default, the meter will display output bus levels. It is also capable of sourcing PFL (pre-fader listen) levels, and return input levels. The output bus levels will be the main source to be concerned with. The other two will not usually be necessary to view. From sourcing the outputs levels, the meter can display a variety of information. This is selected by pressing the PK/VU button. PK stands for "peak" and VU for "volume units". By pressing that button, the selections cycled are VU, Peak, Peak-Hold and VU combination,
and Peak and VU combination. If these terms are arbitrary to you, stick with VU. This selection will not affect your audio in anyway, just how it is visually represented to the operator.

The meter is designed to be used in all lighting situations, even outdoors. Adjust the brightness of the meter by pushing the button with a sun next to it at the bottom left of the meter.

====HEADPHONE MONITORING====
Headphone monitoring adjustments are made with the two knobs directly under the meter. The right knob changes the volume in the headphones. Set this to a comfortable level but '''remember that this headphone volume does not accurately reflect the output volume being recorded.''' The left knob determines what audio is being sent to the headphones. This mixer offers 11 various sources. Most of these will be arbitrary for most users and selecting '''"M"''' or '''"ST"''' will do you no wrong. See the chart below for a detailed explanation of each selection.

The LED to the right of the right headphone knob labeled "HP" indicates the headphone circuit is overloading. Turn down your knob!

{| class="wikitable"
|-
! HP Source !! Description
|-
| 1 (PFL) || PFL solo monitoring of the Channel 1 input signal. The channel is monitored in dual-mono. Pre-Fader, postLimiter,
and post-High-Pass. Useful for setting the channel gain.
|-
| 2 (PFL) || Same as above, for Ch. 2.
|-
| 3 (PFL) || Same as above, for Ch. 3.
|-
| L || Left output bus, monitored in dual-mono.
|-
| R || Right output bus, monitored in dual-mono.
|-
| '''M''' || Summed mono of the left and right output bus.
|-
| '''ST''' || Stereo monitoring of the master output bus. This is the primary monitoring path.
|-
| RTN || Stereo return from the RTN monitor input path.
|-
| M-MS || Monitoring of the mono signal of an MS stereo signal.
|-
| ST-MS || Monitoring of discrete MS signals in the headphones as a decoded stereo signal.
|-
| RTN-MS || Monitoring of discrete MS return signal in the headphones as decoded stereo signal.
|-
|}

===STEREO RECORDING===
The 302 can record in stereo with either an X/Y pattern or an MS (mid-side) pattern. These are two different miking techniques and require different microphones and different placements. If recording stereo, the technique (X/Y or MS) must be chosen in the set-up menu of the mixer. If planning to record in stereo, please ask us how to do this and we can offer some consulting.

====302 STEREO OPERATION NOTES====
In an '''X/Y link''', channels 1 and 2 pan switches continue to reflect the same signal routing for each channel.
Channel 2's fader controls the overall level of the stereo pair. The trim knobs and low-cut filters remain independent.
In an '''MS link''' input 1 should be connected to the mid mic and input 2 to the side mic, as labeled on the side of the mixer. Channel 2's fine gain (fader) knob now controls the overall gain of the linked pair. Channel 1's fine gain knob (fader) as well as each channels pan switches are disabled. The coarse gain knob for each channel controls the mid and side levels respectively. There is also a polarity reverse switch just next to Channel 1's coarse gain knob. This flips the polarity of input 2 relative to inputs 1 and 3. This may be needed for MS stereo linking.

===SLATE MIC & TONE OSCILLATOR===
A cute feature of this mixer is its built in slate mic and tone feature. This is one more reason this mixer is great for film audio. Use the '''slate mic''' by holding the "MIC/1K" switch to the right. Use it to briefly notate which scene is being shot. Use the '''tone oscillator''' to set the levels on devices that are post-mixer in the signal path. The tone oscillator emits a 1 kHz tone at 0dBu. You can use this to set devices level to unity (0 dB) and ensure proper recording. This audio from the slate mic and tone oscillator are recorded on all channels.
[[category:Media Loan Tests]]

APS Sony HXR HD Camcorder Operating Guide

2026-06-17T18:55:09Z

Zornesn:

[[File:SONY HXR N5.jpg| SONY HXR N5U CAMCORDER]]<br />

==INTRODUCTION==
The Sony HXR-NX5U is a prosumer HD camcorder that records to memory cards utilizing the AVCHD format. This camcorder provides high quality, long duration recording with dual memory card slots, state-of-the-art G lens and 3 CMOS sensors. As with all Media Loan Equipment, '''''YOU ARE 100% FINANCIALLY RESPONSIBLE''''' for the HXR and all accessories when you check this camera out from APS.

==PRECAUTIONS==
*'''The HXR is not water resistant.'''

*'''Do not shake, knock, drop or subject the HXR to excessive shock. '''
*'''Do not expose the camcorder to the sun for extended periods of time. Intense light sources can converge through the viewfinder or lens and damage internal parts of camcorder.'''
*'''Always close the lens cover and store in case when not in use.'''
*'''Do not apply any liquid (cleaning or otherwise) directly onto the LCD screen.'''

*'''If the camcorder is brought from a cold place to a warm place, moisture may condense inside the camcorder and cause malfunction. To avoid this, place HXR in a spastic bag and seal it tightly. Remove the bag when the air temperature inside the plastic bag has reached ambient temperature (generally takes about an hour).'''

==SUPPLYING POWER TO THE HXR==

===CHARGING THE BATTERY PACK===
APS provides two Lithium battery packs when you check out the HXR. Use the supplied AC Adapter/Charger to charge these batteries before use.
# Set the mode switch to charge
# Connect the power cord to the AC Adapter/Charger
# Connect the power cord to the wall outlet.
# Place the battery pack in the slot of the AC Adapter/Charger, press down, and slide battery until the charge lamp turns on and charging starts.

When the battery pack reaches a normal charge, the charge lamp turns off. You can continue to charge the battery pack for an additional hour for a full charge, which lets you use the battery a little longer. Remove the battery pack from the AC Adapter/Charger when the charge is completed.

===ATTACHING/REMOVING THE BATTERY PACK===
To attach the battery pack, press the battery against the back of the camcorder and slide it down.
<br />
To remove the battery pack, slide the '''POWER''' switch to '''OFF'''. Push the '''BAT RELEASE''' button and remove the battery pack.

===USING THE AC ADAPTER/CHARGER===
#Connect the power cord to the AC Adapter/Charger
#Connect the power cord to the wall outlet
#Connect the connecting cord to the AC Adapter/Charger
#Set mode switch of the AC Adapter/Charger to '''VCR/CAMERA'''
#Press the connecting part of the connecting cord against the back of the HXR in the Battery slot and slide it down
* Use a nearby wall outlet when using the AC Adapter/Charger. '''Disconnect the AC Adapter/Charger from the wall outlet immediately if any malfunction occurs while using the camcorder.'''
* '''DO NOT''' use the AC Adapter/Charger placed in a narrow space, such as between a wall and furniture.
* '''DO NOT''' short-circuit the DC plug of the AC Adapter/Charger or battery terminal with any metallic objects. This may cause a malfunction.
* '''UNPLUG THE AC ADAPTER''' from the camcorder and wall socket when camcorder is not in use. Even if your camcorder is turned off, AC power is still supplied to it while connected to the wall outlet via the AC Adapter/Charger.

==OPERATING THE MENU==
# Set the '''POWER''' switch to ON
# Press the '''MENU''' button
# Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial until the icon of the desired menu is highlighted, then press the dial to select the menu.
# Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial until the desired menu item is highlighted, then press the dial to select the item.
# Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial until the desired setting is highlighted, the press the dial to select.
# Press the '''MENU''' button to hide the menu screen. To return to the previous screen, select '''RETURN'''.
*'''TIP''': You may select menu items with the </> buttons.
**'''NOTE''': The available menu items vary depending on the context of your camcorder during recording or playback.

==MEMORY CARDS==
APS supplies two, 32GB memory cards (installed) when you check out the HXR camcorder. This should provide you with ample recording time, even at the highest quality settings. Should you require additional memory cards for your production, you can use "Memory Stick PRO Duo" media, "Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo" media, SD memory cards and, SDHC memory cards.
* '''Remember to re-install the memory cards supplied by APS before returning the camera should you choose to use your own media to avoid charges.'''
Before recording, format the memory card(s).
# With the camcorder powered on, press the '''MODE''' button.
# Touch '''MANAGE MEDIA''' setting '''MEDIA FORMAT'''
# Select the recording media to be formatted
# Select YES. The HXR will ask you to verify your selection.
*'''TIP''': The easiest way to retrieve your files is to make a disk image of the memory card. You can check out a card reader from Media Loan and use the MML or Non-Linear Editing Suites to make your disk image(s). You can then use Final Cut Pro/Adobe Premiere to log and transfer your video for editing.
** '''NOTE''': While [Executing...] is displayed, do not operate the buttons on the camcorder, disconnect the AC Adapter/Charger, or removing recording media from the camcorder. (The access lamp is light or flashing while formatting recording media.)

===NOTES ON RECORDING===
'''Estimated Recording Time on one 32 GB card in minutes with HD Audio Format set to Linear PCM/Dolby Digital:'''
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! AVCHD 24M (FX) !! AVCHD 17M (FH) !! AVCHD 9M (HQ) !! AVCHD 5M (LP)
|-
| 170/180 || 225/235 || 385/435 || 605/750
|}
* When the access lamp is lit or flashing red, the camcorder is writing data on the recording media. Do not remove the battery pack or the AC Adapter/Charger.
* If a movie file exceeds 2GB during recording, the camcorder divides the file and create a new file automatically.
* The menu settings are stored in your camcorder when you turn the '''POWER''' switch to OFF. Do not remove battery pack or AC Adapter/Charger.

==RECORDING==
# Open the shutter of the lens hood.
# Slide the '''POWER''' switch to ON while pressing the green button.
The recording lamp lights up during recording.
To STOP recording, press the record button or the handle record button again.
*'''TIP''': When recording in high definition image quality (HD), the aspect ratio is fixed to 16:9. When recording in standard definition image quality (SD), you can switch the aspect ratio to 4:3.
*'''TIP''': For low angle recording, the handle record button is convenient. Release the '''HOLD''' lever to enable the handle record button. It might be helpful if you set the LCD panel face up or close it after turning it face down, or life the viewfinder up during the low angle recording.
** '''NOTE''': the camcorder will switch from Memory Card A to Memory Card B just before space runs out on Card A (and vice versa). '''Do not eject memory card that is currently being used for recording. Replace only the memory card whose slot lamp is off.'''

===SELECTING RECORDING QUALITY===
You can set the recording image quality to high definition image quality (HD) or standard definition image quality (SD).
To change the setting:
# Press '''MENU'''
# Select REC/OUT settings
# Select REC SET
# Select HD/SD SET

===SELECTING THE RECORDING FORMAT===
You can select the recording format (bit-rate, image size, frame rate, scanning system). The default setting is HD 1080/60i FX/SD 480/60i HQ.
To change the setting value:
# Press '''MENU'''
# Select REC/OUT settings
# Select REC SET
# Select REC FORMAT
If you select HD 1080/60i FX (the default), movies are recorded with the following format:
* HD - High Definition image quality
* 1080 - Effective scanning lines
* 60 - Frame Rate
* i - Scanning system
* FX - Recording mode

====SETTING DESCRIPTION====

Bit Rate:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! FX !! FH !! HQ !! LP
|-
| Max 24 Mbps || Approx 17 Mbps || Approx 9 Mbps || Approx 5 Mbps
|}

Image Size:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! FX !! FH !! HQ !! SP
|-
| 1920x1080/1280x720 || 1920x1080/1280x720 || HD recording 1440x1080 SD recording 720x480 || 1440x1080
|}

Frame rate: 24,30 or 60
Scanning system:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! i !! p !! pSCAN
|-
| Interlaced || Progressive || Recording images of progressive scanning as interlace signal (60i)
|}
*'''NOTE''': The recording mode is fixed to FX or FH with the progressive scanning system.
*'''NOTE''': When the recording format is changed to or from 720/60p, you will be prompted to reboot the camcorder. Select YES. Otherwise, you cannot switch the recording format.

==ADJUSTING THE ZOOM==

===USING THE POWER ZOOM===
The power zoom lever is pressure sensitive. For a slower zoom use less pressure and for a faster zoom use more pressure.
*'''NOTE''': Be sure to keep your finger on the power zoom lever. If you move your finger off the power zoom lever, the operation sound of the power zoom lever mat also be recorded.

===USING THE HANDLE ZOOM===
* Set the handle zoom switch to VAR or FIX
* Press the handle zoom lever to zoom in or out
When you set the handle zoom switch to VAR, you can zoom in or out at variable speed.
When you set the handle zoom switch to FIX, you can zoom in or out at fixed speed set in HANDLE ZOOM.
You cannot use the handle zoom lever when the handle zoom switch is set to OFF.

===USING THE ZOOM RING===
You can zoom at the desired speed by turning the zoom ring. Fine adjustment is also possible.
Turn the zoom ring at moderate speed. If you turn it too fast, the zoom speed may lag behind the zoom ring rotation speed, or the operation sound of the zoom may also be recorded.

====ADJUSTING THE FOCUS MANUALLY====
# Set the FOCUS switch to MAN
# Rotate the focus ring and adjust the focus.
*'''TIP''': It is easier to focus on the subject when you use the zoom function. Move the power zoom lever towards T (telephoto) to adjust the focus, and then towards W (wide angle) to adjust the zoom/compose your shot recording.

====PUSH AUTO FOCUS====
Record the subject while pressing and holding the PUSH AUTO button. If you release the button, the setting returns to manual focusing. Use this function to shift the focus on one subject to another (Rack Focus). The scenes will shift smoothly.

==ADJUSTING EXPOSURE==
You can adjust the image exposure by adjusting the iris, gain, shutter speed or by reducing the light volume with the ND Filter.
*'''NOTE''': You cannot use the back light function and the spotlight when iris, gain and shutter speed are adjusted manually.
*'''NOTE''': AE SHIFT is not effective temporarily while you adjust the iris, gain, and shutter speed manually.

===IRIS APERTURE===
You can manually adjust the iris to control the volume of the light entering the lens. By adjusting the iris, you can change or close the aperture of the lens, which is expressed as an F value between F1.6 and F11. The volume of the light increases the more you open the aperture (decreasing F value). The volume of light decreases the more that you close the aperture (increasing F value). The current F value appears on the screen.
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL''' switch to MANUAL.
# Press the '''IRIS''' button if "A" is displayed next to current iris value.
# Adjust the iris with the iris ring.
*'''TIP''': The F value becomes close to F3.4 as the zoom position changes from W to T even when you open the aperture by setting the F value low then F3.4, such as F1.6.
*'''TIP''': The range of focus, an important effect of the aperture, is called depth of field. The depth of field gets shallower as the aperture is opened and deeper as the aperture is closed.

===GAIN===
You can adjust the gain manually when you do not want to use the AGC (Automatic Gain Control).
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL'''switch to MANUAL.
# Press the '''GAIN''' button if "A" is displayed next to current gain value.
# Set the gain switch to H,M or L. The gain value set for the selected fain switch position appears on the screen. You can set the gain value for each gain switch from [GAIN SET] of the (CAMERA SET) menu.
===GAIN SET===
you can set gain values for H, M, and L positions of the '''GAIN''' switch. The default settings of [H], [M] and [L] are 18 dB, 9 dB, and 0 dB respectively.
# Press the '''MENU''' button, select CAMERA SET then GAIN SET.
# Select [H], [M] or [L] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Set the gain value with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial, then press the dial. You can select the value between -6 dB and -21 dB by 3 dB. The larger the value, the higher the gain.
# Select [OK] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Press the '''MENU''' button to hide the menu screen.
====SMOOTH GAIN====
You can set the transition speed at which the gain setting shifts from one value to another, set for the '''GAIN''' switch positions, when you switch the '''GAIN''' switch from a position to another. You can select the transition speed from [FAST], [MIDDLE] and [SLOW] or set to [OFF]. The default setting is [OFF].

===SHUTTER SPEED===
You can manually adjust and fix the shutter speed. You can make a moving object look still or emphasize the movement of a moving subject by adjusting the shutter speed.
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL''' switch
# Press the '''SHUTTER SPEED''' button until the shutter speed value is highlighted.
# Change the shutter speed displayed on the screen by turning the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial. You can adjust the shutter speed in a range 1/4 second through 1/10000 second. The denominator of the set shutter speed appears on the screen when you set the shutter speed to 1/100 second. The larger the value on the screen, the faster the shutter speed.
# Press the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to lock the shutter speed. To readjust the shutter speed, do steps 2 to 4 again.

===ND FILTER===
You can record the subject clearly by using the ND filter when the recording environment is too bright. The ND filters 1, 2, and 3 reduce the volume of light to about 1/4, 1/16 and 1/64 respectively.
If ND1 flashes during the iris automatic adjustment, set the ND filter to 1. If ND2 flashes during the iris automatic adjustment, set the ND filter to 2. If ND3 flashes during the iris automatic adjustment, set the ND filter to 3. The ND filter indicator will stop flashing and remain on the screen.
If NDOFF flashes set the ND filter to off. The ND filter icon will disappear from the screen.
*'''NOTE''': If you change the ND filter to OFF, the ND filter icon will disappear from the screen.
*'''NOTE''': When adjusting the iris manually, the ND filter icon does not flash even if the light volume should be adjusted with the ND filter.
*'''NOTE''': If the camcorder cannot detect the ND filter position (OFF/1/2/3), ND flashes on the screen. Make sure that the ND filter is set correctly.
**'''TIP''': While recording a bright subject, diffraction may occur if you close the aperture further down, resulting in a fuzzy focus (this is a common phenomenon with video cameras). The ND filter suppresses this phenomenon and gives better recording results.

===WHITE BALANCE===
You can adjust and fix white balance according to the lighting conditions of recording environment. You can store white balance values in memory A and memory B. Unless a white balance is readjusted, values will remain even after the power has been turned off.
====SETTING WHITE BALANCE====
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL''' switch to MANUAL.
# Press the '''WHT BAL''' button.
# Set the white balance memory switch to '''A''' or '''B'''.
# Capture a white subject, such as white paper, full-screen in the same lighting condition as the subject.
# Press the '''Custom WHT BAL''' button (one push) WHT BAL A or WHT BAL B starts flashing rapidly. It will stay on when the white balance adjustment is completed and the adjusted value is stored in WHT BAL A or WHT BAL B.
*'''NOTE''': When a white balance adjustment value has not been obtained successfully, WHT BAL A or WHT BAL B turns from rapid flashing to slow flashing. Adjust the subject appropriately and set the shutter speed to auto or around 1/60, the try adjusting white balance again.
====ZEBRA STRIPING====
You can display a zebra pattern as a guide for adjusting brightness. Zebra stripes are the only real indication of lighting levels. The Zebra pattern is a stripe pattern displayed where the image will be overexposed over a certain level and detail will be lost.
You can select the brightness level between 70 and 100 or 100+. The default setting is [70]. 100 IRE is the upper limit of legal video and is the correct value of white. From The Filmmaker's Handbook: "It's an old cliché of "video lighting" that it's necessary to expose flesh tones consistently from shot to shot, for example at 65-70 percent on a waveform monitor. This approach is outmoded (if not racist). First, skin tone varies a lot from person to person, from pale white to dark black. If you use auto-iris on close-ups of people's faces, it will tend to expose everyone the same...Momentary use of auto-iris is always good way to spot-check what the camera thinks the best average exposure should be, but don't neglect to use your eyes and your creative common sense" (pg. 191).
# Press the '''MENU''' button.
# Select DISPLAY SET with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Select ZEBRA with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Select the appropriate level.
*'''NOTE''': When you select [ON], the Zebra icon (a square with diagonal lines) and the brightness level appear on the screen. The zebra pattern will not be recorded with the image. the default setting is [OFF].

==AUDIO SETUP==
===CHANNEL SETTING===
# Select input with the '''CH1''' (INT MIC/INPUT 1) switch and the '''CH2''' (INT MIC/INPUT1/INPUT2).
# Set '''INPUT1''' to an appropriate position for the microphone connected to the INPUT1 jack.
* LINE: For inputting sound from an audio device.
* MIC: For inputting sound from an external microphone that does not support the +48V power source (phantom power).
* MIC+48V: For inputting sound from a device that supports the +48v power source, including the supplied microphone.
When you connect a microphone to the INPUT2 jack, set the INPUT2 switch to an appropriate position for that microphone.
'''WHEN THE CH1 SWITCH IS SET TO INT MIC'''
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! CH2 SWITCH POSITION !! INPUT CHANNEL !! SOURCE
|-
| INT MIC || Internal microphone (L) || CH1
|-
| INT MIC || Internal microphone (R) || CH2*)
|-
| INPUT1 || Internal microphone (mono) || CH1
|-
| INPUT1 || XLR INPUT1 || CH2**
|-
| INPUT2 || Internal microphone (mono) || CH1
|-
| INPUT2 || Internal microphone (mono) || CH2
|}
'''WHEN THE CH1 SWITCH IS SET TO INPUT1'''
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! CH2 SWITCH !! INPUT CHANNEL !! SOURCE
|-
| INT MIC || XLR INPUT1 || CH1
|-
| INT MIC || Internal microphone (mono) || CH2**
|-
| INPUT1 || XLR INPUT1 || CH1
|-
| INPUT1 || XLR INPUT1 || CH2**
|-
| INPUT2 || XLR INPUT1 || CH1
|-
| INPUT2 || XLR INPUT2 || CH2**
|}

* The recording level of channel 2 is synchronized with that of channel 1 when only the internal microphone is used. The recording level of channel 2 is controlled with '''CH1''' (AUDIO LEVEL) dial and the '''CH1''' (AUTO/MAN) switch.
* You can adjust the recording levels of channel 1 and channel 2 separately.
*'''NOTE''': Do not operate the '''INPUT1/INPUT2''' switches during recording to prevent noise from being recorded.
*'''NOTE''': When you connect a device that supports the +48V power source to the INPUT1 or INPUT2 jack, set the '''INPUT1/INPUT2''' switches to MIC+48v prior to connecting the device. When you disconnect the device, set the '''INPUT1/INPUT2''' switch to MIC first, then disconnect it.
*'''NOTE''': When you connect a microphone that does not support the +48V power source to the INPUT1 or INPUT2 jack, set the '''INPUT1/INPUT2''' to MIC. If you use it with the INPUT1/INPUT2 switch set to MIC+48V, it may damage or the recorded sound be distorted.

===ADJUSTING THE VOLUME===
You can adjust the volume of an internal microphone or a microphone connected to the INPUT1/INPUT2 jack.
# Set '''AUTO/MAN''' (CH1/CH2) switch of the channel to be adjust to MAN.
# Turn the '''AUDIO LEVEL''' dial to adjust the volume during recording or standby.

===SETTING THE HEADPHONE SOUND===
You can select the channel, CH1 or Ch2, to output from the headphone. You can select the channel, Ch1 or CH2 or Stereo Mix, to output from the headphone.

==TIME CODE AND USER BIT==
The camcorder records movies accompanied by time data, such as time code and user bit. Display the setting screen by pressing the '''MENU''' and select (TC/UB SET) with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
You can synchronize the time code of this camcorder with the time code of another camcorder.

===PRESETTING THE TIME CODE===
# Select [TC PRESET] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Select [PRESET] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Select the first 2 digits with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial. You can set the time code between 00:00:00:00 and 23:59:59:29.
# Set other digits by repeating step 3.
# Select [OK] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.

===TO RESET THE TIME CODE===
You can reset the time code (00:00:00:00). Select [RESET] in step 2 of "PRESETTING THE TIME CODE."

===PRESETTING THE USER BIT===
# Select [UB PRESET] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Select [PRESET] with the '''SE:/PRESET EXEC''' dial.
# Select the first 2 digits with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Set other digits by repeating step 3.
# Select [OK] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
===TO RESET THE USER BIT===
You can reset the user bit (00 00 00 00) Select [RESET in step 2 of "PRESETTING THE USER BIT."

==PLAYBACK==
Press the '''VISUAL INDEX''' button or the '''MODE''' button followed by touching '''PLAY''' then [VISUAL INDEX] on the screen. To play back movies, touch recording media you want to play back. Touch the playback mode and select the desired image quality of movies. Touch the thumbnail of the movie you want to play twice.
[[category:Media Loan Tests]]

APS Lighting Equipment Guide

2026-06-17T18:54:53Z

Zornesn:

{{#ev:vimeo|187691086|600|center|Basic Lighting Concepts}}

==SAFETY==
Please exercise caution with all lighting equipment checked out from Media Loan. The lights can get extremely hot and most require a lot of power.

====When using lighting equipment from Media Loan, ALWAYS:====
* Use gloves to protect your hands
* Tape down wires/cords to prevent tripping hazards
* Weigh down heavy stands with sandbags
* Plug lights into grounded outlets
* Use gloves/hand protection when changing lamps (bulbs)
* Wait for hot lights to cool down before packing them away (at least ten minutes)

====DO NOT:====
Touch hot lights without proper hand protection<br />
Touch lamps (bulbs) with your bare hands (excluding fluorescent and LED)<br />
Expose lights to water<br />
Expose lights to extreme weather/temperatures<br />
Set a hot light on top of a gel<br />

====Lamp (bulb) Changing====
It is extremely important that you never touch halogen lamps with your bare hands. Your hands are covered in oils that, if they get on a lamp, will heat up and potentially cause explosions. To prevent this, you must cover your hands with proper gloves (available in APS) or a clean cloth. Leather, or any type of "working" gloves, will suffice. Do not use latex.<br />
The only type of bulbs you can safely touch with your bare hands are fluorescent and LED. <br />
Every kit should come with spare replacement lamps in the case. If you need help changing a lamp, please call APS (x5506) or stop by during open APS hours.

====Know Your Circuits====
These lights require a lot of power. Each house is divided into multiple circuits, as controlled by a circuit board, and each circuit has a capacity. Overloading a circuit will cause a blow-out and potential damage. Use the formula below to calculate the wattage a circuit is capable of supporting, without accidents:

'''AMPS x VOLTS = WATTS'''

Common household plugs are typically 15-20 amps circuits. Household voltage capacity is 110-120V, so for the purpose of this equation it's a good idea to round down to an even 100V to prevent any blow-outs. In an average house, each circuit is capable of supporting approximately 1500 Watts (15 x 100 = 1500). This is a conservative estimate and will be different per location.

==LIGHTING EQUIPMENT IN APS==
There are multiple options for lighting equipment in APS. These kits do not require proficiencies, but as with all other APS checkouts, they do require an APS workorder. APS equipment is typically restricted to students in media-centric classes/programs and ILC's/SOS's. Before requesting equipment from APS, please familiarize yourself with APS policies and procedures [http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps.htm here].

===ARRILITE 3-LIGHT KITS===
[[file:arri1.jpg|thumb|200px|right|Arri 1000W/650W]]
[[file:arri_open.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Arri 1000W/650W Open-Face]]

Number of lights: 3 per kit<br />
Light intensity: 650W or 1000W<br />
Accessories: Barndoors, Stands, Scrims<br />

The Arri 3-Light Kits come with three open-face focusing flood lights of the same wattage (1000W '''or''' 650W). They are designed for a wide range of film and photographic lighting applications. Each kit comes with three barndoors, 3 stands, and scrims.

The 1000W 3-Light kit provides beam angles of 65° in the flood position and 24° in the spot position. Each fixture will throw a beam of 695 footcandles 4.3 ft (1.4 m) in diameter, @ full spot, from a distance of 10 ft (3 m). It will provide a beam of 145 footcandles 13 ft (4m) in diameter @ full flood, from the same distance.

The Arrlite 650 has a 7.25" open face and provides beam angles of 70° in the flood position, and 26° in the spot position. Each fixture will throw a beam of 450 footcandles 4.3 ft in diameter @ full spot, from a distance of 10 ft. It will provide a beam of 100 footcandles, 14 ft diameter @ full flood, from the same distance.

===ARRI SOFTKEY KIT===
[[file:arri_soft.jpg|200px|left|thumb|Arri Softkey]]

Number of lights: 3<br />
Light intensity: 2x650W (Fresnel), 1000W (Softbox)<br />
Accessories: Barndoors, Stands, Scrims, Fresnel Lenses<br />

This kit includes two 650W Fresnel lights and one 1000W Softbox. The 650W Fresnel lights have a focusable spotlight which can be adjusted via a knob on the back of the light ("spot" for a narrowly focused beam, or "flood" for a wide beam). The beam angle in the flood position is 52 degrees, and a narrow 14.5 degrees in the spot position. The 650W in this kit has a 4.3" low expansion, borosillicate fresnel lens which casts a soft, even illumination across the beam.

The small size and light weight of the 1000W Softbox make it an excellent solution for a soft fill or key. The Softbox has a narrow profile of only 5.5" deep, in which the light bounces off a reflector in the back of the instrument for indirect, even, soft light.
<br />
<br />
<br />.

===LOWEL CASELITES===
[[file:caselite.jpg|200px|right|thumb|Lowel Caselite]]
Number of lights: 1<br />
Light intensity: 55W/bulb, 110W total<br />
Accessories: Barndoors, Stand, Cord, Eggcrate, Stand Arm, Stand Mount<br />

Lowel Caselites are designed to offer beautiful, soft, easy to use fluorescents in a compact, location-friendly system. The current popularity of fluorescent lights in film & video production is well deserved. They offer soft and efficient light at several times the output of incandescent halogen sources. These lights are ideal for interviews.

Caselites are compact, lightweight, rugged and completely self-contained without sacrificing output or light quality. The all-in-one Caselite is both light and case combined, and each one comes with a stand, eggcraft, cord, arm, and stand mount bracket. APS carries both 5300K (daylight) and 3000K (tungsten) compact fluorescent lamps. Additional lamps can be checked out separately.<br />
<br />

===DRACAST LED===

<gallery>
File:LED intensity.png|Dracast LED Light Intensity Chart
File:Dracast_LED.jpg|Dracast LED
</gallery>

Number of Lights: 1<br />
Light Intensity: (see chart)<br />
Accessories available: barndoor, light cover, stand, diffusion kit.<br />

The Dracast LED is an ideal choice for location work, interviews and small sets where color accuracy, control and flicker-free output are of major importance. Variable color temperature from 3,200K-5,600K means that you can quickly match the prevailing ambient or artificial light balance with a simple twist of a knob. Dimming is equally convenient via another knob that adjusts the light intensity from 100-0% with negligible color shift. This light has a low electricity draw of 60W.

===LIGHTING ACCESSORIES (APS)===
Lighting accessories in APS include:
* Light Stands (single & baby stand kits)
* Gels: Color and diffusion kits
* Bounce Discs
* Clothes Pins (C-47's): Used to attach gels to lights

====Bounce Discs====
[[file:Bounce.jpg|200px|thumb|right|5-in-one 42 " Bounce Disk]]
The 42" 5-in-1 Collapsible Reflector Disc from Raya is a versatile light modification tool than can find uses in the studio and on location. This disc provides white, silver, gold, and black surfaces as well as a one stop translucent diffusion panel. The tool allows you to quickly and easily make adjustments to your lighting in order to get the look you want. Also, the disc is able to fold down to 1/3 its size and be stored inside the included carrying bag.

* White provides a neutral soft reflection useful for fill light
* Silver offers a neutral color balance similar to the white but with a higher contrast, increasing specular highlights
* Gold reflects a warmer light onto a subject, useful to enhancing skin tones or balancing a cool scene
* Black will block unwanted reflections and eliminate spill
* The translucent diffuser lessens light power by 1 stop and will help create a broader, softer light source that will wrap around your subject

===GRIP===
====C-Stands and Gobo arms====
[[file:Cstand.jpg|200px|thumb|right|C-Stand with Gobo Arm]]
A C-stand is primarily used to position light modifiers, such as silks, nets, or flags, in front of light sources. The stand is constructed of metal and consists of a collapsible base, two riser columns, and a baby pin on top. In addition, a C-stand includes a gobo head and a gobo arm, which provide the ability to articulate a light modifier without moving the stand itself. The legs of C stands are designed to be nested, so many stands can be placed around a light source.

====Flags====
Flags are used for controlling a lighting instrument. Flags are mounted onto C-Stands and placed in front of lights.

Single flags available for checkout at APS include:
* Cutter (Black flag): This completely blocks lighting. Used for intentionally shaping light.
* Single Scrim (Green): Reduces the amount of light produced from an instrument by half of a stop.
* Double Scrim (Red): Reduces the amount of by one full stop.
* Silk (Yellow): Diffuses and greatly reduces the amount of light.
* Wooden Cucoloris (Cookie): Creates patterns by cutting shapes into it. Used to create background foliage, etc.
* Cello Cucoloris (Cookie): Diffuses light and creates shapes. More subtle effects than the wooden cookie.

====Flag Kits (Lighting Control Kits)====
There are also flag kits available at APS. These come with a cutter, single scrim, double scrim, and silk in a transportable bag.

====Additional Grip Gear====
* Apple Boxes: Used for propping various objects and subjects
* Gloves: Wear when handling hot lighting equipment, or changing bulbs
* Clamps: Used for various reasons, such as to attach gear to C-Stands

[[category:Media Loan Tests]]

APS Bolex Filter Kit Quick Guide

2026-06-17T18:54:33Z

Zornesn:

[[File:Filter-case2.jpg]]
[[File:Filter spread2.jpg]]
===INTRODUCTION===
A filter kit is a useful tool for making real-time adjustments to your film exposure. The guide will cover the contents of the filter kits at APS as well as how and when to use each filter. There are a variety of filters that each have their own effect on the film for achieving things like color correcting, allowing wider apertures (with neutral density [ND] filters), converting daylight balanced film to a tungsten balance and vice versa, or adjusting contrast.
Almost every filter has a specific purpose and can only be used in specific lighting situations.

There are two kinds of Bolex filter kits at APS, those for black and white film and those for color film. Each type is available for use with both bayonet mounts and turret mounts. Keep in mind that bayonet filter holders can only be used with bayonet mount cameras, and likewise for turret mount cameras. The name of each filter is written on the metal filter carriers.

You may also look at the chart at the bottom for an idea of the range of filters made. While we do not stock all of these filters, the chart can be helpful to get a sense of the exposure compensation required and other requirements for each filter.

===CHANGING FILTERS===
Every Bolex comes with an empty removable filter carrier. Whether or not you plan on using filters, this carrier needs to be in the camera while filming to prevent light leaks. For more on basic Bolex operation, read [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Bolex_16mm_Reflex_Operating_Guide#Turret_Mount here].
To use a filter from the kit, remove the empty carrier from the camera. On cameras with turret mounts, the carriers look like those photographed above and simply slide out of the camera. On cameras with bayonet mounts, the filter carriers have a moveable handle that must be raised out of the camera before it can be removed.

===CARE===
The filters themselves are fragile. Since all of the light that your film will capture must first pass through the filter before an image is created on the film, having a clean filter is imperative for having a clean image.

Here are some quick points to help keep them in top shape:
* Do not ever touch the filter with your fingers, otherwise moisture and grease from your skin will transfer onto the filter
* Do no leave the filters in the car or any other place that can trap heat, get too hot, and warp the filters
* If there is debris on the filter, blow it away with a can of compressed air, or gently use a tissue. Don't blow on it.
* When not in use, put the filter back in the case (common sense). Keeping them in the order listed on the case is courteous and will result in bonus points for you.

===EXPOSURE COMPENSATION===
'''Most filters require an adjustment to the lens' aperture to ensure a proper exposure.''' To do this set your exposure with your light meter as you normally would. Refer to the chart below or the list on the filter box and open the aperture the extra number of stops that corresponds to the filter in use. As the Bolex lens apertures move in <sup>1</sup>/<sub>2</sub>-stop increments, it may be necessary to have the aperture sit in between two notches.

The image below represents f-stops in full stop increments. You may get a lens that has different, more, or less f-stop numbers on it. Reference these full f-stops, as well as the exposure compensation chart and your light meter reading, to determine the proper exposure with the various filters.

[[file:F-stops.jpg]]

''Keep in mind that an increase in the f-stop is NOT an increase in the number, but rather an increase in size of the aperture.'' Adding any filter to the Bolex, no matter which one, will always decrease the amount of light coming into the camera (unless the compensation is +0). You will (almost) always need to open your aperture more when using filters.

'''Example:'''
You're using black & white film with a Bolex. You take a light meter reading of your subject and determine that you need an aperture of 4 for proper exposure. You then decide you want to use a Red 25 filter.
As per the B&W filter kit chart below, you would need to increase your f-stop by +3 for proper exposure. This means that, referencing the f-stop image, you would need to set your aperture to 1.4

===BLACK & WHITE KITS===
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! Filter Name !! f-stop Increase !! Use
|-
| Red 25 || +3 || Creates dramatic sky effects. Simulates moonlight in midday by slight under-exposure.
|-
| Yellow 8 || +⅔ || Tonal correction for outdoors. Makes greater contrast in foliage and in clouds against a blue sky.
|-
| Yellow 15 || +1 || Creates dramatic dark skies and marine scenes.
|-
| ND3 || +1 || Blocks light to allow wider aperture.
|-
| ND6 || +2 || Blocks light to allow wider aperture.
|}

===COLOR KITS===
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! Filter Name !! f-stop Increase !! Use
|-
| Sky 1A || 0 || Use anytime outdoors to reduce blues and add warmth.
|-
| 80A || +2 || Converts daylight film for use with 3200°K lamps.
|-
| 85 || +⅔ || Converts tungsten balanced film to daylight balance.
|-
| 85N3 || +1 ⅔ || Filter 85 combined with a .3 neutral density filter.
|-
| 85N6 || +2 ⅔ || Filter 85 combined with a .6 neutral density filter.
|}

===COMPREHENSIVE LIST===
[[File:BW guide.jpg|Black & White]]

[[File:Color guide 1.jpg|Color 1]]

[[File:Color guide 2.jpg|Color 2]]

[[category:Media Loan Tests]]

APS Bolex 16mm Reflex Operating Guide

2026-06-17T18:54:19Z

Zornesn:

[[file:bolexintrogif.gif]]

===Introduction===
'''[http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/images/6/6c/Aps_BolexH16_edit.pdf Bolex H-16 Reflex Camera Operating Guide PDF]''' <br>
[[APS Bolex 16mm Reflex Proficiency Test]]<br>
<br /><br><br>
{{#ev:vimeo|148556463|800|center|H-16 Bolex Reflex Tutorial}}
<br><br>
The Bolex H-16 Rex and H-16 SBM cameras are 16MM reflex cameras. The optical system permits through-the-lens viewing at all times. The self-threading allows easy loading of daylight spools. Camera features include single-frame filming, extended exposure, slow motion, backwind and a 133 ̊-145 ̊ angle variable shutter. Media Loan’s Advanced Production Services (APS) has a variety of Bolex H-16 cameras manufactured between 1960 and 1976. Although all have similar features, the controls vary slightly.

Also available for use with the Bolex cameras are zoom lenses, prime lenses, and an intervalometer as well as other accessories.
Care must be taken when using a Bolex because they are expensive and very difficult to replace.
*DO NOT subject the camera to severe impacts or prolonged vibrations.
*DO NOT subject the camera to extreme heat or cold. Drastic temperature changes can cause condensation to occur inside the camera. Let the camera acclimate to the environment you are shooting in by letting it rest in the case with the case tabs opened but the lid closed for at least an hour.
*DO NOT touch the prism.
*DO NOT use excessive force or over tighten anything on the camera.<br />

'''''You are 100% financially responsible for repair and/or replacement in the event of damage or loss of the Bolex, as well as any other equipment checked out from Media Loan.'''''

===Viewfinder===
The Bolex H-16 viewfinder enables accurate focusing and framing, and allows you to estimate the depth of field.

The reflex prism deflects 20 - 25% of the light passing through the lens into the viewfinder system: only 75 – 80% of the light reaches the film plane. The quality of the light reaching the film is reduced by about 1/2 to 1/3 of an f-stop.

To compensate for the light reduction, Bolex has determined that '''the effective shutter speed for the H-16 camera is 1/80 of a second''' rather than the standard 1/65 of a second. Bolex produced lenses in two different versions up to 50mm in focal length. The first version (Non RX) was made for Non Reflex Bolex cameras but would work perfectly well on any other manufacturers cameras that didn't use a prism in its design. The second version was lenses made purely for use on Bolex Reflex cameras (H16 RX), which are designed to correct some very specific problems caused because there is a prism permanently in the light path always diverting 25% of the light inbound towards the lens to the viewfinder and the remaining 75% to the film. RX lenses aim to remove the two problems the prism causes.
# Light Loss: The RX lens is calibrated to pass 1/3 more light than the aperture markings on the barrel indicates. When using RX lenses with the H-16 camera, the effective shutter speed is back to 1/65 of a second. However when shooting modern negative film the difference is negligible.
# Spherical Aberration: The Bolex prisms causes the outer light rays from a lens to be bent at different angles to the central ones, so they don't converge at the same point, creating blurry images at the film plane. The RX lenses have been designed to counteract this aberration.

APS will provide you with RX lenses (designated after the name on the barrel of the lens), unless you request otherwise or no RX lenses are available. Make sure you know whether or not the lenses you are checking out are RX or non-RX. (Ask an APS employee to show you how to check the lens if necessary.) When using non-RX lenses of 50 mm or less, satisfactory results can be obtained when stopped down to f/8 or smaller.

{| class="wikitable"
|-
! Lens Type !!12fps
!16fps
!18fps
!24fps
!32fps
!48fps
!64fps!! Single-frame
|-
| Rx ||1/33rd of a second
|1/45th of a second
|1/50th of a second
|1/65th of a second
|1/90th of a second
|1/130th of a second
|1/180th of a second|| 1/30th of a second
|-
| Non-Rx ||1/40th of a second
|1/55th of a second
|1/60th of a second
|1/80th of a second
|1/110th of a second
|1/160th of a second
|1/220nd of a second|| 1/40th of a second
|}

==Anatomy==
[[file:bolexdiagram2.jpg|700px|right|thumb|Bolex Parts - Click to englarge]]<br />
# Diopter
# Diopter lock
# Eyecup
# MOT (engage motor)
# Spring lever
# 0 (disengage motor)
# Footage counter
# Winding crank
# Crank latch (behind)
# Douser
# Frame counter & knob
# Backwind
# Timed exposure
# Extended exposure knob
# Instantaneous exposure
# Frame rate selector
# STOP
# M (continuous)
# Release selector
# P (single frame)
# Variable shutter
# Turret
# Turret arm
# Release button
# Electric motor shaft

===Douser===
The douser (located on the reflex viewfinder) closes the eyepiece to keep light from reaching and fogging the film plane through the viewfinder. The douser is open when the lever is in the horizontal position and closed when in the vertical position. '''Close the douser whenever your eye is removed from the eyepiece to prevent film from fogging.'''

===Diopter Adjustment===
The diopter adjustment corrects the optical system to the operator’s eyesight and remains the same for all lenses on the camera. If you wear glasses, you can adjust the diopter to your eyesight and achieve accurate focus without your glasses. Always set the diopter to your eyesight (before filming).

====To set the diopter:====
#Turn the turret to expose the reflex prism (no lens in the taking position) or remove the cover of the bayonet mount.
#Point the camera at a light source.
#Unlock the diopter adjustment either by loosening the grooved ring around the viewfinder or the locking screw depending on the camera model.
#Adjust the viewfinder until the grain of the ground glass is perfectly sharp.
#Lock the diopter finger tight, but '''DO NOT OVER-TIGHTEN.'''

===Turret Mount===
[[file:Bolex front.jpg|340px|left|thumb|Turret Mount Bolex]]
[[file:bolexgif2.gif]]
<br />

You can change from one lens to another easily by turning the turret. To turn the turret, be sure to use the silver fold away lever rather than handling the lenses. Doing so lessens the risk of accidentally changing the aperture and/or focus ring – or damaging the lenses and/or camera.

When using heavier lenses, such as telephoto or zoom lenses, the turret should be locked with a turret plug, marked with a red ring. Turret plugs go into the lowest lens cavity, when turret is in normal position.

For lighter
lenses, the turret lock on the camera should be sufficient for stabilizing the turret. This lock is located above the lens in the taking position and should be tightened before the lenses are in place. Place wide-angle lenses and the telephoto lenses opposite of each other on the turret so that the telephoto lens does not interfere with the field of the wide-angle lens.
To attach a lens, simply unscrew the turret cap and screw on the lens. You can have up to three lenses mounted at once on the turret mount. If using less than three lenses, make sure turret caps are secured in unused positions. ALWAYS keep loose turret caps and lens caps in the case to avoid losing them.

====Turret Mount Filters====
Cameras with a turret mount have a filter between the taking lens position and the reflex prism. The filter remains in place no matter which lens is used. When filming without a filter, an empty filter carrier should be left in the filter slot to prevent light from entering the camera through the slot and fogging the film. Make sure the carrier is located firmly within the slot and the correct filter is in place before shooting. An incorrect filter will either alter the color balance or exposure.

===Bayonet Mount===
[[file:Bolex bayonet front.jpg|400px|right|thumb|Bayonet Mount Bolex]]
The Bolex H-16 SBM camera has a single lens bayonet mount and is recommended for use with heavier lenses. <br />
To mount a lens:
# Turn the outer ring in the direction of the arrow (counter-clockwise if camera is facing you). Press the button on the bottom of the mount to move the screw into the open position where you will se the tabs of the cap.
# Lift the cap out of the mount and immediately place the lens mount in its place. Be careful not to touch the prism!
# Turn the ring clockwise to secure the lens mount in place and screw the lens into place.

To remove a lens and secure the bayonet mount cap:
# Unscrew the lens; replace lens caps and return to lens case.
# Turn outer ring as described above until tabs in lens ring are revealed.
# Remove the lens by pulling it out. DO NOT touch prism with fingers!
# Replace cap and secure by turning lens clockwise.

====Bayonet Mount Filters====
Filter insertion is from the control side of the camera. When not in use, the filter should be left in the storage position with the lever folded down and locked.
To insert a filter:
1. Slide the button down and insert the filter into the filter slot with the notched side down.
2. The first position is where the filter can be stored until needed. Fold the handle down and secure in notch.
To use the filter, it must be inserted all the way in to the filter slot so that it is in between the lens and the prism.
3. From the storage position, unfold the lever. Slide the button down and continue inserting the filter until it’s all the way in.

[[file:bolexfrontgif.gif]]

===Film Speeds===
The camera has film speeds ranging from 12 to 64 frames per second, except for the H-16 Reflex (the earliest model) which also has a setting for 8fps. To select the desired film speed, turn the control knob until the corresponding figure is opposite the red dot. When changing filming speeds, do not forget to alter exposure setting. (When changing from 24 to 48 by one stop and so forth.)

===Release Selector (AKA Side Release)===
The H-16 can be used for normal, continuous or single frame filming. The different operations are controlled by the release selector.
Normal – This method is suitable for most shooting situations. The camera runs as long as the operator depresses the front release button or pushes the release selector towards M.
Continuous – Push the release selector towards M until it clicks into place. The camera will continue running until the wind runs out or the release selector is pushed back to the STOP position.
Single frame – Use a cable release adapter to attach a cable release to the release selector. The adapter should be set so that the cable release pushes the release selector towards the P. Single frame exposures can be set for Instantaneous or Time Release. Turn the knob or lever to I to select Instantaneous. The effective shutter speed is 1/30 of a second. To select Time Release, set the knob’s guide mark or the lever to T. The shutter will stay open for as long as the release selector is set to P.

===Camera Motor===
The H-16 cameras have a spring drive motor. The motor can be disengaged to backwind the film. Most cameras that are available from APS can be used with a motor and therefore used with the Intervalometer for time-lapse animation or with electric motor for sync sound.
To wind the camera:
#Set the disengaging lever to MOT and the release selector to STOP. (If the release selector will not go to STOP, slightly wind the spring.)
#Lift the winding crank, which automatically engages the spindle, and set so that the slot in the handle is secured on the tab.
#Wind the spring counter-clockwise fully without forcing it.
#Fold the crank back and secure it on the latch on the lower body.

Fully wound, the motor will drive about 18 feet of film through the camera (about 28 seconds at 24fps).
Important: Never leave the camera wound during storage. This may ruin the spring. When running down the camera with no film loaded, set the film speed at the lowest setting.

===Variable Shutter===
The H-16 is equipped with a shutter capable of having its aperture varied whether or not the camera is running or stopped. This enables you to reduce exposure time without altering the camera running speed or f-stop. In bright light, the variable shutter can be used to reduce exposure, therefore eliminating the need for a neutral density filter.
The shutter may be locked in each of its five positions by pulling it out and pushing in when at the desired setting. The markings on the variable shutter correspond to the equivalent f-stop change (i.e., filming at the 1/2 mark is equivalent to stopping down by 1/2, at mark 2 equals closing down the lens diaphragm by 2 stops.) '''WHEN THE VARIABLE SHUTTER IS FULLY CLOSED, NO LIGHT ENTERS THE FILM PLANE '''
Warning: You can still see an image through the viewfinder if the variable shutter is closed.''' Some cameras show a triangular warning signal, but not all. Make sure you variable shutter is opened to the correct setting when filming.'''

[[file:shuttergif.gif]]

===Footage Counter===
The footage counter indicates how much film has been exposed. The counter will automatically reset when the lid is removed and will read FEET.
===Frame Counter===
The frame counter is helpful for lap dissolves, double exposures and animation. The frame counter adds frames in forward run and subtracts them in reverse. The upper dial counts single frames, 0 - 50. The lower dial totals in units of 50 frames, 0 - 1000.
===Loading the Camera===
The H-16 has automatic threading and loop forming capabilities making it an easy camera to load. When shooting at 24fps, there is an option for an audible click every second indicating that 8 inches of film has passed through the camera. This can be useful when timing a pan or zoom shot. For an audible click, move the audible signal select lever down when loading film; for no click place the lever in the 0 position.
====Before loading the camera:====
#Set the release selector to STOP.
#Set the disengaging lever to MOT.
#Set the frame rate to the desired camera speed.
#Wind the camera.
Open the camera lid. Visually inspect the film gate to make sure that it is not dirty. '''DO NOT use condensed air to blow dust from the camera.''' Cleaning the gate is a delicate procedure and you can cause irreparable damage if you do not do it correctly. Cameras are inspected and cleaned when they are returned to Media Loan so the camera you check out should be ready for filming. Use care when loading the camera so that you do not inadvertently get hair or debris inside which could ruin your film. Make sure your hands are clean before loading film or otherwise poking about inside the camera.

====Loading the Camera====
When loading the Bolex, make sure to go through the following steps:<br />

#Check that the pressure plate is locked so that it cannot open. The film will jam at this point if the plate is not closed.
#Close the loop formers by moving the control lever down so that it is parallel to the pressure plate.
#Remove the empty daylight spool from its spindle by pressing the ejector. This will be your take-up spool. (The spool can pop out so block it with your hand.)
#Place the loaded daylight spool on the upper spindle. The film should come off in the direction of the engraved arrow. At the film gate, the emulsion should always face towards the front of the camera.
#Using the film end located at the bottom of the camera, clip the film end.
#Insert film end in the top feed sprocket and start the camera motor by depressing the front release button.
#The film is automatically threaded through the gate. If you need to adjust the film, you can spread the sprocket guides by carefully pushing the sprocket guide in from the sprocket wheels.
#Continue to run the film until about 12 inches have run through the drive mechanism.
#Open the loop formers by pressing the button on the lever located on the sprocket/gate assembly.
#Insert the film end into the take-up spool in the direction of the engraved arrow. Place the spool on the lower spindle and take up any slack by hand.
#Run the camera again for several seconds, listening to make sure the film is threaded properly. Check that the film is advancing properly and that the loops do not scrape the body.
#Replace the lid and lock.
#The footage counter will be reset. Run the camera until the counter reads 0. This indicates the film leader has been taken up and the camera is ready to be used.
'''Film can be loaded in light, but subdued light is best.'''

===Lap Dissolve===
Superimposing a fade-in on a fade-out makes a lap dissolve so that one picture gradually disappears as the next gradually appears. (This is also known as a cross-dissolve.) This allows for a smooth transition during which the picture brightness scarcely varies. To produce a lap dissolve:
#Close the first shot in a sequence with a fade out. When beginning to close down the variable shutter, note what frame you are at in the frame counter. Alternatively, time how long it takes you to reach the closed position from the start of the fade and stop filming.
#Lock the variable shutter in the closed position.
#Disengage the motor by setting the selector to 0.
#Set the release selector to M.
#Close the douser if not already closed by moving it into the vertical position.
#Cap the lens.
#Using the backwind key, rewind the film until the frame counter indicates the duration of the fade out.
#Move the release selector to the STOP position.
#Frame the second sequence to be filmed.
#As you begin filming by pressing the release selector to M, begin the fade in by moving the variable shutter smoothly to the open position.
#Lock the variable shutter into the open position.
The Rex-o-fader is an accessory that can help with smooth fades and is available at APS. Ask an APS employee to show you how to attach and use it if you decide to check it out with a Bolex.

==ACCESSORIES==
[[file:bolexaccessories.jpg|400px|right|thumb|Bolex Accessories: cable release & adapter, filter kit, light meter, backwind]]
There are many accessory options for the Bolex. You must include these on your APS workorder for them to be added to your reservation as none of these items automatically come with the camera.

* Lenses: wide, standard, telephoto, and zoom
* Light meter: measure the light in a scene to set the proper exposure.
* Backwind: use this to rewind your film in the Bolex for double exposures, etc
* Cable release & adapter: use to take pictures, such as for timelapse animation on the Bolex.
* Filter kit: changes the contrast of a scene, among other effects. See the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Bolex_Filter_Kit_Quick_Guide filter kit guide] for a full explanation.<br />

[[category:Media Loan Tests]]

APS Arriflex 16SR2 Operating Guide

2026-06-17T18:54:03Z

Zornesn:

<div class="container-fluid">
<div class="row">
<div class="col-md-8">
<div class="lead">
The Arriflex 16SRII at APS is for restricted use only. Proficiencies for this camera are only provided through approved programs and cannot are not available for other students.
</div>

===INTRO===

The Arriflex 16SRII is is a 16mm motion picture camera created by Arri. The “SR” stands for Silent Reflex. This camera is distinguished by its small portable profile, multidirectional viewfinder, crystal controlled motor and quick-change magazine.

The Arriflex available at APS has a modified body and will appear different than cameras of the same model in instruction manuals. A full manual can be found [http://www.towson.edu/emf/docs/arri_sr2_manual.pdf here.]

===IN THE KIT===
Arriflex 16SRII modified camera body<br />
2 covers: Camera body and magazine<br />
Hand grip<br />
Follow focus, Support & Plate<br />
2 Batteries, adapter & charger<br />
8mm lens<br />
10mm-100mm lens<br />
Mutar f=6mm<br />
Mutar 2x<br />
Shoulder pad
<br />
<gallery>
File:Accessories.jpg|Accessories: Follow Focus & Support, Covers, Pad, Hand Grip
File:Battery.jpg|2 Batteries, Charger, Adapter
File:Lenses.jpg|10-100mm, 8mm, Mutar f=6mm, Mutar 2x
</gallery>

===CARE===
DO NOT:<br />
Drop this camera<br />
Point the camera toward the sun<br />
Submerge this camera in water<br />
Leave this camera in excessive heat or cold (such as a car)<br />
Expose it to extreme weather conditions<br />
Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera<br />
Store next to/with corrosive materials<br />
Use excessive physical force

===STORAGE===
When storing this kit, remove the lenses and insert the lens body cap back onto the camera. Remove the magazines, as well as the battery and adapter and store them separately as well. Detach all lens modifiers from the lenses.

Put the '''BODY COVER''' on the camera body. Put the '''MAGAZINE COVER''' on the magazine (attaches over the throat).

===CAMERA BODY PARTS===
[[File:arri3.jpg|500px|thumb|center|Arriflex Body Parts]]
====Viewfinder====
The viewfinder on this camera can be turned and swiveled and has fully automatic image compensation. It can be moved on three planes and it can be used for viewing with the left or right eye. The image will be displayed correctly no matter which position the viewfinder is in.

====Diopter====
The diopter on the Arriflex 16SR2 is adjustable to your viewing preferences. The purpose of the diopter is to focus the viewfinder to your eye. THE DIOPTER MUST BE FOCUSED TO THE INDIVIDUAL USER BEFORE THE LENS IS FOCUSED. If you do not focus the diopter first, your images could be out of focus.

To focus the diopter, unlock it by turning the '''LOCK RING''' and then turn the '''DIOPTER ADJUSTMENT''' until the guides in the viewfinder are in focus.

The dowser, a mechanism inside the viewfinder, needs to be closed when your eye is not on the eyecup to prevent your film from fogging. The dowser on the Arriflex 16SR2 can be set to automatically open/close when your eye is set onto the eyecup. To adjust the functionality of the dowser, you can remove the '''EYECUP''' and turn the ring. The eyecup is magnetized and can be easily be put back into place.

====Mirror Shutter Stop====
Each time the camera is switched off the motor stops the mirror shutter in such a position that the finder remains open for viewing. The opening of the shutter is 180 degrees. The mirror shutter can also be rotated by hand with the hinged knob.

===MODIFIED BODY===
[[file:modbody.jpg|thumb|150px|right|Modified Body]]
====Footage Counter====
There are multiple footage counters on the magazine of this camera. Do not use these. There is an accurate digital '''FOOTAGE COUNTER''' located on the side of the camera body on the '''DIGITAL PANEL'''. A battery must be attached to view/access it. Press the '''RST''' “reset” button after mounting a magazine with new film and before shooting to count your footage. Measurements are displayed in feet.
====FPS====
'''FPS''' (frames per second) is also displayed digitally on the side of the camera, next to the footage counter. You can adjust the FPS with the '''SPEED CONTROL''' located above the '''DIGITAL PANEL'''. Note: the faster the FPS, the quicker the battery is drained. If the battery is too low to keep up with the set FPS, it will compensate by dropping the FPS accordingly. Make sure to read the FPS number on the digital panel to know exactly what the camera is shooting at.

===ACCESSORIES===
====Follow Focus / Support ====
The lightweight support is used to mount the follow focus and is designed for filming from the shoulder. The support is placed in the '''CAMERA SHOE''' (under the lens mount on the front of the camera) and is fastened with the '''KNURLED SCREW''', which is found between the two support rods. The '''FOLLOW FOCUS''' can now be pushed on the rods, positioned as desired, and held secure by the '''TIGHTENING SCREW'''.

====Hand Grip====
The '''HAND GRIP''' provides stabilization to the camera and is equipped with a cable release for easy access to shooting. It is screwed into the '''ROSETTE''' on either side of the camera and is plugged into the '''4-POLE PLUG''' on the right side.

====Mutar====
=====6mm=====
The Carl Zeiss Mutar f=6mm is a wide angle supplementary lens that fits onto the front of the zoom lens (the 10-100mm in the kit). This mutar converts the zoom into a 6mm super wide angle prime – you will not be able to change focal length when using it. To utilize the Mutar 6mm, mount it onto the zoom and set the zoom to MACRO MODE. You can do this by pressing the macro button on the lens (silver knob with a green dot) and turning the focal length ring all the way to the left.

=====2x=====
The Mutar 2x doubles the focal length of a lens. Instead of fitting onto the front of the lens like the Mutar 6mm, the Mutar 2x fits into the lens mount onto the camera body. A lens, either the 8mm or 10-100mm, then gets inserted into the Mutar 2x. It converts the 8mm into a 16mm, and the 10-100mm to a 20-200mm.

===LENS MOUNTING===
[[file:lensmount2.jpg|thumb|150px|right|Lens Mounting]]
Steps:
# Press the '''LENS RELEASE BUTTONS''' on both sides of the lens mount simultaneously to release the body cap.
# Line up the mount notches on the lens with the slots on the catch ring on the body of the camera and set it into place.
# Turn the lens until it locks into place
<br />
'''To dismount:''' Press the release buttons together, turn the lens counter clockwise, and pull the lens out.

<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />

===MAGAZINE LOADING===
There are two magazines with this kit. One is set-up to be used with daylight spools, and the other is for 400’ rolls of film. The daylight spools can be loaded in dim lighting, but the 400’ rolls need to be loaded in a dark room or changing bag.

====Daylight spools vs. Film rolls====
'''Take-up:''' The 400’ roll requires the EXPANDABLE CORE on the take-up side. The daylight spool can be used with the expandable core, but it is recommended that you use an empty take-up spool instead. The magazine for daylight is already set-up for this.
<br />
'''Pressure Roller:''' These are located inside the magazine on both the supply and take up sides. Only use these with a film roll. Do not use with a daylight spool.
<br />
'''Supply:''' On the supply side of the magazine, the film rolls are mounted onto the CORE ADAPTER. The daylight spools are set directly onto the SPOOL MOUNT and latched down.
<br />
As most of the filmmaking needs at TESC are met with daylight spools, the rest of this instructional portion is written with that assumption. The film must be threaded with the emulsion inwards.
<br />

====Loading steps====
[[file:supply2.jpg|thumb|200px|right|Magaine: Supply Side]]
[[file:takeup2.jpg|thumb|200px|right|Magazine: Take-Up Side]]
[[file:throat.jpg|thumb|200px|right|Magazine Throat]]
# Open the '''MAGAZINE LID on the film supply side''' by pressing the '''LID RELEASE BUTTON''', turning the '''HINGED LID KNOB''', and swinging the lid open.
# Flip up the latches on the '''SPOOL MOUNT'''. Load the spool onto the mount with the film pointing in the direction of the arrows (counter-clockwise with the perforation up). Push the latches back down, locking the spool into place. DO NOT ENGAGE THE PRESSURE ROLLER.
# Slide the film into the '''FEED SLOT''' on the magazine (little window on the inside). You can turn the '''MAGAZINE GEAR''' slightly in the direction of the arrow printed on it until a perforation hole is gripped. DO NOT FORCE THE GEAR – this could rip sprockets. Advance the gear until the film is pushed through to the magazine '''THROAT'''.
# Shut the lid on the supply side and turn the hinged knob to lock. The rest of the loading can be done in full light.
# Pull the film out from the throat and measure it to the mark on the bottom of the magazine (white line). This creates the correct loop size. DO NOT LET THE FILM ADVANCE ANY FURTHER – this will cause too much slack.
# Open up the '''MAGAZINE LID on the take-up side'''. Push the film, without changing its length, into the slot in the throat on the take-up side (bottom-right of the throat) until the gear moves in the direction of the arrow. Again, DO NOT FORCE THE GEAR. After it is correctly set in place, you can then use the gear to advance the film into the take-up area.
# Advance the gear and load the film head into the slot on the spool in the direction of the arrow printed on the magazine. After it is secured on the spool, make the film is taut by holding the gear in place with one hand and turning the spool clockwise with the other. This will take up the slack without feeding through more film. DO NOT ENGAGE THE PRESSURE ROLLER on this side either.
# Make sure the take-up spool is secured in place, then shut and lock the lid on the take-up side.
# Set the film in the throat into the '''HOOKS''' of the '''PRESSURE PLATE'''.
# After you have loaded the film in the magazine, mounted the magazine to the camera body, and attached a battery, hold the '''TEST''' button until you hear a slight click. This ensures the film has been correctly set.
<br />
====Unload====
Open the take-up side of the magazine, press the '''SPOOL RELEASE''', and take off the spool. It’s best to unload in subdued light.
<br />
====Extra reminders====
* Do not engage the pressure rollers on the supply or take-up sides of the magazine
* Do not force the magazine gear as this could cause sprockets to rip. If your sprockets rip, cut off the damaged sections of film before proceeding.
* If you do not intend to use the magazine immediately, attach the camera body cover and magazine cover.
* TEST the film when you’re done loaded and the magazine is mounted onto the body.

===MAGAZINE MOUNTING===
[[file:maglock2.jpg|thumb|200px|right]]
=====To mount the magazine=====
# Engage the '''HINGE PIN''' on the magazine into the '''SNAP CATCH''' on the camera body and push the magazine downwards; a click is heard when the magazine sets into position.
# Lock the '''RELEASE CATCH''' by pushing the '''SAFETY LEVER''' to the “LOCK” position.

=====To dismount the magazine=====
# Pull the '''SAFETY LEVER''' from “LOCK” to the “OFFEN/OPEN” position.
# Depress the '''RELEASE CATCH''' and raise the magazine to remove it from the camera’s '''SNAP CATCH'''.

===BATTERY===
A special hinged battery adapter is needed to use the included batteries.

=====Battery Mounting Steps=====
# Mount the magazine.
# Plug the '''BATTERY ADAPTER''' into the '''POWER CONNECTION SOCKET''' on the back of the camera body and tighten the attached screw.
# Fit the adapter into the slot on the bottom of the battery. Push the battery onto the adapter.
# When fitted correctly, tilt the battery back onto the back of the magazine. These pieces are magnetized and should snap into place.

===BASIC STEPS FOR OPERATION===
# Load the film into the magazine
# Mount the magazine onto the camera body
# Mount a lens to the body
# Attach a battery
# Set the diopter
# Attach any extra body modifiers (follow focus, grip handle)
# Push the motor switch to “ON” to engage shooting.


</div>
<div class="col-md-1"></div>
<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">
{{GetHelp}}


</div>

</div>

</div>

__NOTOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

[[category:Media Loan Tests]]

16mm Film Projector Operating Guide

2026-06-17T18:53:44Z

Zornesn:

{{Media Loan Covid Message}}

<div class="container-fluid">

<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">

<div class="lead">

<div class="lead">[[File:Media Loan Logo.png|left|frameless|90x90px]]A Projector for 16mm film reels for moving image projection. </div>
{{#ev:vimeo|113955789|600|center}}
<div class="pull-right"></div>

</div>[[File:Eiki-top.jpg|right|frameless|400x400px|alt=16mm projector]]

==How to Use It==
===Setting Up===
'''please refer to above video for visual set up instructions'''<gallery>
File:Parts_of_the_eiki_projector.jpg|16mm Projector Parts
File:16mm-2.png|16mm Function Lever Panel
</gallery>

'''NOTE -''' at least one lens and one pickup / take-up reel will be needed to run a projection. These will need to be checked out in addition to the projector.

1. Open the latch on the front of the projector to remove the side cover.

2. Raise both <b>Reel Arms</b> until they click.

3. Make sure the <b>Function Lever</b> is in the <b>STOP</b> position, then connect the AC power cord into a standard wall outlet. A small lamp located beneath the lens will light up.

4. Before you thread the film, you can pre-focus and adjust the size of your picture by turning the function lever to the first forward lamp position. Move the projector back from the screen to enlarge the picture and closer to the screen to make the picture smaller.

5. Raise and lower the picture by using the black <b>Elevating Knob</b> on the front of the projector. When the picture is correctly sized and positioned, adjust the <b>Focus</b> knob until the edge of the light is sharp. Turn the <b>Function Lever</b> to stop.

6. Place the film to be shown on the <b>Supply Reel Arm</b>. It should feed off in a clockwise direction; the leader of the film will usually be green.<p>
7. Place a take up reel on the other reel arm making sure its the same size or larger than the supply wheel<p>
8. Lock down both reels by pushing down the small <b>Arm Lock Buttons</b> on the reel arms.

===Threading===
1. Insert the leader of the film into the <b>Film Trimmer.</b>

2. Press down firmly on the raised end to cut the film leader to the proper shape.

3. Push the <b>Self Threading Control</b> into the self-thread position, then turn the <b>Function Lever</b> clockwise to the first forward position.

4. Insert the lead end of the film into the film insert guide where the projector should pull the film in and thread it automatically.

5. When enough film has come off the last roller to attach it to the take up reel, turn the <b>Function Lever</b> off.

6. Gently tug the end of the film against the last roller to restore the self-threading mechanism to its normal operating position.<p>

===Showing Film===
When you've finished loading the film, turn the <b>Function Lever</b> clockwise to the first lamp position (the second lamp position is used only if you need a brighter image). Focus and frame using the controls near the lens as detailed under 'Setting Up.' Turn on the volume and adjust the treble and bass for tone. An external speaker may also be plugged into the front of the projector. If you want to adjust the height of the projector, or size of your projection, you can move it closer or further away from the wall.

===Still Frame and Reverse Projection===
* To still frame the picture, depress the <b>Still Picture Clutch</b> lever. The image will be very dark in still frame. The lever must be fully depressed or film frames may get burned. If the shutter is blocking the picture, turn the <b>Function Lever</b> in either direction until the image is no longer blocked.
* For reverse projection, simply turn the <b>Function Lever</b> counterclockwise to the lamp position.

===Rewinding===
To rewind, wait until the film has run all the way through the projector and attach the loose end to the supply reel.

1. Leaving the <b>Function Lever</b> in <b>STOP</b>, move the <b>Rewind Lever</b> down to the <b>REWIND</b> position. If this lever is pressed down when film is threaded through the projector, the film will tear. (To rewind when the film is threaded, turn the <b>Function Lever</b> to <b>REVERSE</b> as explained under 'Reverse Projection.')

2. After the film is rewound, put the <b>Rewind Lever</b> back up to its normal position to stop the motor.

3. After removing both reels from the arms, push the <b>Arm Lock Buttons</b> and lower the arms.

4. Turn off the volume control switch.

5. Replace the front cover and the plastic cover.

6. The plastic cover should be used to carry the take-up reel and the spare lamps.

=== CHANGING LAMPS ===
The Eiki projector has two lamps: a PROJECTION LAMP and an EXCITER LAMP, which picks up the optical audio track on the film. To change either lamp:
* First disconnect the projector from the power source and pull out on the top edge of the LAMP HOUSING to remove it.
* To change the PROJECTION LAMP, first pull the black HEAT SHIELD away from the projector.
** Then pull the wire release lever located above the lamp toward you. The lamp may pop out, so be prepared to catch it.
** Make sure the replacement lamp snaps into place; proper seating is essential.
* To change the EXCITER LAMP, pull out on the black EXCITER LAMP COVER.
** Push in on release lever the lamp and turn it.
<gallery>
File:Lamp_cover_eiki.jpg|16mm Projector Lamps
</gallery>

=== MANUAL UNTHREADING OF FILM ===
# Unplug projector
# Pull lens out
#Don't push operate/rewind switch
# Push controls in direction of arrows
# Manually thread the film from the supply reel side to the take up reel as pictured below
<gallery>
File:Manually_Threading_Eiki.jpeg|Manual Unthreading of Film
</gallery>

==Troubleshooting==
* '''No Power'''
** Check power cord connection in wall outlet
** Check outlet for power
* '''Motor Runs but No Projection Light'''
** Replace projection lamp
* '''Motor and Lamp Operate, but Film Does Not Run'''
** Raise Still Picture Clutch
* '''No Sound'''
** Turn volume switch on and increase volume
** Check speaker connection if external speaker is being used
** Replace exciter lamp if it does not light
* '''Poor Sound'''
** Check the lower film loop - rethread if necessary
** Film may be defective, use new film if possible
* '''Poor Picture'''
** Check loops, rethread if necessary
** Clean projector lens with lens tissue
** Refocus lens
** Film may be defective
If these simple adjustments do not correct the problem, return the projector to Media Loan.<p>
'''Please note:''' Media Loan is not responsible for film damage. If your projector is not running properly and the above adjustments do not help, remove your film manually and ask someone in Media Loan for help.
See [[Troubleshooting Media Equipment]] Guide for general information.
==Similar Models at Media Loan==

We have modern projectors with HDMI and other connections. See the [https://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Media_Loan_Catalog#Presentation Presentation section of the Media Loan Catalog] for more information


</div>

<div class="col-md-1"></div>

<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">

{{APS Proficiency Information

|Testlink= [[16mm Film Projector Proficiency Test]]

}}



{{Precautions, Help, and Other Wikis for all Media Loan Gear

|Exceptions=
}}





</div>


</div>


</div>



__NOEDITSECTION__

[[category:Media Loan Tests]]

Elinchrom Studio Flash Kit Gear Guide

2026-06-17T18:50:59Z

Zornesn:

{{Media Loan Covid Message}}

<div class="container-fluid">

<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">

<div class="lead">

<div class="lead">[[File:Media Loan Logo.png|left|frameless|90x90px]]A kit with two flashing lights on stands for studio photography. </div>

<div class="pull-right"></div>

</div>

</div></div></div>

<div class="col-md-8"><div class="container-fluid">

<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">
==Overview==
These lights brightly flash in response to taking a picture automatically. The kit works wirelessly or wired, with most cameras, like the digital Canon Rebels and 6D as well as the 35mm Pentax K1000s. The kit comes with 2 lights, 2 stands, remote, sync cable, hot shoe adapter and various light covers.

==How to Use It==

===Set Up===
#Remove black cover from light, apply any attachments you would like (listed below) and turn on.
#Test the flash on the light itself with the top right button (with the star shaped image) of the light.
#Test the remote by pressing the only button on it and check if both lights respond.
#Test if the camera triggers the remote by installing the remote onto the camera's hot shoe mount on top. The “hot” in hot shoe refers to an electrical connection. By pressing the camera’s shutter release button to take a picture, it sends out a trigger to the light kit via the remote.
*If the above tests work but not the camera trigger, then make sure the camera is out of live view mode (the little button with the image of the camera on it) and be sure to do a full-press and not just a half-press on the shutter release (picture taking button).
*If the above test doesn’t work, there is also the option to use a wired connection for triggering the lights instead of the remote. There is an adapter in a small box that attaches to the hot shoe of the camera. Connect the wire in the kit from the 3.5mm sync socket on the light to the adapter. Be sure that the light not connected via the cable has the button with the picture of an eye in the on position. This enables the disconnected light to be triggered when it detects light from the light connected to the camera.

===Changing Bulb===
If you need to change the bulb, make sure it is off, wait for it to cool. Do not touch the bulb with bare hands or the bulb could explode, use the gloves to protect the bulb from your hand oils. When returning equipment, inform Media Loan that a bulb was used. Do not replace the flash tubes, just the standard looking 100watt bulbs stored with kit.

===Pack up===
Be sure to store with black hard cover over the light protecting the bulbs and lock in place with the blue switch.

===Controls===
Screen: Displays light Intensity of flash.
*Arrows: Adjusts contents of screen.
*Bulb Button: This allows you to adjust and toggle the modeling light which is the standard bulb that remains on before and after flashes.
*Eye Button: Enables the light to detect and respond to another light flash going off and triggering its own light flash simultaneously. This is only needed if using the sync cable method and not the remote control for triggering lights.
*Music Button: This enables the light to make an annoying beep sound after triggering the lights to flash as soon as the light is prepared to flash bulbs again.
*Star Button: This is used to make test flashes.

===Attachments===
there are two attachments in the kit to choose from
*The grey reflector is a single item installed after unlocking the blue switch on the side of the light
*The soft box is constructed from the white softbox bad and the contents of a small black bag including 4 black rods and 2 covers, 1 white and the other silver and black.
</div></div></div>

=== Film Cameras ===
This flash kit can also be connected to most film cameras available at Media Loan. Rather than connecting the transmitter to a hot shoe, you can connect the camera to the lights with the 385HV PC Sync Cable included in the kit. There will be a small circular port, likely near the lens on the front of the camera body, that connects to the PC cable. Do not wiggle or twist the cable in this port: insert it straight in and straight out. The other end plugs into a port on the back of the lights. The camera and lights should sync as soon as they are plugged into each other (there are no buttons or settings that need to be adjusted). If the flash does not fire when a picture is taken, the cable was either not fully inserted or may be broken.

==Media Loan Gear it Connects With Well==

See the [[Media Loan Catalog]] for more info about the below items.

* Canon Rebel T6i


</div>

<div class="col-md-1"></div>

<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">

{{GA Proficiency Information

|Testlink= [[Elinchrom Studio Flash Kit Proficiency Test]]

}}



{{Precautions, Help, and Other Wikis for all Media Loan Gear

|Exceptions=

*'''For This Gear Specifically'''

** To avoid potentially lethal conditions, this unit must be connected to a 3-wire grounded outlet.
** Do not operate with two-wire extension cords or use an adapter to connect to ungrounded outlets.
** This unit contains high voltages and internal components, which can store dangerous voltages even when the unit is unplugged. The use of water around this equipment is not recommended.
** The flash-tube and modeling lamp can get extremely hot. Do not allow finger oils to contact the lamps as this can cause excess heating and premature lamp failure.
** Do not attempt to change flash tubes (the normal bulbs are okay to replace) or disassemble the units. Please bring it back to Media Loan for maintenance.
** Before attempting to operate the unit, ensure that it is securely mounted to a light stand.
** Do not allow unattended children around studio flash equipment as potentially dangerous conditions may result. These dangers may include burns and electrical shock hazards as well as the possibility of falling equipment if cords are tripped over.

}}





</div>





__NOEDITSECTION__
[[category:Digital Cameras and Accessories]]

APS Arriflex 16SR2 Operating Guide

2026-06-17T18:46:32Z

Zornesn:

APS VariZoom Solo Jib Operating Guide

2026-06-17T18:43:45Z

Zornesn:

{{Media Loan Covid Message}}

<div class="container-fluid">

<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">

<div class="lead">

<div class="lead">[[File:Media Loan Logo.png|left|frameless|90x90px]]A lightweight telescoping jib used to get cinematic crane shots. </div>

<div class="pull-right"></div>

</div>

==Overview==
The Solo Jib is an ultra-portable, lightweight aluminum jib crane with a 2-stage telescoping arm that provides up to 9.2 ft. of height. Special features include soft-stop pan and tilt brakes so you can fix the position of the jib without danger of tipping over, as well as a telescoping tail for counterweight adjustment.

==Kit Contents==
* Telescoping Jib Arm
* 2 x Counterweights
* Jib Head Hand Knob
* Weight Hand Knob
* Weight Spacer Nut
* Camera Platform Tripod Plate
* Tripod

==How to Use It==
=== Step 1: Setting up the Tripod ===
# This is the first step in using the jib. It is a good idea to use '''sandbags''' to counterweight your tripod to add stability and prevent tipping over. Always make sure that the tripod legs are properly tightened to prevent sliding and toppling of the entire assembly.
# When setting up the tripod, make sure you have an adequate radius of clearance to operate the jib. You should have at least an arm-spam of clearance all the way around the tripod to be safe.
# The two-stage locking legs of the tripod allow for a wide range of height adjustments. To adjust the leg length, simply twist the locking knobs. Make sure each knob is secured completely to prevent leg sections from shifting under the weight of the camera.
# The spreader located at the center of the tripod is not adjustable. Do not remove it.
# Only use the tripod in the VariZoom Solo Jib Kit with the jib.

=== Step 2: Attaching the Jib to the Tripod ===
# Tighten the '''tilt brake''' and '''pan brake''' before attaching the jib to your tripod.
# To attach the mounting stud of jib head adaptor, fit the jib base into the bowl mount, level the jib base, and then tighten the hand knob on the mounting stud. Make sure to tighten this knob thoroughly.

=== Step 3: Setting the Length of the Jib ===
'''The Solo jib has a 2-stage telescoping arm and single-telescoping tail. The longer the arm—the front of the jib—is extended, the more you will have to extend the tail—the back of the jib.'''
# Start by attaching the counterweight to the '''tail''' of the jib. Only use the second spacer nut if you add more than one weight. The jib will start out tail-heavy, but as you extend the jib it will balance out.
# Decide how long you want to extend the jib, then start by expanding the first stage. Loosen the first set of twist locks—the lager set closet to the tripod—and grab the '''camera platform'''—front end with “Solo Jib” printed on it—and pull out the first stage to the desired length. Use the bubble level under the camera plate to even the tube lengths until the camera platform is level. This might require slightly twisting the camera platform side-to-side to get the bubble centered. Then tighten the twist locks.
# If you need the jib to be longer than the full extension of the first stage, extend the second stage. Using the second set of locks, repeat the same process as before, extending the second stage and making sure to level the camera platform and tighten the twist locks.
# If the jib is front heavy, extend the '''tail''' by loosening the twist lock and pulling the tube out slowly until the jib stays level. After extending the tail to the desired length, tighten the twist lock on the tail.

=== Step 4: Setting up a Camera on the Jib ===
'''Only use DSLR or lightweight cameras (4-10 pounds) on the jib arm.'''
# Make sure all the twist locks are tightened before attaching the camera. You will need to support the front of jib (a chair, table, a c-stand, etc.) while attaching the camera.
# Use the threading screw of the tripod plate to secure your camera to the plate.
# Slide the tripod plate with the camera mounted to it into the receiver on the camera platform.
# Tighten the slide plate lock on the camera platform.

=== Helpful Counterweight Information: ===
'''A Canon Rebel or Canon 6D DSLR camera with a lens and battery will weigh around 3 to 4 pounds, depending on the lens. The weight will not be exact and this guide is to help approximate what will be needed to counterweight the camera.'''

==== Fully-Extended Jib: ====
* 3 lbs camera requires 9.25 lbs counterweight with tail extended almost fully
* 4 lbs camera requires 13.75 lbs counterweight with tail extended almost fully

==== Half-Extended Jib: ====
* 3 lbs camera requires 6.75 lbs counterweight with tail extended almost fully
* 4 lbs camera requires 9.25 lbs counterweight with tail extended almost fully

==== Compact Jib (not extended at all): ====
* 3 lbs camera requires 6.75 lbs counterweight with tail not extended OR 3.75 lbs counterweight with tail extended almost fully
* 4 lbs camera requires 9.25 lbs counterweight with tail not extended OR 5.5 lbs counterweight with tail extended almost fully

'''Once the camera is attached and the counterweight is added, fine-tune the balance by sliding the tail section in or out. When the jib is level—parallel to the ground—it should float in place. At full extension, the jib may move when tilted all the way up or down—tighten the tilt brake slightly to hold the position.'''

=== Step 5: Operating the Jib ===
# The jib will only be as steady as the tripod on which it is mounted. Make sure to be on a level surface and use sandbags to secure the tripod.
# Because the Solo Jib is so lightweight, in order to achieve smooth shots, the jib needs to be operated with a light touch. It’s important to start and stop gradually to receive smooth results. This becomes more important the longer the jib is extended.
# If you keep your hands on the jib, you may be able to operate it without the tilt or pan brake tightened. If you take your hands off the jib, you may want to tighten the tilt and/or pan brakes to hold the positions. These are not hard-stop mechanisms, they are soft-stops that can be pushed-through.


</div>

<div class="col-md-1"></div>

<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">

{{APS Proficiency Information

|Testlink= [[APS VariZoom Solo Jib Proficiency]]

}}



{{Precautions, Help, and Other Wikis for all Media Loan Gear

|Exceptions=

*'''For This Gear Specifically'''
** Without proper setup and operation, damage to the equipment and/or injury to the user and people around the equipment could occur.
** Never remove the camera or counterweights without proper support to prevent the jib from swinging up or down.
** Do not extend the telescoping sections of the jib while the camera is mounted. The weight of the camera might cause a section to slide suddenly and pinch your hands or damage the camera.
** Only use the jib with DSLR or lightweight cameras (4-10 pounds).
** Make sure the jib is securely mounted to the tripod and leveled so no slipping or loosening can occur.
** Make sure the tripod is adequately level and stable relative to the ground.
** Tighten all joints thoroughly to prevent unwanted extension/contraction.
** Never swing the jib around in a crowd of people.
** Do not disassemble any pieces of the equipment not mentioned in this operating guide.

}}





</div>


</div>


</div>



__NOEDITSECTION__

[[category:APS Gear Guides]]

APS/AS Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Operating Guide

2026-06-17T18:42:36Z

Zornesn:

{{Media Loan Covid Message}}

<div class="container-fluid">

<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">

<div class="lead">

<div class="lead">[[File:Media Loan Logo.png|left|frameless|90x90px]] A portable audio recorder with 6 channels, 4 are for XLR inputs.</div>

<div class="pull-right"></div>

</div>[[File:Zoom_H6_right_view.jpg|right|400x400px]][[File:Zoom_H6_Accessories.jpg|right|400x400px]]

==Overview==
The Zoom H6n is a versatile and extremely portable 6 track field recorder for use in the field for sound collection, studio recording, and audio for video shoots. The H6n comes with one XY stereo field microphone and one mid-side capsule. Both of these capsules fit on the top slot on the recorder. There are also 4 XLR/Line in ports, each with their own individual volume, pad controls, and phantom power (+12V/ +24V/ +48V). It also features a headphone out jack and a 3.5mm line out jack that can hook up directly to a DSLR camera. Finally, the recorder features a metronome, chromatic tuner, and playback speed/pitch adjustments.
==Kit Contents==
* Recorder
* XY stereo mic attachment
* MS stereo mic attachment
* USB cable
* Power adapter

==How to Use It==
===POWER===
====USING BATTERIES====
The Zoom H6n uses alkaline batteries or nickel metal hydride batteries.
[[File:Replace batteries H6.png]]

'''To place/replace batteries:'''
# Turn the power off and then remove the battery.
# Remove the battery cover.
# Install the batteries.
# Replace the battery cover.
#Select the correct type of battery you are using (Menu >> System >> Battery >> Alkaline or Ni-Mh)

If the battery indicator becomes empty, turn the power off immediately and install new batteries.

====Using an AC adapter====
#Connect a USB cable to the USB jack.
#Plug the adapter into an outlet.

===OPERATIONS===
====SCROLL WHEEL====
Just like in the previous model, the Zoom H6n uses a scroll wheel to navigate through the menus.
To navigate up and down, gently push up and down the scroll wheel.
To validate your option choices (in this article we refer to it as"OK"), PRESS DOWN on the scroll wheel.

[[File:Scroll wheel.gif]]

====ATTACHABLE MICROPHONE OVERVIEW====
The Zoom H6N kit comes with two attachable microphones, one is a stereo XY microphone and the other is a cardioid capsule, each has a L/R output.

=====XY MICROPHONE=====
<gallery>
File:Zoom H6n YX mic.jpg|XY Mic
File:XY mic.png|XY Mic
</gallery>

The XY microphone has two crossing directional microphones which can be set for either 90 degrees or 120 degrees, dependent upon the field you wish to capture. Best for close/medium range recording (chamber music, live concert, interview, field recording, etc).

=====MS MICROPHONE=====
<gallery>
File:Zoom H6n MS mic.jpg|MS Mic
File:MS mic.png|MS Mic
</gallery>

This microphone has a unidirectional mid-range microphone for central recording capture and a bidirectional microphone build in that can be adjusted to change the stereo field. This mic can capture a fairly accurate and crisp stereo field. Best for mono recording (interviews, narrations, and meetings).

====CONNECTING AND DISCONNECTING ATTACHABLE MICROPHONES====

'''CONNECTION'''
# Remove the protective caps from the H6n main unit and the microphone.
# While Pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, connect it to the main unit, inserting the connector completely.

'''DISCONNECTION'''
# While pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, pull it gently out of the main unit.

====CONNECTING EXTERNAL MICROPHONES/ OTHER DEVICES TO inputs 1-4 ====

'''CONNECTING EXTERNAL MICROPHONES'''
Connect dynamic and condenser microphones to the Input 1-4 XLR jacks.
If a Condenser Microphone without dedicated power, set the onboard phantom power to (+12V/+24V/+48V)

'''CONNECTING INSTRUMENTS/OTHER DEVICES'''
Connect keyboards and mixers directly in the input 1-4 TRS jacks.
Direct input of passive guitars and basses is not supported.
Set PAD to -20dB when connecting a mixer or other device with standard output level.

'''STEREO INPUTS'''
By linking tracks 1 and 2 (tracks 3 and 4) as stereo tracks, these can be used as stereo inputs.
In this case, input 1 and 3 become the left channels and 2 and 4 become the right channels.

====CONNECTION EXAMPLES====
The Zoom H6n allows you to record in a variety of configurations.
=====INTERVIEW SET UP=====
'''WHILE FILMING:'''
L/R input mic: Main subject
Shotgun/lapel mics connected to Inputs 1/2: Performer
Mics connected to Inputs 3/4: Ambient sound
[[File:Interview setting H6n.png]]

=====CONCERT SET UP=====
'''CONCERT RECORDING:'''
L/R input mic: Performance on stage
Inputs 1/2: Line outputs from mixer
Mics connected to Inputs 3/4: Audience sound
[[File:Concert setup H6n.png]]

====TURNING DEVICE ON/OFF====
'''TO TURN ON'''
Slide the hold button to the right (Where the power symbol is).

'''TO TURN OFF'''
Slide the hold button the right again (Where the power symbol is).

====SETTING DATE AND TIME====
# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SYSTEM” and press the scroll wheel down.
# Use the scroll wheel, selected “Date/Time”, and press the scroll wheel down.
# Set date and time!
# Press the menu button again to return to the home screen.

====SETTING THE RECORDING FORMAT====
Set the format according to the desired audio quality and file size.

# Press Menu and use scroll wheel to select “REC”, and press OK.
# Use Scroll wheel to select “Rec Format”, and press OK.
# Use Scroll wheel to select the desired format, and press OK.

<gallery>
File:Recording Format 1.png|Recording Format Step 1
File:Recording Format 2.png|Recording Format Step 2
File:Recording Format 3.png| Recording Format Step 3
File:Recording Format.png| Recording Format Quality Chart
</gallery>

'''NOTES:'''
* Use the WAV format for recording high-quality audio.
* The MP3 format reduces file size through compression, which also reduces the audio quality. Use this format if you need to conserve space on the SD card to store many recordings, for example.
* When recording in MP3 format, a single stereo MP3 file will be created regardless of the number of tracks selected. You can use the monitoring mixer to adjust the balance of all the tracks in the stereo mix.

====DISPLAY OVERVIEW====
=====HOME RECORDING SCREEN=====
[[File:Home recording screen.png]]
=====PLAYBACK SCREEN=====
[[File:Playback screen.png]]

====LOADING AN SD CARD====
# Turn the power off and then open the SD card slot cover.
# Insert card into the slot.
# To eject an SD card: Push the card further into the slot and then pull it out.

====FORMATTING AN SD CARD====
# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press down on the wheel.
# Using the wheel to select “SD CARD Remain” and press the scroll wheel button to see the amount of remaining open space on a card.
# To being the formatting process, press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press the scroll button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Format” and press the scroll wheel button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Yes” and press down on the scroll wheel to format the SD card.

====RECORDING====
=====AUTOMATIC=====
# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press the scroll button down.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Auto Rec” and press the button down.
# Use the scroll wheel to select on/off and press the button.
# Select “On” and press the button down.
# Return to the Home Screen, and press the record button and put the recorder in standby.
# Press the record button again to exit standby and stop recording.

=====PRE-RECORD=====
# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll to select “REC” and press Ok.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Pre-Rec” and press the scroll button down.
# Select “On” and press Ok.

=====BACK UP RECORDING=====
When using the L/R input, in addition to the recording at the set input level, the recorder can also record a separate file at a level 12dB below. This backup can be used if the recording level was set too high, causing distortion, for example.

<gallery>
File:BackUpRecording1.png|BackUp Recording Step 1
File:BackUpRecording2.png|BackUp Recording Step 2
File:BackUpRecording3.png|BackUp Recording Step 3
</gallery>

# Press the menu button
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press Ok.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Backup Rec” and press Ok.
# Select “On” and press Ok.

HINT: If the name of the original file is, for example, “ZOOM0001_LR.wav”, the name of the backup file will be “ZOOM0001_BU.wav”.

=====OVERDUBBING=====
This recording option will only work with external microphones.
The X/Y and DS mic capsules will not work with the overdubbing mode.

# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok.
# Use the scroll to select “Overdub” and press Ok.
# Press the track button until the indicator lights red for the track to be overdubbed.
# Turn the volume knob to make adjustments.
# To monitor already recorded tracks, press their track buttons so their indicators light green.
# Press the record button to begin recording.
# Press the record button to stop recording.
# Press the menu button to stop overdubbing. When you play back or edit an overdubbed project, the last selected take will be used.

====PLAYBACK====
=====NORMAL PLAYBACK=====
# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT LIST”, and press Ok.
# Use the scroll wheel to select desired folder and press Ok.
# Use the scroll wheel to select the desired project and press Ok. Playback will begin.

=====CHANGING THE PLAYBACK SPEED=====
# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok.
# Select “Playback Speed” and press Ok,
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust playback speed, press Ok.

===FILE MANAGEMENT===
====DELETE PROJECT====
# To delete one project, press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU”, Press Ok.
# Select “Trash” and press Ok.
# Select “Delete” and press Ok.
# Select “Yes” and press Ok.
# To delete all projects in a folder, select “Delete All Projects” instead, and press Ok.
# Note: Deletion of a project cannot be reversed!

====FILE TRANSFERS====
# Press menu.
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok.
# Select “SD Card Reader” and press Ok.
# Connect the H6N to the computer using a USB cable.
# Make sure to safely disconnect the H6N from the computer when finished to avoid damage to the files and the recorder!

===USING THE H6n RECORDER AS AN AUDIO INTERFACE===
# Press the menu button.
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok.
# Select “Audio Interface” and press Ok.
# Select either “Stereo Mix” or “Multi Track” and press Ok.
# Select either: “PC/Mac”, “PC/MAC using battery power” or “iPad using battery power”, and press Ok.
# Connect the H6N to the computer or iPad using a USB cable.
# Press the menu to disconnect.
# Select “EXIT” and press Ok.
# Select “Yes” and press Ok.
# Disconnect the cable from the computer or iPad and the H6, and press the menu button.

===H6n CHROMATIC TUNER===
# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL”, press Ok.
# Select “Tuner” and press Ok.
# Select preferred tuning type and press Ok.
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust standard pitch.
# For all tuner types besides chromatic, use the forward and rewind button to change pitch (For drop tuning)
# Press a track button to select input to use.
# Use the tuner according to the type.
# Chromatic: shows pitch inaccuracies and note that the device is detecting.
# Guitar/Bass Tuning: The number of strings being tuned is automatically detected, allowing for tuning one at a time.

===USING THE METRONOME===
# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL” and press Ok.
# Select “Metronome” and press Ok.
# Use the scroll wheel to select a menu item, and press Ok.
# Select “Click”, use the scroll wheel to set when the metronome is active, and press Ok.
# Select “Precount”.
# Select “Tempo”. Use the scroll wheel to select the speed, and press the menu button.
# Select “Sound”. Use the scroll wheel to set the sound and press Ok.
# Select “Pattern” use the scroll wheel to select desired musical pattern.
# Select “Level” and set to desired volume, press Ok.

===LINKING INPUTS===
You can link inputs so that they become one stereo track. Do this by holding down one input button and then press another. You will see on the screen that they have become linked and both lights will illuminate simultaneously.<br />

Example: To link inputs 1 and 2, hold down the input 1 button and then press 2.<br />

Use the same method to unlink inputs.

==Media Loan Gear it Connects With Well==

See the [[Media Loan Catalog]] for more info about the below items.

* Any Microphone
* XLR Cable


</div>

<div class="col-md-1"></div>

<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">

{{APS Proficiency Information

|Testlink= [https://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Proficiency_Test APS Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Proficiency Test]

}}



{{Precautions, Help, and Other Wikis for all Media Loan Gear

|Exceptions=

*'''For This Gear Specifically'''
**Don't listen at loud volumes for long periods of time.

}}





</div>


</div>


</div>



__NOEDITSECTION__

[[category:APS Gear Guides]]

APS/AS Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Operating Guide

2026-06-17T18:39:53Z

Zornesn:

{{Media Loan Covid Message}}

<div class="container-fluid">

<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">

<div class="lead">

<div class="lead">[[File:Media Loan Logo.png|left|frameless|90x90px]] A portable audio recorder with 6 channels, 4 are for XLR inputs.</div>

<div class="pull-right"></div>

</div>[[File:Zoom_H6_right_view.jpg|right|400x400px]][[File:Zoom_H6_Accessories.jpg|right|400x400px]]

==Overview==
The Zoom H6n is a versatile and extremely portable 6 track field recorder for use in the field for sound collection, studio recording, and audio for video shoots. The H6n comes with one XY stereo field microphone and one mid-side capsule. Both of these capsules fit on the top slot on the recorder. There are also 4 XLR/Line in ports, each with their own individual volume, pad controls, and phantom power (+12V/ +24V/ +48V). It also features a headphone out jack and a 3.5mm line out jack that can hook up directly to a DSLR camera. Finally, the recorder features a metronome, chromatic tuner, and playback speed/pitch adjustments.
==Kit Contents==
* Recorder
* XY stereo mic attachment
* MS stereo mic attachment
* USB cable
* Power adapter

==How to Use It==
===POWER===
====USING BATTERIES====
The Zoom H6n uses alkaline batteries or nickel metal hydride batteries.
[[File:Replace batteries H6.png]]

'''To place/replace batteries:'''
# Turn the power off and then remove the battery.
# Remove the battery cover.
# Install the batteries.
# Replace the battery cover.
#Select the correct type of battery you are using (Menu >> System >> Battery >> Alkaline or Ni-Mh)

If the battery indicator becomes empty, turn the power off immediately and install new batteries.

====Using an AC adapter====
#Connect a USB cable to the USB jack.
#Plug the adapter into an outlet.

===OPERATIONS===
====SCROLL WHEEL====
Just like in the previous model, the Zoom H6n uses a scroll wheel to navigate through the menus.
To navigate up and down, gently push up and down the scroll wheel.
To validate your option choices (in this article we refer to it as"OK"), PRESS DOWN on the scroll wheel.

[[File:Scroll wheel.gif]]

====ATTACHABLE MICROPHONE OVERVIEW====
The Zoom H6N kit comes with two attachable microphones, one is a stereo XY microphone and the other is a cardioid capsule, each has a L/R output.

=====XY MICROPHONE=====
<gallery>
File:Zoom H6n YX mic.jpg|XY Mic
File:XY mic.png|XY Mic
</gallery>

The XY microphone has two crossing directional microphones which can be set for either 90 degrees or 120 degrees, dependent upon the field you wish to capture. Best for close/medium range recording (chamber music, live concert, interview, field recording, etc).

=====MS MICROPHONE=====
<gallery>
File:Zoom H6n MS mic.jpg|MS Mic
File:MS mic.png|MS Mic
</gallery>

This microphone has a unidirectional mid-range microphone for central recording capture and a bidirectional microphone build in that can be adjusted to change the stereo field. This mic can capture a fairly accurate and crisp stereo field. Best for mono recording (interviews, narrations, and meetings).

====CONNECTING AND DISCONNECTING ATTACHABLE MICROPHONES====

'''CONNECTION'''
# Remove the protective caps from the H6n main unit and the microphone.
# While Pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, connect it to the main unit, inserting the connector completely.

'''DISCONNECTION'''
# While pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, pull it gently out of the main unit.

====CONNECTING EXTERNAL MICROPHONES/ OTHER DEVICES TO inputs 1-4 ====

'''CONNECTING EXTERNAL MICROPHONES'''
Connect dynamic and condenser microphones to the Input 1-4 XLR jacks.
If a Condenser Microphone without dedicated power, set the onboard phantom power to (+12V/+24V/+48V)

'''CONNECTING INSTRUMENTS/OTHER DEVICES'''
Connect keyboards and mixers directly in the input 1-4 TRS jacks.
Direct input of passive guitars and basses is not supported.
Set PAD to -20dB when connecting a mixer or other device with standard output level.

'''STEREO INPUTS'''
By linking tracks 1 and 2 (tracks 3 and 4) as stereo tracks, these can be used as stereo inputs.
In this case, input 1 and 3 become the left channels and 2 and 4 become the right channels.

====CONNECTION EXAMPLES====
The Zoom H6n allows you to record in a variety of configurations.
=====INTERVIEW SET UP=====
'''WHILE FILMING:'''
L/R input mic: Main subject
Shotgun/lapel mics connected to Inputs 1/2: Performer
Mics connected to Inputs 3/4: Ambient sound
[[File:Interview setting H6n.png]]

=====CONCERT SET UP=====
'''CONCERT RECORDING:'''
L/R input mic: Performance on stage
Inputs 1/2: Line outputs from mixer
Mics connected to Inputs 3/4: Audience sound
[[File:Concert setup H6n.png]]

====TURNING DEVICE ON/OFF====
'''TO TURN ON'''
Slide the hold button to the right (Where the power symbol is).

'''TO TURN OFF'''
Slide the hold button the right again (Where the power symbol is).

====SETTING DATE AND TIME====
# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SYSTEM” and press the scroll wheel down.
# Use the scroll wheel, selected “Date/Time”, and press the scroll wheel down.
# Set date and time!
# Press the menu button again to return to the home screen.

====SETTING THE RECORDING FORMAT====
Set the format according to the desired audio quality and file size.

# Press Menu and use scroll wheel to select “REC”, and press OK.
# Use Scroll wheel to select “Rec Format”, and press OK.
# Use Scroll wheel to select the desired format, and press OK.

<gallery>
File:Recording Format 1.png|Recording Format Step 1
File:Recording Format 2.png|Recording Format Step 2
File:Recording Format 3.png| Recording Format Step 3
File:Recording Format.png| Recording Format Quality Chart
</gallery>

'''NOTES:'''
* Use the WAV format for recording high-quality audio.
* The MP3 format reduces file size through compression, which also reduces the audio quality. Use this format if you need to conserve space on the SD card to store many recordings, for example.
* When recording in MP3 format, a single stereo MP3 file will be created regardless of the number of tracks selected. You can use the monitoring mixer to adjust the balance of all the tracks in the stereo mix.

====DISPLAY OVERVIEW====
=====HOME RECORDING SCREEN=====
[[File:Home recording screen.png]]
=====PLAYBACK SCREEN=====
[[File:Playback screen.png]]

====LOADING AN SD CARD====
# Turn the power off and then open the SD card slot cover.
# Insert card into the slot.
# To eject an SD card: Push the card further into the slot and then pull it out.

====FORMATTING AN SD CARD====
# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press down on the wheel.
# Using the wheel to select “SD CARD Remain” and press the scroll wheel button to see the amount of remaining open space on a card.
# To being the formatting process, press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press the scroll button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Format” and press the scroll wheel button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Yes” and press down on the scroll wheel to format the SD card.

====RECORDING====
When recording with the Zoom H6n Audio Recorder, the following file structure/folders and files are created on the SD card:
[[File:Screen Shot 2016-11-21 at 3.11.48 PM.png]]

=====AUTOMATIC=====
# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press the scroll button down.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Auto Rec” and press the button down.
# Use the scroll wheel to select on/off and press the button.
# Select “On” and press the button down.
# Return to the Home Screen, and press the record button and put the recorder in standby.
# Press the record button again to exit standby and stop recording.

=====PRE-RECORD=====
# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll to select “REC” and press Ok.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Pre-Rec” and press the scroll button down.
# Select “On” and press Ok.

=====BACK UP RECORDING=====
When using the L/R input, in addition to the recording at the set input level, the recorder can also record a separate file at a level 12dB below. This backup can be used if the recording level was set too high, causing distortion, for example.

<gallery>
File:BackUpRecording1.png|BackUp Recording Step 1
File:BackUpRecording2.png|BackUp Recording Step 2
File:BackUpRecording3.png|BackUp Recording Step 3
</gallery>

# Press the menu button
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press Ok.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Backup Rec” and press Ok.
# Select “On” and press Ok.

HINT: If the name of the original file is, for example, “ZOOM0001_LR.wav”, the name of the backup file will be “ZOOM0001_BU.wav”.

=====OVERDUBBING=====
This recording option will only work with external microphones.
The X/Y and DS mic capsules will not work with the overdubbing mode.

# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok.
# Use the scroll to select “Overdub” and press Ok.
# Press the track button until the indicator lights red for the track to be overdubbed.
# Turn the volume knob to make adjustments.
# To monitor already recorded tracks, press their track buttons so their indicators light green.
# Press the record button to begin recording.
# Press the record button to stop recording.
# Press the menu button to stop overdubbing. When you play back or edit an overdubbed project, the last selected take will be used.

====PLAYBACK====
=====NORMAL PLAYBACK=====
# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT LIST”, and press Ok.
# Use the scroll wheel to select desired folder and press Ok.
# Use the scroll wheel to select the desired project and press Ok. Playback will begin.

=====CHANGING THE PLAYBACK SPEED=====
# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok.
# Select “Playback Speed” and press Ok,
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust playback speed, press Ok.

===FILE MANAGEMENT===
====DELETE PROJECT====
# To delete one project, press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU”, Press Ok.
# Select “Trash” and press Ok.
# Select “Delete” and press Ok.
# Select “Yes” and press Ok.
# To delete all projects in a folder, select “Delete All Projects” instead, and press Ok.
# Note: Deletion of a project cannot be reversed!

====FILE TRANSFERS====
# Press menu.
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok.
# Select “SD Card Reader” and press Ok.
# Connect the H6N to the computer using a USB cable.
# Make sure to safely disconnect the H6N from the computer when finished to avoid damage to the files and the recorder!

===USING THE H6n RECORDER AS AN AUDIO INTERFACE===
# Press the menu button.
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok.
# Select “Audio Interface” and press Ok.
# Select either “Stereo Mix” or “Multi Track” and press Ok.
# Select either: “PC/Mac”, “PC/MAC using battery power” or “iPad using battery power”, and press Ok.
# Connect the H6N to the computer or iPad using a USB cable.
# Press the menu to disconnect.
# Select “EXIT” and press Ok.
# Select “Yes” and press Ok.
# Disconnect the cable from the computer or iPad and the H6, and press the menu button.

===H6n CHROMATIC TUNER===
# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL”, press Ok.
# Select “Tuner” and press Ok.
# Select preferred tuning type and press Ok.
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust standard pitch.
# For all tuner types besides chromatic, use the forward and rewind button to change pitch (For drop tuning)
# Press a track button to select input to use.
# Use the tuner according to the type.
# Chromatic: shows pitch inaccuracies and note that the device is detecting.
# Guitar/Bass Tuning: The number of strings being tuned is automatically detected, allowing for tuning one at a time.

===USING THE METRONOME===
# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL” and press Ok.
# Select “Metronome” and press Ok.
# Use the scroll wheel to select a menu item, and press Ok.
# Select “Click”, use the scroll wheel to set when the metronome is active, and press Ok.
# Select “Precount”.
# Select “Tempo”. Use the scroll wheel to select the speed, and press the menu button.
# Select “Sound”. Use the scroll wheel to set the sound and press Ok.
# Select “Pattern” use the scroll wheel to select desired musical pattern.
# Select “Level” and set to desired volume, press Ok.

===LINKING INPUTS===
You can link inputs so that they become one stereo track. Do this by holding down one input button and then press another. You will see on the screen that they have become linked and both lights will illuminate simultaneously.<br />

Example: To link inputs 1 and 2, hold down the input 1 button and then press 2.<br />

Use the same method to unlink inputs.

==Media Loan Gear it Connects With Well==

See the [[Media Loan Catalog]] for more info about the below items.

* Any Microphone
* XLR Cable


</div>

<div class="col-md-1"></div>

<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">

{{APS Proficiency Information

|Testlink= [https://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Proficiency_Test APS Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Proficiency Test]

}}



{{Precautions, Help, and Other Wikis for all Media Loan Gear

|Exceptions=

*'''For This Gear Specifically'''
**Don't listen at loud volumes for long periods of time.

}}





</div>


</div>


</div>



__NOEDITSECTION__

[[category:APS Gear Guides]]

Canon 6D Gear Guide

2026-06-17T18:37:26Z

Zornesn:

{{Media Loan Covid Message}}

<div class="container-fluid">

<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">

<div class="lead">

<div class="lead">[[File:Media Loan Logo.png|left|frameless|90x90px]]A high quality camera that can take high resolution photos. </div>
{{#ev:vimeo|159256566|800|center}}
<div class="pull-right"></div>

</div>

==Overview==

This is a basic guide for the Canon 6D which any student can use because it is Media Loans "General Access". You first need to be proficient with the Canon Rebel camera and take the proficiency for this item follow the link in the righthand sidebar. The 6d is a Full-Frame Camera and capable of taking very high quality digital photos and video.
[[File:6d_1.jpg|600x600px|center]]
==Kit Contents==
[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]
*1x camera body
*1x 1:4 24-105mm lens
* 1x remote kit
* 1x battery grip
* 1x battery charger
* 1x class 10 memory card
* 3x batteries

==How to Use It==

===Quick Exposure Settings Guide===

There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the 6D. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder, the bottom of the LCD screen in live view mode, and on the top right panel display. '''In the APS 6D kit, aperture can only be adjusted with a ring on the manual lenses.'''
# Q Menu: The most familiar way to adjust these is through the Quick selection button, Q. This can only be activated in photo mode when live view is off. Once activated, you can scroll through and adjust each setting accordingly.
# Exterior buttons: In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. The circular quick control dial changes the aperture and the top main dial changes the shutter speed. To adjust the ISO, turn the top dial while holding down the top ISO button.

===Lenses===

EF-S Mount lenses ''cannot'' be used with the 6D. The back of EF-S lenses extends too far back into the camera body and could damage the mirror or sensor. ONLY USE EF LENSES WITH THE 6D. All of the EF-S lenses at Media Loan are noted as such on their case, as well as on the lens itself. If you want to use any lenses other than the lens(es) that come with the kit, you need to check with the Media Loan staff.

===FRONT CONTROLS===
====Depth-of-Field Preview button====
[[File:depth_preview.png]]

<p align "right">This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)</p>

====Lens Release Button====
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.

===TOP CONTROLS===

[[file:6d_2.jpg|400px|left|thumb|Canon 6D Top Controls]]
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.
====Exposure Mode (Top left knob)====
Use this knob to set the exposure mode. Use M for full manual mode. The other settings will have some automatic features, depending on the mode you select.
====Top Main Dial====
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.

====AF Mode====
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.

You select between autofocus and manual focus with the switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.

====Drive====
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press the DRIVE button and move the top dial to change the drive mode. The settings are:<br />

[[file:6d_drive.png]]

====ISO (sensitivity to light)====
ISO sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. The higher the ISO, the more noise there will be in your image. Try to keep the ISO as low as possible. To adjust ISO, press ISO and turn the top dial.

====Metering====
Use the following chart to determine which metering mode you should use. Change the metering mode by pressing the meter button above the top LCD panel. <br />

[[file:6d_meter.png]]

====LCD Dial Light====
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.

===REAR CONTROLS===
[[File:6d_3.jpg|400px|left|thumb|Canon 6D Rear View]]

====MENU Button====
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings (see notes below).
====INFO Button====
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. Pressing INFO multiple times will display an electronic level.

====Diopter Control====
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.
====Photo/Video Lever====
To switch between movie and photo mode, turn the lever to the proper selection. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots.

====Start/Stop (Live View)====
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever to your desired mode. Then press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power. This button is also used to start/stop video recording.

====AF-ON Button====
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.
====Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button====
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.
====AF-Area Mode Button====
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.
====Magnification Button====
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.
====Play Button====
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.
====The Quick Control [Q] Button====
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.
====Master Controls====
The master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. These include: the set button, the multi-controller, and quick control dial. The '''SET''' button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring, called the '''multi-controller'''. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big '''quick control dial'''. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The '''LOCK''' switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.

====Delete Button====
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.

===MENU SETTINGS===
Access the MENU to change various camera system settings, such as video/photo resolution and formats. The MENU is organized into various tabs. You can access the video settings in the MENU when the camera is set to video mode, and the photography settings when the camera is set to photo mode. <br />

'''Notes on settings:'''
====Movie Rec. Size====
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. <br />

'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use.

====Format card====
Format the memory card before returning your camera to Media Loan. This not only clears it for the next user, but it also ensures protection of your work. Make sure to transfer the files off of the card before you format. Select “low level format” to completely clear the information (without low level format, your data will be retrievable by certain computer programs).

====Video system====
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.

==== Custom White Balance ====
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure under the actual light source to be used.

'''Photograph a white object.'''
* The plain, white object should fill the spot metering circle.
* Focus manually and set the standard exposure for the white object.
* You can have have any white balance set for initial photograph--AWB, daylight, etc.
<br />
'''Select Custom White Balance in the menus.'''
* Under the second camera sub menu, select Custom White Balance, then press set.
* The photo you took should appear and then select OK and this white balance data will be imported.
* When the menu reappears, press the MENU button to exit the menu.
<br />
'''Make sure you are on the custom white balance setting.'''
* Press the WB button or the Quick Menu and select custom white balance and press set.
<br />
[[File:Media Loan Custom White Balance.png|none|thumb|100x100px]]

===REMOTE===
The General Access kit comes with a remote, and there is multiple ways to use it. With this remote, 6D does not need to be in "remote" drive mode.

Steps for usage:
# Set the remote and receiver to the same channel. On each, remove the battery cover and flip the switch up to a matching channel (typically ch. 1). '''These must match'''.
# Plug the receiver into the corresponding input on the left side of the camera body.
# Power on the receiver and the camera.
# The shooting mode can be selected with the remote as well as the camera. The most direct way to use the remote is to set the camera to single shooting drive mode, and then use the remote to select your actual desired mode (single, continuous, BULB, and timer). The BULB function can be used two ways: two take quick, continuous shots (set the remote to bulb and the drive mode on the camera to continuous) and to take long exposures (set the remote to bulb and the exposure mode on the camera to BULB). In both uses, press the remote button one to start shooting and again to stop.
# If set to AF, hold the main button on the remote down halfway to focus. Press down all the way to take a picture in single shooting and timer modes. In burst mode, keep the button pressed to take multiple shots. In BULB, press the button once to open the shutter and a second time to close it.
# After a picture is take, you can hold the remote button halfway down again for a quick preview.

==Troubleshooting==

See [[Troubleshooting Media Equipment]] Guide for general information.

==Media Loan Gear it Connects With Well==

See the [[Media Loan Catalog]] for more info about the below items.

* EF Lenses, not EFS
* Tripods and other stabilizers
* Flashes



</div>

<div class="col-md-1"></div>

<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">

{{APS Proficiency Information

|Testlink= [https://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test GA Canon 6D proficiency test]

}}


{{Precautions, Help, and Other Wikis for all Media Loan Gear

|Exceptions=

*'''For This Gear Specifically'''
**Don't mount an EF-S Lens onto the body, use EF instead
**Don't Point camera toward Sun
**Don't leave this camera near a strong magnetic field
**Don't use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera
**Keep the Camera with the case, we have a limited amount of 6D and although it looks hardy, it is delicate.
}}





</div>


</div>


</div>



__NOEDITSECTION__
[[category:APS Gear Guides]]

DolphinEar/PRO Hydrophone Gear Guide

2026-06-17T18:35:00Z

Zornesn:

Zoom H4n Audio Recorder Gear Guide

2026-06-17T18:31:05Z

Zornesn:

Olympus LS-100 Audio Recorder Gear Guide

2026-06-17T18:27:58Z

Zornesn:

GoPro Hero 4 Gear Guide

2026-06-17T18:22:46Z

Zornesn:

{{Media Loan Covid Message}}

<div class="container-fluid">

<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">

<div class="lead">

<div class="lead">[[File:Media Loan Logo.png|left|frameless|90x90px]]A versatile camera for action and underwater video production. </div>

<div class="pull-right"></div>

</div>
[[file:IMG 0110.jpg|thumb|300x300px|GoPro Hero4]]
[[file:IMG 0114.jpg|thumb|300x300px|Housing & Monopod]]
==Overview==
The GoPro HERO4 can shoot video, photo, and timelapse footage. It is a small video camera that delivers super slow motion at 240 frames per second, high-resolution 4K30 and 2.7K60 video combines with 1080p120 and 720p240 slow motion to enable stunning, immersive footage. Waterproof to 131 feet (40 meter) with 12MP photos at 30 frames per second and improved audio.
[http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/images/e/ef/GoPro_manual.pdf Complete Manual GoPro HERO4]
==Kit Contents==
* GoPro HERO4 Camera
* Durable plastic housing
* Monopod
* Head-mount & locking bolt
* One Micro USB 32GB memory card
* 2 Batteries
* Mini USB cable & wall charger

==How to Use It==
===NAVIGATION & OPERATION===
There are multiple ways to operate this camera. You can access the menus and functions by using the exterior buttons, as illustrated in the diagram. You can also navigate through the camera using the touch display, as described below the "parts" list.

[[file:GoPro parts.png|thumb|800px|center|GoPro Hero4 Parts]]

Exterior Parts:
# Camera Status Light (Red)
# Shutter/Select Button: use to record video, take pictures, and make selections in the menus
# Wireless Status Light (blue)
# Camera Status Screen
# Power/Mode Button: use to power the camera on/off, as well as cycle through the various camera modes
# Micro HDMI Port (cable not included)
# MicroSD Card slot (never remove included card)
# Mini-USB port (supports composite A/V cable & 3.5mm stereo mic adapter, not included)
# Audio Alert
# Microphone
# HERO Port
# Touch Display: use to navigate the functions/settings of the camera
# Touch Display Sleep/Wake Button
# Settings/Tag Button: use to change the settings of the selected camera mode
# Battery Door
<br />

====POWER ON/OFF====
'''On:''' Press the '''Power/Mode button''', located on the front of the camera. The status light will flash three times. When the camera status displays information, the camera is on.<br />
'''Off:''' Press and hold '''Power/Mode''' button for a few seconds, until the red light flashes mulitple times.

====TOUCH DISPLAY OPERATION====
Located on the back of the camera, the touch display lets you control the cameras settings and playback your photos/videos. It also functions as a viewfinder.<br />
* ''Swipe left'' to switch camera '''Modes'''
* ''Swipe right'' to display the last captured video or photo
* ''Swipe up'' from the bottom to access '''Mode Settings'''
* ''Swipe down'' from top to close menus
* ''Swipe up/down'' to navigate the menus
* ''Tap'' to make a selection
* ''Double tap'' to change the field of vision (FOV) in '''Preview Mode'''
* Press on display for two seconds to lock the touch display. This is useful if you are capturing handheld footage.

===MODES===
The GoPro has multiple modes, listed below. Each mode is explained in the following corresponding sections.<br />

'''To access the various modes''': either ''swipe left'' on the '''touch display screen''' and ''tap'' to select your desired mode, OR cycle through the modes by pressing the '''Power/Mode''' button. The modes are listed below, as well as their location within the mode menu screen.

* Video (top right)
* Photo (top center)
* Multi-shot (top left)
* Playback (bottom left)
* Set up (bottom right)
<br />

'''Adjust mode settings:''' each mode has specific mode settings that you can adjust. To do so, either ''swipe up'' on the display or press the '''Settings''' button.<br />

'''Note:''' as you change the capture settings in video, photo, and multi-shot, a different icon will appear in the mode menu. The image below shows the various icons that represent these modes depending on the selected capture setting.

[[file:Go pro mode menu.png|thumb|500px|center|Video, Photo, and Multi-Shot Mode Icons]]

====VIDEO MODE====
To capture video in '''Video Mode''', simply press the '''Shutter/Select''' button to start and stop recording. <br />

=====VIDEO SETTINGS=====
To adjust the settings for video mode, either ''swipe up'' when in video mode OR press the '''Settings Button.''' Listed below are all the settings you can control in this menu.
* '''Mode:''' refers to video capturing modes, as explained in the section below.
* '''Resolution:''' change the video resolution, as explained below.
* '''Frames per second:''' choose between 24-60 FPS (24fps is the cinematic standard, 60fps is for slow-motion).
* '''Field of View (FOV):''' select the FOV. Choices depend on video resolution.
* '''Low-Light:''' enable for low-light environments. Camera will automatically adjust FPS.
* '''Spot Meter:''' allows you to record from a dark space while pointing into a brighter settings, such as in a car.
* '''Protune:''' enables the protune settings. See '''PROTUNE''' section.

=====VIDEO CAPTURING MODES=====
Video Mode contains 4 different capturing modes, located in the '''Video Settings.'''
* '''Video''' is the standard capturing mode to record video.
* '''Time Lapse''' mode creates video from frames captured at specific intervals. It is available only in 4K and 2.7K 4:3 resolutions and is captured without audio.
* '''Photo+Video''' will capture a photo at selected intervals while you record video.
* '''Looping''' lets you continuously record but only save select moments. Available intervals for Looping are 5, 20, 60 and 120 minutes. Only the most recent interval (ex: 5 minutes) is saved when you stop recording. If you record for an interval and do not press the Shutter/Select button to stop recording and save, the camera begins a new interval by recording over your previous footage. If you select '''Max Video''' as the interval, the camera records until the memory card is full, then overwrites the content. Monitor your footage carefully in looping mode!

=====VIDEO RESOLUTIONS=====
Adjust the video resolution in the '''Video Settings.''' <br />

Resolution correlates to the amount of pixels and frame rate of your footage. There are a few factors that will go into deciding which resolution you would like to film at (e.g. how much space is available on your memory card, what you will be filming). This camera is capable of filming at nine different resolutions and each one has its own practical usage. Keep in mind that the higher the resolution, the more room it will take up on your memory card.

====PHOTO MODE====
When in '''Photo Mode''', you can take a photo by pressing the '''Shutter/Select''' button.

=====PHOTO SETTINGS=====
To adjust the settings for photo mode, either "swipe up" when in photo mode OR press the '''Settings button.''' Listed below are all the settings you can control in this menu.
* Mode: change the way the camera captures images, as described in the section below
* Megapixels: adjust the size photos, shown in the chart below.
* Spot Meter: allows you to capture photos from a dark space pointing the camera into a brighter setting such as from a car.
* Protune: enables the protune settings. See '''PROTUNE''' section for full explanation.

=====PHOTO CAPTURING MODES=====
Adjust the photo capturing mode in the '''Photo Settings.'''
* Single: this mode will take a single photo adjusted to the manual settings.
* Continuous Shooting: will take pictures as long as the shutter button is pressed down.
* Night: allows you to manually adjust the shutter speed to get a properly exposed image.

=====PHOTO RESOLUTIONS=====
Select the photo resolution that best fits your needs. Keep in mind that the more Megapixels (MP), the more space the images will take up on the memory card. Adjust the photo resolution in the '''Photo Settings.'''

* 12MP/Wide & 7MP/Wide: Largest field of view (FOV). Good for action shots in which you want to capture as much as possible within the frame.
* 7MP/Medium & 5MP/Medium: Mid-range FOV.

====MULTI-SHOT MODE====
Multi-shot mode is a photo mode that contains three capture settings, described below. <br />

=====MULTI-SHOT SETTINGS=====
To change the '''Multi-shot Mode''' settings, either ''swipe up'' while in multi-shot mode OR press the '''Settings''' button. Below is the settings you will be able to change.<br />
* Mode: change the multi-shot capture mode, described in the section below.
* Rate (burst mode only): adjust the rate in which photos are captured.
* Interval (timelapse and nightlapse modes only): adjust the intervals in which time lapse photos are taken.
* Megapixels: described in the '''PHOTO RESOLUTION''' section.
* Spot meter: allows you to capture photos from a dark space pointing the camera into a brighter setting such as from a car.
* Protune: enables the protune settings. See '''PROTUNE''' section for full explanation.

=====MULTI-SHOT CAPTURE MODES=====
Adjust the Multi-shot captures modes in the '''Multi-Shot Settings.'''
* Burst (default): captures up to 30 photos in 1 second. Perfect for action shots. Change the rate under the Multi-shot settings.
* Time Lapse: captures a series of photos at specified intervals, which you can adjust in the Multi-shot settings.
* Night Lapse: captures a series of photos at specific intervals and exposure times, which you can adjust in the Multi-shot settings. Use this in low-light environments, such as the night sky.

====PLAYBACK MODE====
In Playback mode you can review your images. Select videos/pictures to view by ''tapping'' them, OR using the '''Power/Mode''' button to cycle through the files and selecting them with the '''Shutter/Select''' button.<br />

In video playback, you will see four icons on the bottom of the screen:
* '''Delete:''' will delete the selected file
* '''Play/ Pause:''' use this to pause the video, giving you the option to choose which frame to stop on.
* '''Scissors icon''': allows you to create a short clip from your video. This does not affect the original footage. The clip will be saved as a new file.
<br />

To exit Playback mode, ''tap'' the '''X''' in the top right hand corner.

====SET-UP MODE====
Use the '''Set-up Mode''' to control the following functions of the camera.
* '''Wireless:''' allows you to pair the camera with a smartphone/tablet or GoPro remote (not included)
* '''Touch display:''' change the sleep, brightness, etc
* '''Orientation:''' changes the orientation of the display (set this to auto)
* '''Default Mode:''' select which mode the camera is automatically set to when powered on
* '''QuickCapture:''' quickly turn your camera on and begin capturing video / time lapse photos. The options for this setting are on and off (default).

* '''LED's:''' control the status lights
* '''Beeps'''
* '''Video format:''' keep in '''NTSC'''
* '''On Screen Display:''' toggle to show more/less file info during playback
* '''Auto-Off'''
* '''Date/Time'''
* '''Delete:''' use this to format your card before/after usage
* '''Camera Reset:''' to restore default camera settings. If your camera is behaving strangely, use this function
* '''Reset Wi-Fi'''

===PROTUNE===
Protune enables manual control of additional settings for advanced control and customization of your video footage and photos. <br />
To turn '''Protune''' on/off, access the settings (in video, photo, or multi-shot mode) by either ''swiping up'' on the display, OR by pressing the '''Settings''' button. Navigate to "Protune" and toggle on/off.<br />

Enabling protune will give you access to the following settings:
* '''White balance:''' choose between auto, 3000K, 5500K, 6500K, and native (minimal color correction)
* '''Color:''' "GoPro Color" and "Flat"
* '''ISO limit:''' restrict the max ISO the camera can use
* '''Sharpness:''' low-high increased sharpness
* '''EV Compensation:''' exposure compensation
* '''Reset:''' restore default protune settings
<br />
'''DO NOT ENABLE PROTUNE IF YOU ARE UNFAMILIAR WITH THE ABOVE TERMS.'''

===FILE TRANSFER===
To save your footage or photos, connect the camera to a computer using the included USB cable. '''DO NOT REMOVE THE INCLUDED SD CARD.'''

# Remove input/output cover, located on the side of the camera. '''DO NOT LOSE THIS COVER.'''
# Connect the camera to a computer with the included USB cable. Insert the mini end into the camera, and the other into the computer.
# Press the power button. The camera and computer will automatically connect.
# Locate the camera on your computer.
# Drag & drop (or use your preferred transfer method) the files into the desired location on the computer.

===BATTERIES===
The battery compartment is located on the bottom side of the camera. <br />

====CHARGING====
To charge this camera, connect it with the included USB cable to a computer or other USB charging adapter. The camera status light will turn on during charging and off when completely charged.<br />

'''DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CHARGE WITH A CABLE NOT INCLUDED IN KIT, CAN RESULT IN FIRE AND/OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.'''
===Proper Housing Cleaning===
Rinse in fresh water and shake dry or let air dry. Do not dry with a cloth, as lint may compromise the seal. If the seal is broken, water may leak through and permanently damage the camera. Re-install the seal into the grooves in the backdoor of the camera housing.

==Troubleshooting==

See [[Troubleshooting Media Equipment]] Guide for general information.

==Media Loan Gear it Connects With Well==

See the [[Media Loan Catalog]] for more info about the below items.

* DolphinEar Hydrophone is capable of recording audio underwater and could be used in tandem with the GoPro. Just plug the Hydrophone into an H4n and record it while the the GoPro is recording.
* Have a multi-camera shoot with a go pro and Canon Rebel T6i or Vixia Camcorder
* Record high quality audio with the H4n and sync it with your footage gathered on the GoPro.


</div>

<div class="col-md-1"></div>

<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">

{{GA Proficiency Information

|Testlink= [https://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/GoPro_Hero_4_Proficiency_Test GoPro Hero 4 Proficiency Test]

}}



{{Precautions, Help, and Other Wikis for all Media Loan Gear

|Exceptions=

*'''For This Gear Specifically'''
** You actually can put this in water, but only when sealed in the housing. Don't expose any other media loan gear to water.
**Keep the plastic camera housing on the camera during all filming.
** Make sure the rubber lining of the housing is completely clean before exposing the camera to water.
** Make sure the locking bolt is always secured tightly.
** Transfer your footage with the included USB cable '''(do not remove card)'''
** Don't remove Micro SD card from GoPro - they are very small and easy to lose track of
}}





</div>


</div>


</div>



__NOEDITSECTION__

[[category:Digital Cameras and Accessories]]

GoPro Hero 4 Gear Guide

2026-06-17T18:21:55Z

Zornesn:

{{Media Loan Covid Message}}

<div class="container-fluid">

<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">

<div class="lead">

<div class="lead">[[File:Media Loan Logo.png|left|frameless|90x90px]]A versatile camera for action and underwater video production. </div>

<div class="pull-right"></div>

</div>
[[file:IMG 0110.jpg|thumb|300x300px|GoPro Hero4]]
[[file:IMG 0114.jpg|thumb|300x300px|Housing & Monopod]]
==Overview==
The GoPro HERO4 can shoot video, photo, and timelapse footage. It is a small video camera that delivers super slow motion at 240 frames per second, high-resolution 4K30 and 2.7K60 video combines with 1080p120 and 720p240 slow motion to enable stunning, immersive footage. Waterproof to 131 feet (40 meter) with 12MP photos at 30 frames per second and improved audio.
[http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/images/e/ef/GoPro_manual.pdf Complete Manual GoPro HERO4]
==Kit Contents==
* GoPro HERO4 Camera
* Durable plastic housing
* Monopod
* Head-mount & locking bolt
* One Micro USB 32GB memory card
* 2 Batteries
* Mini USB cable & wall charger

==How to Use It==
===NAVIGATION & OPERATION===
There are multiple ways to operate this camera. You can access the menus and functions by using the exterior buttons, as illustrated in the diagram. You can also navigate through the camera using the touch display, as described below the "parts" list.

[[file:GoPro parts.png|thumb|800px|center|GoPro Hero4 Parts]]

Exterior Parts:
# Camera Status Light (Red)
# Shutter/Select Button: use to record video, take pictures, and make selections in the menus
# Wireless Status Light (blue)
# Camera Status Screen
# Power/Mode Button: use to power the camera on/off, as well as cycle through the various camera modes
# Micro HDMI Port (cable not included)
# MicroSD Card slot (never remove included card)
# Mini-USB port (supports composite A/V cable & 3.5mm stereo mic adapter, not included)
# Audio Alert
# Microphone
# HERO Port
# Touch Display: use to navigate the functions/settings of the camera
# Touch Display Sleep/Wake Button
# Settings/Tag Button: use to change the settings of the selected camera mode
# Battery Door
<br />

====POWER ON/OFF====
'''On:''' Press the '''Power/Mode button''', located on the front of the camera. The status light will flash three times. When the camera status displays information, the camera is on.<br />
'''Off:''' Press and hold '''Power/Mode''' button for a few seconds, until the red light flashes mulitple times.

====TOUCH DISPLAY OPERATION====
Located on the back of the camera, the touch display lets you control the cameras settings and playback your photos/videos. It also functions as a viewfinder.<br />
* ''Swipe left'' to switch camera '''Modes'''
* ''Swipe right'' to display the last captured video or photo
* ''Swipe up'' from the bottom to access '''Mode Settings'''
* ''Swipe down'' from top to close menus
* ''Swipe up/down'' to navigate the menus
* ''Tap'' to make a selection
* ''Double tap'' to change the field of vision (FOV) in '''Preview Mode'''
* Press on display for two seconds to lock the touch display. This is useful if you are capturing handheld footage.

===MODES===
The GoPro has multiple modes, listed below. Each mode is explained in the following corresponding sections.<br />

'''To access the various modes''': either ''swipe left'' on the '''touch display screen''' and ''tap'' to select your desired mode, OR cycle through the modes by pressing the '''Power/Mode''' button. The modes are listed below, as well as their location within the mode menu screen.

* Video (top right)
* Photo (top center)
* Multi-shot (top left)
* Playback (bottom left)
* Set up (bottom right)
<br />

'''Adjust mode settings:''' each mode has specific mode settings that you can adjust. To do so, either ''swipe up'' on the display or press the '''Settings''' button.<br />

'''Note:''' as you change the capture settings in video, photo, and multi-shot, a different icon will appear in the mode menu. The image below shows the various icons that represent these modes depending on the selected capture setting.

[[file:Go pro mode menu.png|thumb|500px|center|Video, Photo, and Multi-Shot Mode Icons]]

====VIDEO MODE====
To capture video in '''Video Mode''', simply press the '''Shutter/Select''' button to start and stop recording. <br />

=====VIDEO SETTINGS=====
To adjust the settings for video mode, either ''swipe up'' when in video mode OR press the '''Settings Button.''' Listed below are all the settings you can control in this menu.
* '''Mode:''' refers to video capturing modes, as explained in the section below.
* '''Resolution:''' change the video resolution, as explained below.
* '''Frames per second:''' choose between 24-60 FPS (24fps is the cinematic standard, 60fps is for slow-motion).
* '''Field of View (FOV):''' select the FOV. Choices depend on video resolution.
* '''Low-Light:''' enable for low-light environments. Camera will automatically adjust FPS.
* '''Spot Meter:''' allows you to record from a dark space while pointing into a brighter settings, such as in a car.
* '''Protune:''' enables the protune settings. See '''PROTUNE''' section.

=====VIDEO CAPTURING MODES=====
Video Mode contains 4 different capturing modes, located in the '''Video Settings.'''
* '''Video''' is the standard capturing mode to record video.
* '''Time Lapse''' mode creates video from frames captured at specific intervals. It is available only in 4K and 2.7K 4:3 resolutions and is captured without audio.
* '''Photo+Video''' will capture a photo at selected intervals while you record video.
* '''Looping''' lets you continuously record but only save select moments. Available intervals for Looping are 5, 20, 60 and 120 minutes. Only the most recent interval (ex: 5 minutes) is saved when you stop recording. If you record for an interval and do not press the Shutter/Select button to stop recording and save, the camera begins a new interval by recording over your previous footage. If you select '''Max Video''' as the interval, the camera records until the memory card is full, then overwrites the content. Monitor your footage carefully in looping mode!

=====VIDEO RESOLUTIONS=====
Adjust the video resolution in the '''Video Settings.''' <br />

Resolution correlates to the amount of pixels and frame rate of your footage. There are a few factors that will go into deciding which resolution you would like to film at (e.g. how much space is available on your memory card, what you will be filming). This camera is capable of filming at nine different resolutions and each one has its own practical usage. Keep in mind that the higher the resolution, the more room it will take up on your memory card.

====PHOTO MODE====
When in '''Photo Mode''', you can take a photo by pressing the '''Shutter/Select''' button.

=====PHOTO SETTINGS=====
To adjust the settings for photo mode, either "swipe up" when in photo mode OR press the '''Settings button.''' Listed below are all the settings you can control in this menu.
* Mode: change the way the camera captures images, as described in the section below
* Megapixels: adjust the size photos, shown in the chart below.
* Spot Meter: allows you to capture photos from a dark space pointing the camera into a brighter setting such as from a car.
* Protune: enables the protune settings. See '''PROTUNE''' section for full explanation.

=====PHOTO CAPTURING MODES=====
Adjust the photo capturing mode in the '''Photo Settings.'''
* Single: this mode will take a single photo adjusted to the manual settings.
* Continuous Shooting: will take pictures as long as the shutter button is pressed down.
* Night: allows you to manually adjust the shutter speed to get a properly exposed image.

=====PHOTO RESOLUTIONS=====
Select the photo resolution that best fits your needs. Keep in mind that the more Megapixels (MP), the more space the images will take up on the memory card. Adjust the photo resolution in the '''Photo Settings.'''

* 12MP/Wide & 7MP/Wide: Largest field of view (FOV). Good for action shots in which you want to capture as much as possible within the frame.
* 7MP/Medium & 5MP/Medium: Mid-range FOV.

====MULTI-SHOT MODE====
Multi-shot mode is a photo mode that contains three capture settings, described below. <br />

=====MULTI-SHOT SETTINGS=====
To change the '''Multi-shot Mode''' settings, either ''swipe up'' while in multi-shot mode OR press the '''Settings''' button. Below is the settings you will be able to change.<br />
* Mode: change the multi-shot capture mode, described in the section below.
* Rate (burst mode only): adjust the rate in which photos are captured.
* Interval (timelapse and nightlapse modes only): adjust the intervals in which time lapse photos are taken.
* Megapixels: described in the '''PHOTO RESOLUTION''' section.
* Spot meter: allows you to capture photos from a dark space pointing the camera into a brighter setting such as from a car.
* Protune: enables the protune settings. See '''PROTUNE''' section for full explanation.

=====MULTI-SHOT CAPTURE MODES=====
Adjust the Multi-shot captures modes in the '''Multi-Shot Settings.'''
* Burst (default): captures up to 30 photos in 1 second. Perfect for action shots. Change the rate under the Multi-shot settings.
* Time Lapse: captures a series of photos at specified intervals, which you can adjust in the Multi-shot settings.
* Night Lapse: captures a series of photos at specific intervals and exposure times, which you can adjust in the Multi-shot settings. Use this in low-light environments, such as the night sky.

====PLAYBACK MODE====
In Playback mode you can review your images. Select videos/pictures to view by ''tapping'' them, OR using the '''Power/Mode''' button to cycle through the files and selecting them with the '''Shutter/Select''' button.<br />

In video playback, you will see four icons on the bottom of the screen:
* '''Delete:''' will delete the selected file
* '''Play/ Pause:''' use this to pause the video, giving you the option to choose which frame to stop on.
* '''Scissors icon''': allows you to create a short clip from your video. This does not affect the original footage. The clip will be saved as a new file.
<br />

To exit Playback mode, ''tap'' the '''X''' in the top right hand corner.

====SET-UP MODE====
Use the '''Set-up Mode''' to control the following functions of the camera.
* '''Wireless:''' allows you to pair the camera with a smartphone/tablet or GoPro remote (not included)
* '''Touch display:''' change the sleep, brightness, etc
* '''Orientation:''' changes the orientation of the display (set this to auto)
* '''Default Mode:''' select which mode the camera is automatically set to when powered on
* '''QuickCapture:''' quickly turn your camera on and begin capturing video / time lapse photos. The options for this setting are on and off (default).

* '''LED's:''' control the status lights
* '''Beeps'''
* '''Video format:''' keep in '''NTSC'''
* '''On Screen Display:''' toggle to show more/less file info during playback
* '''Auto-Off'''
* '''Date/Time'''
* '''Delete:''' use this to format your card before/after usage
* '''Camera Reset:''' to restore default camera settings. If your camera is behaving strangely, use this function
* '''Reset Wi-Fi'''

===PROTUNE===
Protune enables manual control of additional settings for advanced control and customization of your video footage and photos. <br />
To turn '''Protune''' on/off, access the settings (in video, photo, or multi-shot mode) by either ''swiping up'' on the display, OR by pressing the '''Settings''' button. Navigate to "Protune" and toggle on/off.<br />

Enabling protune will give you access to the following settings:
* '''White balance:''' choose between auto, 3000K, 5500K, 6500K, and native (minimal color correction)
* '''Color:''' "GoPro Color" and "Flat"
* '''ISO limit:''' restrict the max ISO the camera can use
* '''Sharpness:''' low-high increased sharpness
* '''EV Compensation:''' exposure compensation
* '''Reset:''' restore default protune settings
<br />
'''DO NOT ENABLE PROTUNE IF YOU ARE UNFAMILIAR WITH THE ABOVE TERMS.'''

===FILE TRANSFER===
To save your footage or photos, connect the camera to a computer using the included USB cable. '''DO NOT REMOVE THE INCLUDED SD CARD.'''

# Remove input/output cover, located on the side of the camera. '''DO NOT LOSE THIS COVER.'''
# Connect the camera to a computer with the included USB cable. Insert the mini end into the camera, and the other into the computer.
# Press the power button. The camera and computer will automatically connect.
# Locate the camera on your computer.
# Drag & drop (or use your preferred transfer method) the files into the desired location on the computer.

===BATTERIES===
The battery compartment is located on the bottom side of the camera. <br />

====CHARGING====
To charge this camera, connect it with the included USB cable to a computer or other USB charging adapter. The camera status light will turn on during charging and off when completely charged.<br />

'''DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CHARGE WITH A CABLE NOT INCLUDED IN KIT, CAN RESULT IN FIRE AND/OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.'''
===Proper Housing Cleaning===
Rinse in fresh water and shake dry or let air dry. Do not dry with a cloth, as lint may compromise the seal. If the seal is broken, water may leak through and permanently damage the camera. Re-install the seal into the grooves in the backdoor of the camera housing.

==Troubleshooting==

See [[Troubleshooting Media Equipment]] Guide for general information.

==Media Loan Gear it Connects With Well==

{{Collapsed|

See the [[Media Loan Catalog]] for more info about the below items.

* DolphinEar Hydrophone is capable of recording audio underwater and could be used in tandem with the GoPro. Just plug the Hydrophone into an H4n and record it while the the GoPro is recording.
* Have a multi-camera shoot with a go pro and Canon Rebel T6i or Vixia Camcorder
* Record high quality audio with the H4n and sync it with your footage gathered on the GoPro.
}}


</div>

<div class="col-md-1"></div>

<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">

{{GA Proficiency Information

|Testlink= [https://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/GoPro_Hero_4_Proficiency_Test GoPro Hero 4 Proficiency Test]

}}



{{Precautions, Help, and Other Wikis for all Media Loan Gear

|Exceptions=

*'''For This Gear Specifically'''
** You actually can put this in water, but only when sealed in the housing. Don't expose any other media loan gear to water.
**Keep the plastic camera housing on the camera during all filming.
** Make sure the rubber lining of the housing is completely clean before exposing the camera to water.
** Make sure the locking bolt is always secured tightly.
** Transfer your footage with the included USB cable '''(do not remove card)'''
** Don't remove Micro SD card from GoPro - they are very small and easy to lose track of
}}





</div>


</div>


</div>



__NOEDITSECTION__

[[category:Digital Cameras and Accessories]]

Canon Rebel T5i/T6i/T7i Gear Guide

2026-06-17T18:18:31Z

Zornesn:

{{Media Loan Covid Message}}

<div class="container-fluid">

<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">

<div class="lead">

<div class="lead">[[File:Media Loan Logo.png|left|frameless|90x90px]]Our most popular camera for both photo and video. </div>

<div class="pull-right"></div></div>

{{#ev:youtube|z-hYgQuEDRc|800|center}}

==Overview==
The Canon Rebel can be easy to use for beginners and has many features and controls for advanced users as well. This camera can be used with many other items at Media Loan, especially our variety of lenses, giving camera users the ability to get a wide variety of shots. We have many models for Canon Rebels. Starting form oldest to newest model, they are: XSi, T1i, T2i, T5i, T6i and T7i.
[http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/images/8/8b/Rebel_t5i_guide.pdf Canon Rebel T5i Complete Manual]<gallery>
[[File:Canon T6i Front Diagram.png|none|thumb|186x186px|T6i Front Diagram ]][[File:Canon Rebel T6i Back Diagram.png|none|thumb|177x177px|T6i Back Diagram]][[File:Canon T6i Mode Dial.png|none|thumb|178x178px]]
</gallery>

==How to Use It==
===Battery===

To insert a battery into the Canon Rebel:
# Open the battery door located on the bottom of the camera by pulling on the latch and swinging the door open.
# Align the battery attachment on the camera to the attachment in the slot.
# Slide the battery into place and lock it in.
# Close the battery door.

The battery will only fit in one way, so if it does not seem to fit properly, the battery is not oriented correctly. When powering the camera off, it takes several seconds for it to clean the sensor, so make sure that the "Sensor Cleaning" logo is no longer on the screen before removing the battery.
To charge the battery, slide it into the provided charger and then plug the charger into a standard 120 VAC outlet. '''Do not charge more than 24 hours. Do not use any charger other than the one provided with the camera.'''

====Battery Life====
The Canon Rebel shows charge level in three stages: "Battery OK", "Battery Low", and "Needs to be Charged". To conserve battery life, the Rebel will go into a sleep mode after a period of disuse with default settings. To wake the camera, press the shutter button down halfway. If you know you will not be using the camera, it is best to fully turn the camera off.

===Camera Memory===
The T5i/T6i/T7i can use SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards. Most Media Loan Rebels will come with a 16 gigabyte card already in the camera. If you wish to use your own card, make sure the speed rating is at least Class 4 for RAW photos, and Class 10 45mb/s for video.
To switch memory cards, open the door on the back of the camera's hand grip, and press the back of the memory card. The card will pop out far enough to grab the back. Remove the card. To insert a new card, make sure it is oriented correctly, and insert the new memory card until it stops.

===Canon Rebel Lenses===
The Canon Rebel will accept any Canon EF of EF-S bayonet lenses. Media Loan has several different zoom and prime lenses that can be checked out alongside a Canon Rebel. Prime lenses (fixed focal length) are recommended for faster apertures and picture quality, while zoom lenses are recommended for changing shooting settings, or long telephoto applications.
====Removing and Replacing Lenses====
'''Please do not remove the included kit lens from the camera unless you intend to attach a different lens immediately.''' On the Canon Rebel, there is a half-circle shaped button on the right side of the lens mount (viewed from the front of the camera). To remove the lens, press this button, and turn the lens approximately 90 degrees clockwise. To attach a new lens, find the guide mark on the lens body. If it is an EF lens, the guide mark will be a red circle. If the lens is EF-S, the guide mark will be a white square. Line up the guide mark with the matching mark on the Canon rebel body, set the lens into the mount, and turn it approximately 90 degrees counter clockwise until it locks into place.

When attaching or detaching the lens, '''take care to prevent dust from entering the camera through the lens mount.''' Removing the lens can cause debris to get inside the camera making the camera highly susceptible to serious damage. If the lens is removed, avoid putting your fingers inside the camera. If the mirror, or any other part of the inside of this camera gets dirty, please do not try to clean it yourself and bring it to Media Loan so that a qualified staff member can service the camera.
====Auto / Manual Focus Switch====
The Canon Rebel uses an in-lens focusing system, which is switched on and off on the body of the lens. Regardless of the settings on the camera body, if the switch on the lens is set to MF (Manual Focus), the camera will not perform AF (Auto Focus) functions.
====Image Stabilization====
Some canon lenses feature an optical IS (Image Stabilization) function. This can be useful for shooting fast-moving hand-held shots, shots in low-light environments, etc. Because the IS is optical, it will not deteriorate the quality of the image as digital image stabilization does. However, using the IS feature on a lens will drain the battery much faster. Due to power consumption concerns, we recommend that the IS be turned off when shooting from a tripod, or at high enough shutter speeds that hand movement will not be a concern. The IS controlled on the lens body, and if the lens has an IS feature, the switch will be next to the AF/MF switch next to the lens mount.

===Controls===
The T6i has two added buttons on top of the camera body, above the Mode Dial: DISP. and one for Auto-Focus (AF) functionality. The DISP. button will turn the LCD screen on/off when Live View is disengaged, and the AF allows for quick access to Auto-Focus settings.
====Mode Dial====
<gallery>

</gallery>
=====A-DEP=====
A-DEP (Automatic DEPth of Field) mode on the Canon Rebel is designed to maximize focus across a picture, and is primarily intended for landscapes or large groups of people. A-DEP must be used with AF turned on, as the camera will use the AF sensor array to search through the frame for the distance of all subjects, then determine aperture and shutter values to create a depth of field that will keep all subjects in focus. A-DEP is not recommended for moving subjects, portraits, or shots where foreground and background de-focus is desired. The only controllable exposure settings in A-DEP mode are ISO and Exposure compensation.

=====M=====
M (Manual) mode offers full control over all features on the Canon Rebel. All exposure settings and picture styles must be changed by the user. This allows for the most creative control over the camera, but also demands an understanding of the camera's features, and basic principals of photography. In manual mode, the shutter speed is controlled by the dial next to the shutter release button. Aperture is controlled by the same dial while the AV button on the back of the camera is pressed. ISO can be set by pressing the button on the top of the camera between the Mode Dial and the Shutter Speed Dial. While in M, you can choose Auto ISO.

=====Av=====
Av (Aperture Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed to let the user choose aperture values, and automatically determine shutter speed for correct exposure. While in Av mode, the dial next to the shutter button will control the aperture. ISO is controlled the same way as in M mode, and shutter speed is determined by the camera. Av mode is designed to let the user control depth of field in a shot (to customize deep of shallow focus), but may not be good for high speed subjects, as the camera may use a slow shutter speed to acquire correct exposure.

=====Tv=====
Tv (Shutter Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed for photography where shutter speed is crucial. In Tv mode, the shutter speed is controlled with the dial next to the shutter button. In this mode, the user determines shutter speed, and the camera will automatically determine an aperture value for correct exposure. ISO is controlled in the same manner as in M mode. Tv mode is designed for applications such as sports photography, where depth of field is not particularly important, but fast shutter speeds to minimize motion blur are desired.

=====P=====
P (Program Auto-Exposure) mode allows the camera to control both the shutter speed and the aperture value. Users may still set the ISO as in M mode. In P mode, the user may change the shutter / aperture combination by turning the dial next to the shutter button. When the user changes the shutter / aperture setting like this, the camera will automatically change both shutter speed and aperture value simultaneously to maintain correct exposure. This mode is good for shooting in rapidly changing environments, or learning how the combination of shutter and aperture change both exposure and visual elements within the picture.

=====CA=====
CA (Creative Auto) mode operates exactly like full automatic mode with several more user controlled options allowed. In CA mode, the user may turn the flash on or off, change exposure compensation, choose picture styles, and change the drive mode of the camera. All other values are locked to camera-control.

=====Auto (Green Square)=====
Auto mode locks all options into camera control. User cannot override any options on the camera, including exposure, picture style, or drive mode. Auto mode is not recommended for any shooting situation.

=====Other Still Photo Modes=====
The Canon Rebel has several specialized automatic modes, designed for various different applications. They mimic the manual control modes without giving the user any actual manual control of the camera. '''Flash Off''' mode runs like full auto, but locks out the flash. '''Portrait''' mode uses a wide aperture to defocus the background and emphasize the subject. '''Landscape''' mode uses a small aperture to create deep focus from the foreground to the background. '''Macro''' mode attempts to optimize exposure and shutter drive for close-up photography (NOTE: the close-focus distance of the rebel is determined by the lens, and will not change regardless of what mode the camera body is set to. To take photos with small subjects near the camera, check out a macro-specialized lens from Media Loan). '''Sports''' mode will use the fastest shutter speed possible to minimize motion blur in pictures. '''Night Portrait''' mode will fire the flash to get a clear photo of the foreground subject, and use a long shutter speed to capture the background. Although each of these modes has specific applications, manual camera modes will offer more control in any situation.

====Video Mode====
The T5i/T6i cameras have full-manual HD video functionality. Unlike other Rebel models at Media Loan, the video mode on the T5i/T6i is activated on the same switch '''near the Mode Dial as ON/OFF'''. This allows the user to easily change '''exposure modes with the mode dial''' while shooting video.
Turn the switch to the video camera icon to engage video mode. The mirror will open, and live view will automatically activate '''(the Q menu is disabled in video mode)'''. To record or stop recording video, press the live view button. You can change the exposure and image settings the same way in video mode as in photo mode (exterior buttons, touch screen). You can also adjust image settings in the '''MENU'''. Pressing '''INFO''' will display more or less information.
====Aperture / Exposure Compensation Button====
The '''Aperture / Exposure Compensation''' button (Av +/-) allows control over the aperture while in manual shooting mode. While in other modes, the button controls exposure compensation, allowing the user to make the camera expose lighter or darker than the internal meter would under normal operation.

====Quick Control Button (Q) / Q Menu====
The '''Quick Control (Q)''' button allows camera settings to be controlled via the cross keys when the '''Q Menu''' is engaged. To use the quick control feature, turn off Live View and press the Q button. You can then use the cross keys to select the setting you wish to change.

====Display Button====
'''T6i ONLY'''. The '''Display''' (DISP) button on the camera will turn the the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the '''Display''' button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.

====Info Button====
The '''INFO''' button on the camera will turn the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the INFO button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.
When Live View mode is engaged, the INFO button will display exposure settings on the LCD screen. Press the INFO button multiple times to display more or less settings.

====Depth-of-field Preview Button====
The aperture opening changes only at the moment when the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open. Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the LCD screen, the depth of field will look narrow. Press the depth-of-field preview button (located on the camera body near the lens mount) to stop down the lens to the current aperture setting and check the actual depth of field (range of acceptable focus). This will darken the viewfinder considerably. This button can also be used to display the exposure settings in the bottom of the viewfinder.

===Live View===
Both the T5i/T6i are capable of shooting in Live View mode. This will open up the mirror and the shutter in the camera body and display a live image from the camera's sensor on the screen. To turn live view on or off, press the button on the camera next to the eyepiece with the circular red Record logo and a small logo of the camera back. You can enable/disable Live View mode in the MENU.
While in Live View, auto focus will be severely limited. All video is shot in Live View mode. While the camera is in Live View, '''DO NOT''' point the camera at the sun, as the sensor is exposed and will be damaged. Note that the appearance of the image on the screen in live view mode does not reflect the brightness of the actual picture. Always use the meter or histogram, as the brightness of the LCD cannot be trusted.
While the camera is in video mode, live view mode will turn on automatically. In this case, the '''Live View''' button becomes the '''Record / Stop''' button for video recording.

===Metering Modes===
The Canon Rebels have built-in light meter systems. The metering modes measure the light of an image in order to determine whether or not it is properly exposed. The light meter is displayed in multiple places, including in the bottom of the viewfinder, in the Q Menu, and the bottom of the LCD screen in Live View mode.
T5i/T6i both have four different modes to meter the lighting in a scene.
* '''Evaluative Metering''' is the camera's standard metering mode. It is suited for most shooting situations, including some moderate back-lighting of a subject.
* '''Partial Metering''' is effective when the background is significantly brighter or darker than the subject.
* '''Center-Weighted Average Metering''' takes the average of lighting across the frame with slight preference given to lighting in the center of the frame.
* '''Spot Metering''' meters from a small area in the center of the frame. Spot metering is the most accurate, but only accounts for a small part of the picture, so several meter readings may be necessary to evaluate the lighting of a scene.

===Shutter Drive Modes===
Shutter drive modes determine the way the camera will react when the shutter button is pressed. The T5i/T6i both have:
* '''Single Shooting''' will take a picture each time the shutter button is fully depressed.
* '''Continuous Shooting''' will take pictures as long as the shutter button is pressed down. The camera will take pictures as fast as the shutter mechanism and the data buffer will allow. (max. aprox. 3 shots/second)
* '''Self Timer / Remote Control''' will allow the shutter to be released via wired or wireless remote, or, if the shutter button is depressed, take a single shot after 2 or 10 seconds.
The T6i has some additional drive features that the T5i doesn’t:
* '''Single silent shooting''' is single shooting with less sound
* '''Silent continuous shooting''' is continuous shooting with less sound
* '''Self-timer: Continuous''' Press the up and down arrow keys to set the number of multiple shots (2 to 10) to be taken with the self-timer. 10 seconds after you press the shutter button, the set number of multiple shots will be taken.

===Image Size and Quality===
All Rebels have a number of image size and quality options. In most cases, the best option is to shoot at the highest resolution and quality possible, but space and processing limitations can make high-resolution images impractical.
===RAW Images===
Raw images are a direct feed from the camera's image sensor. Due to this, Raw files are extremely large and versatile. Raw image files have far better dynamic range than JPEG image files. Settings such as ISO and White balance can be changed during post processing, because Raw image files do not bake info into the image.

====JPEG Images====
JPEG images are compressed image files that save memory space by removing some of the detail and dynamic range from photographs. Canon Rebels apply a noise reduction process during the creation of JPEG images, which can make images look smoother in low-ISO situations, but can create a large amount of digital artifacts in high-ISO images. The T5i and T6i both have various resolution and quality settings for JPEG image capture.

===Menu System===
The full menu system of the Rebels can be accessed by pressing the '''MENU''' button on the back of the camera by the viewfinder. Image quality settings, picture style customization, memory management, screen brightness, and more are controlled from within the main menu. Use the cross keys to navigate the menu. Use the '''SET''' button to choose the highlighted option. At any time you can return to the main menu by pressing the '''MENU''' button again, or the home screen by halfway depressing the '''shutter release'''.

===Quick Exposure Settings Guide===
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the T5i/T6i. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder (enable with the depth-of-field preview button) and the LCD screen. The main ways to adjust exposure settings is with the top scroll wheel, the touch screen, set and cross keys, and the ISO and Av buttons.
The exposure settings can be adjusted in multiple ways:
* '''Exterior buttons:''' In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. To adjust the shutter speed, scroll back and forth with the top wheel. Aperture can be changed while holding down the Av button and scrolling with the top wheel. To adjust the ISO, press the ISO button (located on top of the camera near the mode dial) and then use the scroll wheel to make a selection.
* '''Q Menu (Live View Off):''' Enable the Q menu by turning off Live View. You can then adjust exposure settings in manual shooting modes. Press the Q button to enable selections and set button to go into specific settings. You can use the touch screen instead of buttons, as well as the exterior buttons.
* '''Live View:''' Enable the manipulation of the exposure settings in Live View by pressing the INFO button. Multiple depressions of INFO will enable various settings. Once engaged, you can use the touch screen or exterior buttons.

=== Custom White Balance ===
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure under the actual light source to be used.

'''Photograph a white object.'''
* The plain, white object should fill the spot metering circle.
* Focus manually and set the standard exposure for the white object.
* You can have have any white balance set for initial photograph--AWB, daylight, etc.

'''Select Custom White Balance in the menus.'''
* Under the second camera sub menu, select Custom White Balance, then press set.
* The photo you took should appear and then select OK and this white balance data will be imported.
* When the menu reappears, press the MENU button to exit the menu.

'''Make sure you are on the custom white balance setting.'''
* Press the WB button or the Quick Menu and select custom white balance and press set.
[[File:Media Loan Custom White Balance.png|none|thumb|100x100px|alt=Icon for Custom White Balance with 2 triagles on the bottom corners and a rounded black rectangle in the middle.]]
=== Putting your Media onto a Computer ===
There are two ways to put photos and videos onto a computer from you camera.
* '''SD card:''' Remove the SD card from your camera. Use a card reader from media loan to connect it to the computer via a USB mini to USB A cable. a folder should pop up automatically to the computer desktop, or be seen in the computer's file management system like Apples “Finder”. Remember to “eject” the folder before disconnecting the SD card.
* '''Direct connection:''' Connect your camera to the computer using a USB mini to USB A cable. the cable connects to a socket on your camera labeled “A/V out Digital” behind a rubber flap. Once connected turn on you camera and open a photo viewing software like Apples “Photos” desktop application. Within the application, your photos from the camera should be available as a folder. It should work similarly on the equivalent Windows photo application.

==Troubleshooting==

See [[Troubleshooting Media Equipment]] Guide for general information.

==Media Loan Gear it Connects With Well==

See the [[Media Loan Catalog]] for more info about the below items.
* EF and EF-S Lenses like the fisheye (shown right)
* Flash to add on top (shown right)
* Tripods and other stabilizers
* Other cameras for a multi-cam shoot
* Remote for time-lapse or wireless triggering
* Lighting for video and lighting control tools
* Zoom H4n Audio Recorder and microphones for higher quality audio


</div>

<div class="col-md-1"></div>

<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">

{{GA Proficiency Information

|Testlink= [https://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Canon_Rebel_Proficiency_Test Rebel Proficiency Test]

}}



{{Precautions, Help, and Other Wikis for all Media Loan Gear

|Exceptions=

*'''For This Gear Specifically'''

** Don't point camera toward Sun.
** Don't leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!
** Don't use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera
** Don't store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals
** Don't touch the mirror or sensor
** Don't please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!
}}





</div>


</div>


</div>



__NOEDITSECTION__
[[category:Digital Cameras and Accessories]]

Canon Rebel T5i/T6i/T7i Gear Guide

2026-06-17T18:17:42Z

Zornesn:

{{Media Loan Covid Message}}

<div class="container-fluid">

<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">

<div class="lead">

<div class="lead">[[File:Media Loan Logo.png|left|frameless|90x90px]]Our most popular camera for both photo and video. </div>

<div class="pull-right"></div></div>

{{#ev:youtube|z-hYgQuEDRc|800|center}}

==Overview==
The Canon Rebel can be easy to use for beginners and has many features and controls for advanced users as well. This camera can be used with many other items at Media Loan, especially our variety of lenses, giving camera users the ability to get a wide variety of shots. We have many models for Canon Rebels. Starting form oldest to newest model, they are: XSi, T1i, T2i, T5i, T6i and T7i.
[http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/images/8/8b/Rebel_t5i_guide.pdf Canon Rebel T5i Complete Manual]

==Differences in the Models==
=== New Features to the T5i/T6i===
The newer Rebel models have a separate video mode switch, a flip-out LCD monitor, touch screen functionality, and a depth-of-field preview button.
===LCD Flip-out Screen===
To flip the monitor out, pull on the right side of the screen. When it is swung out you can rotate it up, down, or over 180 degrees to face the subject. This allows you to view your Live View image or exposure settings from various angles.

===Touch Screen===
The LCD screen monitor on the T5i/T6i has touch screen capabilities, unlike the other Rebel models available at Media Loan. You can use the touch screen to navigate the MENU, adjust settings, and change exposure. It is automatically activated in Live View mode and the MENU; with Live View off you will need to press the Q button to activate the touch screen and navigate the Q Menu. Touch screen can be enabled/disabled in the MENU. The touch shutter function, activated in Live View mode, enables you to take a picture by simply tapping the LCD screen with your finger.

===T5i/T6i Differences===
The Canon Rebel T5i and T6i are very similar in design and functionality. They are both equipped with the same censor, the APS-C 332.3mm2 and have the same ISO range of 100-12,800. Media Loan has very few T6i’s available. Here are the major differences between these models:
* Megapixels: 18MP – T5i vs. 24.2MP – T6i
* Pixels: T5i – Bigger pixels, better in low-light vs. T6i – More pixels, higher resolution
* Even though they have the same ISO range, the T6i handles noise better
* The T6i has more Auto-Focus (AF) points
They have slight differences in exterior buttons, explained below.

===T5i Diagrams===
<gallery>
File:T5i front.jpg|T5i front diagram
File:T5i back.jpg|T5i front diagram
File:T5i Dial.jpg|T5i front diagram
</gallery>

===T6i Diagrams===
<gallery>
[[File:Canon T6i Front Diagram.png|none|thumb|186x186px|T6i Front Diagram ]][[File:Canon Rebel T6i Back Diagram.png|none|thumb|177x177px|T6i Back Diagram]][[File:Canon T6i Mode Dial.png|none|thumb|178x178px]]
</gallery>

==How to Use It==

===Battery===

To insert a battery into the Canon Rebel:
# Open the battery door located on the bottom of the camera by pulling on the latch and swinging the door open.
# Align the battery attachment on the camera to the attachment in the slot.
# Slide the battery into place and lock it in.
# Close the battery door.

The battery will only fit in one way, so if it does not seem to fit properly, the battery is not oriented correctly. When powering the camera off, it takes several seconds for it to clean the sensor, so make sure that the "Sensor Cleaning" logo is no longer on the screen before removing the battery.
To charge the battery, slide it into the provided charger and then plug the charger into a standard 120 VAC outlet. '''Do not charge more than 24 hours. Do not use any charger other than the one provided with the camera.'''

====Battery Life====
The Canon Rebel shows charge level in three stages: "Battery OK", "Battery Low", and "Needs to be Charged". To conserve battery life, the Rebel will go into a sleep mode after a period of disuse with default settings. To wake the camera, press the shutter button down halfway. If you know you will not be using the camera, it is best to fully turn the camera off.

===Camera Memory===
The T5i/T6i/T7i can use SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards. Most Media Loan Rebels will come with a 16 gigabyte card already in the camera. If you wish to use your own card, make sure the speed rating is at least Class 4 for RAW photos, and Class 10 45mb/s for video.
To switch memory cards, open the door on the back of the camera's hand grip, and press the back of the memory card. The card will pop out far enough to grab the back. Remove the card. To insert a new card, make sure it is oriented correctly, and insert the new memory card until it stops.

===Canon Rebel Lenses===
The Canon Rebel will accept any Canon EF of EF-S bayonet lenses. Media Loan has several different zoom and prime lenses that can be checked out alongside a Canon Rebel. Prime lenses (fixed focal length) are recommended for faster apertures and picture quality, while zoom lenses are recommended for changing shooting settings, or long telephoto applications.
====Removing and Replacing Lenses====
'''Please do not remove the included kit lens from the camera unless you intend to attach a different lens immediately.''' On the Canon Rebel, there is a half-circle shaped button on the right side of the lens mount (viewed from the front of the camera). To remove the lens, press this button, and turn the lens approximately 90 degrees clockwise. To attach a new lens, find the guide mark on the lens body. If it is an EF lens, the guide mark will be a red circle. If the lens is EF-S, the guide mark will be a white square. Line up the guide mark with the matching mark on the Canon rebel body, set the lens into the mount, and turn it approximately 90 degrees counter clockwise until it locks into place.

When attaching or detaching the lens, '''take care to prevent dust from entering the camera through the lens mount.''' Removing the lens can cause debris to get inside the camera making the camera highly susceptible to serious damage. If the lens is removed, avoid putting your fingers inside the camera. If the mirror, or any other part of the inside of this camera gets dirty, please do not try to clean it yourself and bring it to Media Loan so that a qualified staff member can service the camera.
====Auto / Manual Focus Switch====
The Canon Rebel uses an in-lens focusing system, which is switched on and off on the body of the lens. Regardless of the settings on the camera body, if the switch on the lens is set to MF (Manual Focus), the camera will not perform AF (Auto Focus) functions.
====Image Stabilization====
Some canon lenses feature an optical IS (Image Stabilization) function. This can be useful for shooting fast-moving hand-held shots, shots in low-light environments, etc. Because the IS is optical, it will not deteriorate the quality of the image as digital image stabilization does. However, using the IS feature on a lens will drain the battery much faster. Due to power consumption concerns, we recommend that the IS be turned off when shooting from a tripod, or at high enough shutter speeds that hand movement will not be a concern. The IS controlled on the lens body, and if the lens has an IS feature, the switch will be next to the AF/MF switch next to the lens mount.

===Controls===
The T6i has two added buttons on top of the camera body, above the Mode Dial: DISP. and one for Auto-Focus (AF) functionality. The DISP. button will turn the LCD screen on/off when Live View is disengaged, and the AF allows for quick access to Auto-Focus settings.
====Mode Dial====
<gallery>

</gallery>
=====A-DEP=====
A-DEP (Automatic DEPth of Field) mode on the Canon Rebel is designed to maximize focus across a picture, and is primarily intended for landscapes or large groups of people. A-DEP must be used with AF turned on, as the camera will use the AF sensor array to search through the frame for the distance of all subjects, then determine aperture and shutter values to create a depth of field that will keep all subjects in focus. A-DEP is not recommended for moving subjects, portraits, or shots where foreground and background de-focus is desired. The only controllable exposure settings in A-DEP mode are ISO and Exposure compensation.

=====M=====
M (Manual) mode offers full control over all features on the Canon Rebel. All exposure settings and picture styles must be changed by the user. This allows for the most creative control over the camera, but also demands an understanding of the camera's features, and basic principals of photography. In manual mode, the shutter speed is controlled by the dial next to the shutter release button. Aperture is controlled by the same dial while the AV button on the back of the camera is pressed. ISO can be set by pressing the button on the top of the camera between the Mode Dial and the Shutter Speed Dial. While in M, you can choose Auto ISO.

=====Av=====
Av (Aperture Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed to let the user choose aperture values, and automatically determine shutter speed for correct exposure. While in Av mode, the dial next to the shutter button will control the aperture. ISO is controlled the same way as in M mode, and shutter speed is determined by the camera. Av mode is designed to let the user control depth of field in a shot (to customize deep of shallow focus), but may not be good for high speed subjects, as the camera may use a slow shutter speed to acquire correct exposure.

=====Tv=====
Tv (Shutter Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed for photography where shutter speed is crucial. In Tv mode, the shutter speed is controlled with the dial next to the shutter button. In this mode, the user determines shutter speed, and the camera will automatically determine an aperture value for correct exposure. ISO is controlled in the same manner as in M mode. Tv mode is designed for applications such as sports photography, where depth of field is not particularly important, but fast shutter speeds to minimize motion blur are desired.

=====P=====
P (Program Auto-Exposure) mode allows the camera to control both the shutter speed and the aperture value. Users may still set the ISO as in M mode. In P mode, the user may change the shutter / aperture combination by turning the dial next to the shutter button. When the user changes the shutter / aperture setting like this, the camera will automatically change both shutter speed and aperture value simultaneously to maintain correct exposure. This mode is good for shooting in rapidly changing environments, or learning how the combination of shutter and aperture change both exposure and visual elements within the picture.

=====CA=====
CA (Creative Auto) mode operates exactly like full automatic mode with several more user controlled options allowed. In CA mode, the user may turn the flash on or off, change exposure compensation, choose picture styles, and change the drive mode of the camera. All other values are locked to camera-control.

=====Auto (Green Square)=====
Auto mode locks all options into camera control. User cannot override any options on the camera, including exposure, picture style, or drive mode. Auto mode is not recommended for any shooting situation.

=====Other Still Photo Modes=====
The Canon Rebel has several specialized automatic modes, designed for various different applications. They mimic the manual control modes without giving the user any actual manual control of the camera. '''Flash Off''' mode runs like full auto, but locks out the flash. '''Portrait''' mode uses a wide aperture to defocus the background and emphasize the subject. '''Landscape''' mode uses a small aperture to create deep focus from the foreground to the background. '''Macro''' mode attempts to optimize exposure and shutter drive for close-up photography (NOTE: the close-focus distance of the rebel is determined by the lens, and will not change regardless of what mode the camera body is set to. To take photos with small subjects near the camera, check out a macro-specialized lens from Media Loan). '''Sports''' mode will use the fastest shutter speed possible to minimize motion blur in pictures. '''Night Portrait''' mode will fire the flash to get a clear photo of the foreground subject, and use a long shutter speed to capture the background. Although each of these modes has specific applications, manual camera modes will offer more control in any situation.

====Video Mode====
The T5i/T6i cameras have full-manual HD video functionality. Unlike other Rebel models at Media Loan, the video mode on the T5i/T6i is activated on the same switch '''near the Mode Dial as ON/OFF'''. This allows the user to easily change '''exposure modes with the mode dial''' while shooting video.
Turn the switch to the video camera icon to engage video mode. The mirror will open, and live view will automatically activate '''(the Q menu is disabled in video mode)'''. To record or stop recording video, press the live view button. You can change the exposure and image settings the same way in video mode as in photo mode (exterior buttons, touch screen). You can also adjust image settings in the '''MENU'''. Pressing '''INFO''' will display more or less information.
====Aperture / Exposure Compensation Button====
The '''Aperture / Exposure Compensation''' button (Av +/-) allows control over the aperture while in manual shooting mode. While in other modes, the button controls exposure compensation, allowing the user to make the camera expose lighter or darker than the internal meter would under normal operation.

====Quick Control Button (Q) / Q Menu====
The '''Quick Control (Q)''' button allows camera settings to be controlled via the cross keys when the '''Q Menu''' is engaged. To use the quick control feature, turn off Live View and press the Q button. You can then use the cross keys to select the setting you wish to change.

====Display Button====
'''T6i ONLY'''. The '''Display''' (DISP) button on the camera will turn the the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the '''Display''' button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.

====Info Button====
The '''INFO''' button on the camera will turn the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the INFO button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.
When Live View mode is engaged, the INFO button will display exposure settings on the LCD screen. Press the INFO button multiple times to display more or less settings.

====Depth-of-field Preview Button====
The aperture opening changes only at the moment when the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open. Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the LCD screen, the depth of field will look narrow. Press the depth-of-field preview button (located on the camera body near the lens mount) to stop down the lens to the current aperture setting and check the actual depth of field (range of acceptable focus). This will darken the viewfinder considerably. This button can also be used to display the exposure settings in the bottom of the viewfinder.

===Live View===
Both the T5i/T6i are capable of shooting in Live View mode. This will open up the mirror and the shutter in the camera body and display a live image from the camera's sensor on the screen. To turn live view on or off, press the button on the camera next to the eyepiece with the circular red Record logo and a small logo of the camera back. You can enable/disable Live View mode in the MENU.
While in Live View, auto focus will be severely limited. All video is shot in Live View mode. While the camera is in Live View, '''DO NOT''' point the camera at the sun, as the sensor is exposed and will be damaged. Note that the appearance of the image on the screen in live view mode does not reflect the brightness of the actual picture. Always use the meter or histogram, as the brightness of the LCD cannot be trusted.
While the camera is in video mode, live view mode will turn on automatically. In this case, the '''Live View''' button becomes the '''Record / Stop''' button for video recording.

===Metering Modes===
The Canon Rebels have built-in light meter systems. The metering modes measure the light of an image in order to determine whether or not it is properly exposed. The light meter is displayed in multiple places, including in the bottom of the viewfinder, in the Q Menu, and the bottom of the LCD screen in Live View mode.
T5i/T6i both have four different modes to meter the lighting in a scene.
* '''Evaluative Metering''' is the camera's standard metering mode. It is suited for most shooting situations, including some moderate back-lighting of a subject.
* '''Partial Metering''' is effective when the background is significantly brighter or darker than the subject.
* '''Center-Weighted Average Metering''' takes the average of lighting across the frame with slight preference given to lighting in the center of the frame.
* '''Spot Metering''' meters from a small area in the center of the frame. Spot metering is the most accurate, but only accounts for a small part of the picture, so several meter readings may be necessary to evaluate the lighting of a scene.

===Shutter Drive Modes===
Shutter drive modes determine the way the camera will react when the shutter button is pressed. The T5i/T6i both have:
* '''Single Shooting''' will take a picture each time the shutter button is fully depressed.
* '''Continuous Shooting''' will take pictures as long as the shutter button is pressed down. The camera will take pictures as fast as the shutter mechanism and the data buffer will allow. (max. aprox. 3 shots/second)
* '''Self Timer / Remote Control''' will allow the shutter to be released via wired or wireless remote, or, if the shutter button is depressed, take a single shot after 2 or 10 seconds.
The T6i has some additional drive features that the T5i doesn’t:
* '''Single silent shooting''' is single shooting with less sound
* '''Silent continuous shooting''' is continuous shooting with less sound
* '''Self-timer: Continuous''' Press the up and down arrow keys to set the number of multiple shots (2 to 10) to be taken with the self-timer. 10 seconds after you press the shutter button, the set number of multiple shots will be taken.

===Image Size and Quality===
All Rebels have a number of image size and quality options. In most cases, the best option is to shoot at the highest resolution and quality possible, but space and processing limitations can make high-resolution images impractical.
===RAW Images===
Raw images are a direct feed from the camera's image sensor. Due to this, Raw files are extremely large and versatile. Raw image files have far better dynamic range than JPEG image files. Settings such as ISO and White balance can be changed during post processing, because Raw image files do not bake info into the image.

====JPEG Images====
JPEG images are compressed image files that save memory space by removing some of the detail and dynamic range from photographs. Canon Rebels apply a noise reduction process during the creation of JPEG images, which can make images look smoother in low-ISO situations, but can create a large amount of digital artifacts in high-ISO images. The T5i and T6i both have various resolution and quality settings for JPEG image capture.

===Menu System===
The full menu system of the Rebels can be accessed by pressing the '''MENU''' button on the back of the camera by the viewfinder. Image quality settings, picture style customization, memory management, screen brightness, and more are controlled from within the main menu. Use the cross keys to navigate the menu. Use the '''SET''' button to choose the highlighted option. At any time you can return to the main menu by pressing the '''MENU''' button again, or the home screen by halfway depressing the '''shutter release'''.

===Quick Exposure Settings Guide===
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the T5i/T6i. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder (enable with the depth-of-field preview button) and the LCD screen. The main ways to adjust exposure settings is with the top scroll wheel, the touch screen, set and cross keys, and the ISO and Av buttons.
The exposure settings can be adjusted in multiple ways:
* '''Exterior buttons:''' In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. To adjust the shutter speed, scroll back and forth with the top wheel. Aperture can be changed while holding down the Av button and scrolling with the top wheel. To adjust the ISO, press the ISO button (located on top of the camera near the mode dial) and then use the scroll wheel to make a selection.
* '''Q Menu (Live View Off):''' Enable the Q menu by turning off Live View. You can then adjust exposure settings in manual shooting modes. Press the Q button to enable selections and set button to go into specific settings. You can use the touch screen instead of buttons, as well as the exterior buttons.
* '''Live View:''' Enable the manipulation of the exposure settings in Live View by pressing the INFO button. Multiple depressions of INFO will enable various settings. Once engaged, you can use the touch screen or exterior buttons.

=== Custom White Balance ===
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure under the actual light source to be used.

'''Photograph a white object.'''
* The plain, white object should fill the spot metering circle.
* Focus manually and set the standard exposure for the white object.
* You can have have any white balance set for initial photograph--AWB, daylight, etc.

'''Select Custom White Balance in the menus.'''
* Under the second camera sub menu, select Custom White Balance, then press set.
* The photo you took should appear and then select OK and this white balance data will be imported.
* When the menu reappears, press the MENU button to exit the menu.

'''Make sure you are on the custom white balance setting.'''
* Press the WB button or the Quick Menu and select custom white balance and press set.
[[File:Media Loan Custom White Balance.png|none|thumb|100x100px|alt=Icon for Custom White Balance with 2 triagles on the bottom corners and a rounded black rectangle in the middle.]]
=== Putting your Media onto a Computer ===
There are two ways to put photos and videos onto a computer from you camera.
* '''SD card:''' Remove the SD card from your camera. Use a card reader from media loan to connect it to the computer via a USB mini to USB A cable. a folder should pop up automatically to the computer desktop, or be seen in the computer's file management system like Apples “Finder”. Remember to “eject” the folder before disconnecting the SD card.
* '''Direct connection:''' Connect your camera to the computer using a USB mini to USB A cable. the cable connects to a socket on your camera labeled “A/V out Digital” behind a rubber flap. Once connected turn on you camera and open a photo viewing software like Apples “Photos” desktop application. Within the application, your photos from the camera should be available as a folder. It should work similarly on the equivalent Windows photo application.

==Troubleshooting==

See [[Troubleshooting Media Equipment]] Guide for general information.

==Media Loan Gear it Connects With Well==

See the [[Media Loan Catalog]] for more info about the below items.
* EF and EF-S Lenses like the fisheye (shown right)
* Flash to add on top (shown right)
* Tripods and other stabilizers
* Other cameras for a multi-cam shoot
* Remote for time-lapse or wireless triggering
* Lighting for video and lighting control tools
* Zoom H4n Audio Recorder and microphones for higher quality audio


</div>

<div class="col-md-1"></div>

<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">

{{GA Proficiency Information

|Testlink= [https://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Canon_Rebel_Proficiency_Test Rebel Proficiency Test]

}}



{{Precautions, Help, and Other Wikis for all Media Loan Gear

|Exceptions=

*'''For This Gear Specifically'''

** Don't point camera toward Sun.
** Don't leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!
** Don't use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera
** Don't store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals
** Don't touch the mirror or sensor
** Don't please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!
}}





</div>


</div>


</div>



__NOEDITSECTION__
[[category:Digital Cameras and Accessories]]

Canon Rebel T5i/T6i/T7i Gear Guide

2026-06-17T18:17:06Z

Zornesn:

{{Media Loan Covid Message}}

<div class="container-fluid">

<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">

<div class="lead">

<div class="lead">[[File:Media Loan Logo.png|left|frameless|90x90px]]Our most popular camera for both photo and video. </div>

<div class="pull-right"></div></div>

{{#ev:youtube|z-hYgQuEDRc|800|center}}

==Overview==
The Canon Rebel can be easy to use for beginners and has many features and controls for advanced users as well. This camera can be used with many other items at Media Loan, especially our variety of lenses, giving camera users the ability to get a wide variety of shots. We have many models for Canon Rebels. Starting form oldest to newest model, they are: XSi, T1i, T2i, T5i, T6i and T7i.
[http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/images/8/8b/Rebel_t5i_guide.pdf Canon Rebel T5i Complete Manual]

==Differences in the Models==
{{Collapsed|
=== New Features to the T5i/T6i===
The newer Rebel models have a separate video mode switch, a flip-out LCD monitor, touch screen functionality, and a depth-of-field preview button.
===LCD Flip-out Screen===
To flip the monitor out, pull on the right side of the screen. When it is swung out you can rotate it up, down, or over 180 degrees to face the subject. This allows you to view your Live View image or exposure settings from various angles.

===Touch Screen===
The LCD screen monitor on the T5i/T6i has touch screen capabilities, unlike the other Rebel models available at Media Loan. You can use the touch screen to navigate the MENU, adjust settings, and change exposure. It is automatically activated in Live View mode and the MENU; with Live View off you will need to press the Q button to activate the touch screen and navigate the Q Menu. Touch screen can be enabled/disabled in the MENU. The touch shutter function, activated in Live View mode, enables you to take a picture by simply tapping the LCD screen with your finger.

===T5i/T6i Differences===
The Canon Rebel T5i and T6i are very similar in design and functionality. They are both equipped with the same censor, the APS-C 332.3mm2 and have the same ISO range of 100-12,800. Media Loan has very few T6i’s available. Here are the major differences between these models:
* Megapixels: 18MP – T5i vs. 24.2MP – T6i
* Pixels: T5i – Bigger pixels, better in low-light vs. T6i – More pixels, higher resolution
* Even though they have the same ISO range, the T6i handles noise better
* The T6i has more Auto-Focus (AF) points
They have slight differences in exterior buttons, explained below.

===T5i Diagrams===
<gallery>
File:T5i front.jpg|T5i front diagram
File:T5i back.jpg|T5i front diagram
File:T5i Dial.jpg|T5i front diagram
</gallery>

===T6i Diagrams===
<gallery>
[[File:Canon T6i Front Diagram.png|none|thumb|186x186px|T6i Front Diagram ]][[File:Canon Rebel T6i Back Diagram.png|none|thumb|177x177px|T6i Back Diagram]][[File:Canon T6i Mode Dial.png|none|thumb|178x178px]]
</gallery>
}}

==How to Use It==

===Battery===

To insert a battery into the Canon Rebel:
# Open the battery door located on the bottom of the camera by pulling on the latch and swinging the door open.
# Align the battery attachment on the camera to the attachment in the slot.
# Slide the battery into place and lock it in.
# Close the battery door.

The battery will only fit in one way, so if it does not seem to fit properly, the battery is not oriented correctly. When powering the camera off, it takes several seconds for it to clean the sensor, so make sure that the "Sensor Cleaning" logo is no longer on the screen before removing the battery.
To charge the battery, slide it into the provided charger and then plug the charger into a standard 120 VAC outlet. '''Do not charge more than 24 hours. Do not use any charger other than the one provided with the camera.'''

====Battery Life====
The Canon Rebel shows charge level in three stages: "Battery OK", "Battery Low", and "Needs to be Charged". To conserve battery life, the Rebel will go into a sleep mode after a period of disuse with default settings. To wake the camera, press the shutter button down halfway. If you know you will not be using the camera, it is best to fully turn the camera off.

===Camera Memory===
The T5i/T6i/T7i can use SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards. Most Media Loan Rebels will come with a 16 gigabyte card already in the camera. If you wish to use your own card, make sure the speed rating is at least Class 4 for RAW photos, and Class 10 45mb/s for video.
To switch memory cards, open the door on the back of the camera's hand grip, and press the back of the memory card. The card will pop out far enough to grab the back. Remove the card. To insert a new card, make sure it is oriented correctly, and insert the new memory card until it stops.

===Canon Rebel Lenses===
The Canon Rebel will accept any Canon EF of EF-S bayonet lenses. Media Loan has several different zoom and prime lenses that can be checked out alongside a Canon Rebel. Prime lenses (fixed focal length) are recommended for faster apertures and picture quality, while zoom lenses are recommended for changing shooting settings, or long telephoto applications.
====Removing and Replacing Lenses====
'''Please do not remove the included kit lens from the camera unless you intend to attach a different lens immediately.''' On the Canon Rebel, there is a half-circle shaped button on the right side of the lens mount (viewed from the front of the camera). To remove the lens, press this button, and turn the lens approximately 90 degrees clockwise. To attach a new lens, find the guide mark on the lens body. If it is an EF lens, the guide mark will be a red circle. If the lens is EF-S, the guide mark will be a white square. Line up the guide mark with the matching mark on the Canon rebel body, set the lens into the mount, and turn it approximately 90 degrees counter clockwise until it locks into place.

When attaching or detaching the lens, '''take care to prevent dust from entering the camera through the lens mount.''' Removing the lens can cause debris to get inside the camera making the camera highly susceptible to serious damage. If the lens is removed, avoid putting your fingers inside the camera. If the mirror, or any other part of the inside of this camera gets dirty, please do not try to clean it yourself and bring it to Media Loan so that a qualified staff member can service the camera.
====Auto / Manual Focus Switch====
The Canon Rebel uses an in-lens focusing system, which is switched on and off on the body of the lens. Regardless of the settings on the camera body, if the switch on the lens is set to MF (Manual Focus), the camera will not perform AF (Auto Focus) functions.
====Image Stabilization====
Some canon lenses feature an optical IS (Image Stabilization) function. This can be useful for shooting fast-moving hand-held shots, shots in low-light environments, etc. Because the IS is optical, it will not deteriorate the quality of the image as digital image stabilization does. However, using the IS feature on a lens will drain the battery much faster. Due to power consumption concerns, we recommend that the IS be turned off when shooting from a tripod, or at high enough shutter speeds that hand movement will not be a concern. The IS controlled on the lens body, and if the lens has an IS feature, the switch will be next to the AF/MF switch next to the lens mount.

===Controls===
The T6i has two added buttons on top of the camera body, above the Mode Dial: DISP. and one for Auto-Focus (AF) functionality. The DISP. button will turn the LCD screen on/off when Live View is disengaged, and the AF allows for quick access to Auto-Focus settings.
====Mode Dial====
<gallery>

</gallery>
=====A-DEP=====
A-DEP (Automatic DEPth of Field) mode on the Canon Rebel is designed to maximize focus across a picture, and is primarily intended for landscapes or large groups of people. A-DEP must be used with AF turned on, as the camera will use the AF sensor array to search through the frame for the distance of all subjects, then determine aperture and shutter values to create a depth of field that will keep all subjects in focus. A-DEP is not recommended for moving subjects, portraits, or shots where foreground and background de-focus is desired. The only controllable exposure settings in A-DEP mode are ISO and Exposure compensation.

=====M=====
M (Manual) mode offers full control over all features on the Canon Rebel. All exposure settings and picture styles must be changed by the user. This allows for the most creative control over the camera, but also demands an understanding of the camera's features, and basic principals of photography. In manual mode, the shutter speed is controlled by the dial next to the shutter release button. Aperture is controlled by the same dial while the AV button on the back of the camera is pressed. ISO can be set by pressing the button on the top of the camera between the Mode Dial and the Shutter Speed Dial. While in M, you can choose Auto ISO.

=====Av=====
Av (Aperture Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed to let the user choose aperture values, and automatically determine shutter speed for correct exposure. While in Av mode, the dial next to the shutter button will control the aperture. ISO is controlled the same way as in M mode, and shutter speed is determined by the camera. Av mode is designed to let the user control depth of field in a shot (to customize deep of shallow focus), but may not be good for high speed subjects, as the camera may use a slow shutter speed to acquire correct exposure.

=====Tv=====
Tv (Shutter Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed for photography where shutter speed is crucial. In Tv mode, the shutter speed is controlled with the dial next to the shutter button. In this mode, the user determines shutter speed, and the camera will automatically determine an aperture value for correct exposure. ISO is controlled in the same manner as in M mode. Tv mode is designed for applications such as sports photography, where depth of field is not particularly important, but fast shutter speeds to minimize motion blur are desired.

=====P=====
P (Program Auto-Exposure) mode allows the camera to control both the shutter speed and the aperture value. Users may still set the ISO as in M mode. In P mode, the user may change the shutter / aperture combination by turning the dial next to the shutter button. When the user changes the shutter / aperture setting like this, the camera will automatically change both shutter speed and aperture value simultaneously to maintain correct exposure. This mode is good for shooting in rapidly changing environments, or learning how the combination of shutter and aperture change both exposure and visual elements within the picture.

=====CA=====
CA (Creative Auto) mode operates exactly like full automatic mode with several more user controlled options allowed. In CA mode, the user may turn the flash on or off, change exposure compensation, choose picture styles, and change the drive mode of the camera. All other values are locked to camera-control.

=====Auto (Green Square)=====
Auto mode locks all options into camera control. User cannot override any options on the camera, including exposure, picture style, or drive mode. Auto mode is not recommended for any shooting situation.

=====Other Still Photo Modes=====
The Canon Rebel has several specialized automatic modes, designed for various different applications. They mimic the manual control modes without giving the user any actual manual control of the camera. '''Flash Off''' mode runs like full auto, but locks out the flash. '''Portrait''' mode uses a wide aperture to defocus the background and emphasize the subject. '''Landscape''' mode uses a small aperture to create deep focus from the foreground to the background. '''Macro''' mode attempts to optimize exposure and shutter drive for close-up photography (NOTE: the close-focus distance of the rebel is determined by the lens, and will not change regardless of what mode the camera body is set to. To take photos with small subjects near the camera, check out a macro-specialized lens from Media Loan). '''Sports''' mode will use the fastest shutter speed possible to minimize motion blur in pictures. '''Night Portrait''' mode will fire the flash to get a clear photo of the foreground subject, and use a long shutter speed to capture the background. Although each of these modes has specific applications, manual camera modes will offer more control in any situation.

====Video Mode====
The T5i/T6i cameras have full-manual HD video functionality. Unlike other Rebel models at Media Loan, the video mode on the T5i/T6i is activated on the same switch '''near the Mode Dial as ON/OFF'''. This allows the user to easily change '''exposure modes with the mode dial''' while shooting video.
Turn the switch to the video camera icon to engage video mode. The mirror will open, and live view will automatically activate '''(the Q menu is disabled in video mode)'''. To record or stop recording video, press the live view button. You can change the exposure and image settings the same way in video mode as in photo mode (exterior buttons, touch screen). You can also adjust image settings in the '''MENU'''. Pressing '''INFO''' will display more or less information.
====Aperture / Exposure Compensation Button====
The '''Aperture / Exposure Compensation''' button (Av +/-) allows control over the aperture while in manual shooting mode. While in other modes, the button controls exposure compensation, allowing the user to make the camera expose lighter or darker than the internal meter would under normal operation.

====Quick Control Button (Q) / Q Menu====
The '''Quick Control (Q)''' button allows camera settings to be controlled via the cross keys when the '''Q Menu''' is engaged. To use the quick control feature, turn off Live View and press the Q button. You can then use the cross keys to select the setting you wish to change.

====Display Button====
'''T6i ONLY'''. The '''Display''' (DISP) button on the camera will turn the the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the '''Display''' button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.

====Info Button====
The '''INFO''' button on the camera will turn the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the INFO button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.
When Live View mode is engaged, the INFO button will display exposure settings on the LCD screen. Press the INFO button multiple times to display more or less settings.

====Depth-of-field Preview Button====
The aperture opening changes only at the moment when the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open. Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the LCD screen, the depth of field will look narrow. Press the depth-of-field preview button (located on the camera body near the lens mount) to stop down the lens to the current aperture setting and check the actual depth of field (range of acceptable focus). This will darken the viewfinder considerably. This button can also be used to display the exposure settings in the bottom of the viewfinder.

===Live View===
Both the T5i/T6i are capable of shooting in Live View mode. This will open up the mirror and the shutter in the camera body and display a live image from the camera's sensor on the screen. To turn live view on or off, press the button on the camera next to the eyepiece with the circular red Record logo and a small logo of the camera back. You can enable/disable Live View mode in the MENU.
While in Live View, auto focus will be severely limited. All video is shot in Live View mode. While the camera is in Live View, '''DO NOT''' point the camera at the sun, as the sensor is exposed and will be damaged. Note that the appearance of the image on the screen in live view mode does not reflect the brightness of the actual picture. Always use the meter or histogram, as the brightness of the LCD cannot be trusted.
While the camera is in video mode, live view mode will turn on automatically. In this case, the '''Live View''' button becomes the '''Record / Stop''' button for video recording.

===Metering Modes===
The Canon Rebels have built-in light meter systems. The metering modes measure the light of an image in order to determine whether or not it is properly exposed. The light meter is displayed in multiple places, including in the bottom of the viewfinder, in the Q Menu, and the bottom of the LCD screen in Live View mode.
T5i/T6i both have four different modes to meter the lighting in a scene.
* '''Evaluative Metering''' is the camera's standard metering mode. It is suited for most shooting situations, including some moderate back-lighting of a subject.
* '''Partial Metering''' is effective when the background is significantly brighter or darker than the subject.
* '''Center-Weighted Average Metering''' takes the average of lighting across the frame with slight preference given to lighting in the center of the frame.
* '''Spot Metering''' meters from a small area in the center of the frame. Spot metering is the most accurate, but only accounts for a small part of the picture, so several meter readings may be necessary to evaluate the lighting of a scene.

===Shutter Drive Modes===
Shutter drive modes determine the way the camera will react when the shutter button is pressed. The T5i/T6i both have:
* '''Single Shooting''' will take a picture each time the shutter button is fully depressed.
* '''Continuous Shooting''' will take pictures as long as the shutter button is pressed down. The camera will take pictures as fast as the shutter mechanism and the data buffer will allow. (max. aprox. 3 shots/second)
* '''Self Timer / Remote Control''' will allow the shutter to be released via wired or wireless remote, or, if the shutter button is depressed, take a single shot after 2 or 10 seconds.
The T6i has some additional drive features that the T5i doesn’t:
* '''Single silent shooting''' is single shooting with less sound
* '''Silent continuous shooting''' is continuous shooting with less sound
* '''Self-timer: Continuous''' Press the up and down arrow keys to set the number of multiple shots (2 to 10) to be taken with the self-timer. 10 seconds after you press the shutter button, the set number of multiple shots will be taken.

===Image Size and Quality===
All Rebels have a number of image size and quality options. In most cases, the best option is to shoot at the highest resolution and quality possible, but space and processing limitations can make high-resolution images impractical.
===RAW Images===
Raw images are a direct feed from the camera's image sensor. Due to this, Raw files are extremely large and versatile. Raw image files have far better dynamic range than JPEG image files. Settings such as ISO and White balance can be changed during post processing, because Raw image files do not bake info into the image.

====JPEG Images====
JPEG images are compressed image files that save memory space by removing some of the detail and dynamic range from photographs. Canon Rebels apply a noise reduction process during the creation of JPEG images, which can make images look smoother in low-ISO situations, but can create a large amount of digital artifacts in high-ISO images. The T5i and T6i both have various resolution and quality settings for JPEG image capture.

===Menu System===
The full menu system of the Rebels can be accessed by pressing the '''MENU''' button on the back of the camera by the viewfinder. Image quality settings, picture style customization, memory management, screen brightness, and more are controlled from within the main menu. Use the cross keys to navigate the menu. Use the '''SET''' button to choose the highlighted option. At any time you can return to the main menu by pressing the '''MENU''' button again, or the home screen by halfway depressing the '''shutter release'''.

===Quick Exposure Settings Guide===
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the T5i/T6i. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder (enable with the depth-of-field preview button) and the LCD screen. The main ways to adjust exposure settings is with the top scroll wheel, the touch screen, set and cross keys, and the ISO and Av buttons.
The exposure settings can be adjusted in multiple ways:
* '''Exterior buttons:''' In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. To adjust the shutter speed, scroll back and forth with the top wheel. Aperture can be changed while holding down the Av button and scrolling with the top wheel. To adjust the ISO, press the ISO button (located on top of the camera near the mode dial) and then use the scroll wheel to make a selection.
* '''Q Menu (Live View Off):''' Enable the Q menu by turning off Live View. You can then adjust exposure settings in manual shooting modes. Press the Q button to enable selections and set button to go into specific settings. You can use the touch screen instead of buttons, as well as the exterior buttons.
* '''Live View:''' Enable the manipulation of the exposure settings in Live View by pressing the INFO button. Multiple depressions of INFO will enable various settings. Once engaged, you can use the touch screen or exterior buttons.

=== Custom White Balance ===
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure under the actual light source to be used.

'''Photograph a white object.'''
* The plain, white object should fill the spot metering circle.
* Focus manually and set the standard exposure for the white object.
* You can have have any white balance set for initial photograph--AWB, daylight, etc.

'''Select Custom White Balance in the menus.'''
* Under the second camera sub menu, select Custom White Balance, then press set.
* The photo you took should appear and then select OK and this white balance data will be imported.
* When the menu reappears, press the MENU button to exit the menu.

'''Make sure you are on the custom white balance setting.'''
* Press the WB button or the Quick Menu and select custom white balance and press set.
[[File:Media Loan Custom White Balance.png|none|thumb|100x100px|alt=Icon for Custom White Balance with 2 triagles on the bottom corners and a rounded black rectangle in the middle.]]
=== Putting your Media onto a Computer ===
There are two ways to put photos and videos onto a computer from you camera.
* '''SD card:''' Remove the SD card from your camera. Use a card reader from media loan to connect it to the computer via a USB mini to USB A cable. a folder should pop up automatically to the computer desktop, or be seen in the computer's file management system like Apples “Finder”. Remember to “eject” the folder before disconnecting the SD card.
* '''Direct connection:''' Connect your camera to the computer using a USB mini to USB A cable. the cable connects to a socket on your camera labeled “A/V out Digital” behind a rubber flap. Once connected turn on you camera and open a photo viewing software like Apples “Photos” desktop application. Within the application, your photos from the camera should be available as a folder. It should work similarly on the equivalent Windows photo application.

==Troubleshooting==

See [[Troubleshooting Media Equipment]] Guide for general information.

==Media Loan Gear it Connects With Well==

See the [[Media Loan Catalog]] for more info about the below items.
* EF and EF-S Lenses like the fisheye (shown right)
* Flash to add on top (shown right)
* Tripods and other stabilizers
* Other cameras for a multi-cam shoot
* Remote for time-lapse or wireless triggering
* Lighting for video and lighting control tools
* Zoom H4n Audio Recorder and microphones for higher quality audio


</div>

<div class="col-md-1"></div>

<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">

{{GA Proficiency Information

|Testlink= [https://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Canon_Rebel_Proficiency_Test Rebel Proficiency Test]

}}



{{Precautions, Help, and Other Wikis for all Media Loan Gear

|Exceptions=

*'''For This Gear Specifically'''

** Don't point camera toward Sun.
** Don't leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!
** Don't use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera
** Don't store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals
** Don't touch the mirror or sensor
** Don't please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!
}}





</div>


</div>


</div>



__NOEDITSECTION__
[[category:Digital Cameras and Accessories]]

Canon Rebel T5i/T6i/T7i Gear Guide

2026-06-17T18:14:19Z

Zornesn:

{{Media Loan Covid Message}}

<div class="container-fluid">

<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">

<div class="lead">

<div class="lead">[[File:Media Loan Logo.png|left|frameless|90x90px]]Our most popular camera for both photo and video. </div>

<div class="pull-right"></div></div>

{{#ev:youtube|z-hYgQuEDRc|800|center}}

==Overview==
The Canon Rebel can be easy to use for beginners and has many features and controls for advanced users as well. This camera can be used with many other items at Media Loan, especially our variety of lenses, giving camera users the ability to get a wide variety of shots. We have many models for Canon Rebels. Starting form oldest to newest model, they are: XSi, T1i, T2i, T5i, T6i and T7i.
[http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/images/8/8b/Rebel_t5i_guide.pdf Canon Rebel T5i Complete Manual]

==Differences in the Models==
{{Collapsed|
=== New Features to the T5i/T6i===
The newer Rebel models have a separate video mode switch, a flip-out LCD monitor, touch screen functionality, and a depth-of-field preview button.
===LCD Flip-out Screen===
To flip the monitor out, pull on the right side of the screen. When it is swung out you can rotate it up, down, or over 180 degrees to face the subject. This allows you to view your Live View image or exposure settings from various angles.

===Touch Screen===
The LCD screen monitor on the T5i/T6i has touch screen capabilities, unlike the other Rebel models available at Media Loan. You can use the touch screen to navigate the MENU, adjust settings, and change exposure. It is automatically activated in Live View mode and the MENU; with Live View off you will need to press the Q button to activate the touch screen and navigate the Q Menu. Touch screen can be enabled/disabled in the MENU. The touch shutter function, activated in Live View mode, enables you to take a picture by simply tapping the LCD screen with your finger.

===T5i/T6i Differences===
The Canon Rebel T5i and T6i are very similar in design and functionality. They are both equipped with the same censor, the APS-C 332.3mm2 and have the same ISO range of 100-12,800. Media Loan has very few T6i’s available. Here are the major differences between these models:
* Megapixels: 18MP – T5i vs. 24.2MP – T6i
* Pixels: T5i – Bigger pixels, better in low-light vs. T6i – More pixels, higher resolution
* Even though they have the same ISO range, the T6i handles noise better
* The T6i has more Auto-Focus (AF) points
They have slight differences in exterior buttons, explained below.

===T5i Diagrams===
<gallery>
File:T5i front.jpg|T5i front diagram
File:T5i back.jpg|T5i front diagram
File:T5i Dial.jpg|T5i front diagram
</gallery>

===T6i Diagrams===
<gallery>
[[File:Canon T6i Front Diagram.png|none|thumb|186x186px|T6i Front Diagram ]][[File:Canon Rebel T6i Back Diagram.png|none|thumb|177x177px|T6i Back Diagram]][[File:Canon T6i Mode Dial.png|none|thumb|178x178px]]
</gallery>
}}

==How to Use It==

===Battery===

To insert a battery into the Canon Rebel:
# Open the battery door located on the bottom of the camera by pulling on the latch and swinging the door open.
# Align the battery attachment on the camera to the attachment in the slot.
# Slide the battery into place and lock it in.
# Close the battery door.

The battery will only fit in one way, so if it does not seem to fit properly, the battery is not oriented correctly. When powering the camera off, it takes several seconds for it to clean the sensor, so make sure that the "Sensor Cleaning" logo is no longer on the screen before removing the battery.
To charge the battery, slide it into the provided charger and then plug the charger into a standard 120 VAC outlet. '''Do not charge more than 24 hours. Do not use any charger other than the one provided with the camera.'''

====Battery Life====
The Canon Rebel shows charge level in three stages: "Battery OK", "Battery Low", and "Needs to be Charged". To conserve battery life, the Rebel will go into a sleep mode after a period of disuse with default settings. To wake the camera, press the shutter button down halfway. If you know you will not be using the camera, it is best to fully turn the camera off.

===Camera Memory===
The T5i/T6i/T7i can use SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards. Most Media Loan Rebels will come with a 16 gigabyte card already in the camera. If you wish to use your own card, make sure the speed rating is at least Class 4 for RAW photos, and Class 10 45mb/s for video.
To switch memory cards, open the door on the back of the camera's hand grip, and press the back of the memory card. The card will pop out far enough to grab the back. Remove the card. To insert a new card, make sure it is oriented correctly, and insert the new memory card until it stops.

===Canon Rebel Lenses===
The Canon Rebel will accept any Canon EF of EF-S bayonet lenses. Media Loan has several different zoom and prime lenses that can be checked out alongside a Canon Rebel. Prime lenses (fixed focal length) are recommended for faster apertures and picture quality, while zoom lenses are recommended for changing shooting settings, or long telephoto applications.
====Removing and Replacing Lenses====
'''Please do not remove the included kit lens from the camera unless you intend to attach a different lens immediately.''' On the Canon Rebel, there is a half-circle shaped button on the right side of the lens mount (viewed from the front of the camera). To remove the lens, press this button, and turn the lens approximately 90 degrees clockwise. To attach a new lens, find the guide mark on the lens body. If it is an EF lens, the guide mark will be a red circle. If the lens is EF-S, the guide mark will be a white square. Line up the guide mark with the matching mark on the Canon rebel body, set the lens into the mount, and turn it approximately 90 degrees counter clockwise until it locks into place.

When attaching or detaching the lens, '''take care to prevent dust from entering the camera through the lens mount.''' Removing the lens can cause debris to get inside the camera making the camera highly susceptible to serious damage. If the lens is removed, avoid putting your fingers inside the camera. If the mirror, or any other part of the inside of this camera gets dirty, please do not try to clean it yourself and bring it to Media Loan so that a qualified staff member can service the camera.
====Auto / Manual Focus Switch====
The Canon Rebel uses an in-lens focusing system, which is switched on and off on the body of the lens. Regardless of the settings on the camera body, if the switch on the lens is set to MF (Manual Focus), the camera will not perform AF (Auto Focus) functions.
====Image Stabilization====
Some canon lenses feature an optical IS (Image Stabilization) function. This can be useful for shooting fast-moving hand-held shots, shots in low-light environments, etc. Because the IS is optical, it will not deteriorate the quality of the image as digital image stabilization does. However, using the IS feature on a lens will drain the battery much faster. Due to power consumption concerns, we recommend that the IS be turned off when shooting from a tripod, or at high enough shutter speeds that hand movement will not be a concern. The IS controlled on the lens body, and if the lens has an IS feature, the switch will be next to the AF/MF switch next to the lens mount.

===Controls===
The T6i has two added buttons on top of the camera body, above the Mode Dial: DISP. and one for Auto-Focus (AF) functionality. The DISP. button will turn the LCD screen on/off when Live View is disengaged, and the AF allows for quick access to Auto-Focus settings.
====Mode Dial====
<gallery>

</gallery>
=====A-DEP=====
A-DEP (Automatic DEPth of Field) mode on the Canon Rebel is designed to maximize focus across a picture, and is primarily intended for landscapes or large groups of people. A-DEP must be used with AF turned on, as the camera will use the AF sensor array to search through the frame for the distance of all subjects, then determine aperture and shutter values to create a depth of field that will keep all subjects in focus. A-DEP is not recommended for moving subjects, portraits, or shots where foreground and background de-focus is desired. The only controllable exposure settings in A-DEP mode are ISO and Exposure compensation.

=====M=====
M (Manual) mode offers full control over all features on the Canon Rebel. All exposure settings and picture styles must be changed by the user. This allows for the most creative control over the camera, but also demands an understanding of the camera's features, and basic principals of photography. In manual mode, the shutter speed is controlled by the dial next to the shutter release button. Aperture is controlled by the same dial while the AV button on the back of the camera is pressed. ISO can be set by pressing the button on the top of the camera between the Mode Dial and the Shutter Speed Dial. While in M, you can choose Auto ISO.

=====Av=====
Av (Aperture Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed to let the user choose aperture values, and automatically determine shutter speed for correct exposure. While in Av mode, the dial next to the shutter button will control the aperture. ISO is controlled the same way as in M mode, and shutter speed is determined by the camera. Av mode is designed to let the user control depth of field in a shot (to customize deep of shallow focus), but may not be good for high speed subjects, as the camera may use a slow shutter speed to acquire correct exposure.

=====Tv=====
Tv (Shutter Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed for photography where shutter speed is crucial. In Tv mode, the shutter speed is controlled with the dial next to the shutter button. In this mode, the user determines shutter speed, and the camera will automatically determine an aperture value for correct exposure. ISO is controlled in the same manner as in M mode. Tv mode is designed for applications such as sports photography, where depth of field is not particularly important, but fast shutter speeds to minimize motion blur are desired.

=====P=====
P (Program Auto-Exposure) mode allows the camera to control both the shutter speed and the aperture value. Users may still set the ISO as in M mode. In P mode, the user may change the shutter / aperture combination by turning the dial next to the shutter button. When the user changes the shutter / aperture setting like this, the camera will automatically change both shutter speed and aperture value simultaneously to maintain correct exposure. This mode is good for shooting in rapidly changing environments, or learning how the combination of shutter and aperture change both exposure and visual elements within the picture.

=====CA=====
CA (Creative Auto) mode operates exactly like full automatic mode with several more user controlled options allowed. In CA mode, the user may turn the flash on or off, change exposure compensation, choose picture styles, and change the drive mode of the camera. All other values are locked to camera-control.

=====Auto (Green Square)=====
Auto mode locks all options into camera control. User cannot override any options on the camera, including exposure, picture style, or drive mode. Auto mode is not recommended for any shooting situation.

=====Other Still Photo Modes=====
The Canon Rebel has several specialized automatic modes, designed for various different applications. They mimic the manual control modes without giving the user any actual manual control of the camera. '''Flash Off''' mode runs like full auto, but locks out the flash. '''Portrait''' mode uses a wide aperture to defocus the background and emphasize the subject. '''Landscape''' mode uses a small aperture to create deep focus from the foreground to the background. '''Macro''' mode attempts to optimize exposure and shutter drive for close-up photography (NOTE: the close-focus distance of the rebel is determined by the lens, and will not change regardless of what mode the camera body is set to. To take photos with small subjects near the camera, check out a macro-specialized lens from Media Loan). '''Sports''' mode will use the fastest shutter speed possible to minimize motion blur in pictures. '''Night Portrait''' mode will fire the flash to get a clear photo of the foreground subject, and use a long shutter speed to capture the background. Although each of these modes has specific applications, manual camera modes will offer more control in any situation.

====Video Mode====
The T5i/T6i cameras have full-manual HD video functionality. Unlike other Rebel models at Media Loan, the video mode on the T5i/T6i is activated on the same switch '''near the Mode Dial as ON/OFF'''. This allows the user to easily change '''exposure modes with the mode dial''' while shooting video.
Turn the switch to the video camera icon to engage video mode. The mirror will open, and live view will automatically activate '''(the Q menu is disabled in video mode)'''. To record or stop recording video, press the live view button. You can change the exposure and image settings the same way in video mode as in photo mode (exterior buttons, touch screen). You can also adjust image settings in the '''MENU'''. Pressing '''INFO''' will display more or less information.
====Aperture / Exposure Compensation Button====
The '''Aperture / Exposure Compensation''' button (Av +/-) allows control over the aperture while in manual shooting mode. While in other modes, the button controls exposure compensation, allowing the user to make the camera expose lighter or darker than the internal meter would under normal operation.

====Quick Control Button (Q) / Q Menu====
The '''Quick Control (Q)''' button allows camera settings to be controlled via the cross keys when the '''Q Menu''' is engaged. To use the quick control feature, turn off Live View and press the Q button. You can then use the cross keys to select the setting you wish to change.

====Display Button====
'''T6i ONLY'''. The '''Display''' (DISP) button on the camera will turn the the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the '''Display''' button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.

====Info Button====
The '''INFO''' button on the camera will turn the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the INFO button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.
When Live View mode is engaged, the INFO button will display exposure settings on the LCD screen. Press the INFO button multiple times to display more or less settings.

====Depth-of-field Preview Button====
The aperture opening changes only at the moment when the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open. Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the LCD screen, the depth of field will look narrow. Press the depth-of-field preview button (located on the camera body near the lens mount) to stop down the lens to the current aperture setting and check the actual depth of field (range of acceptable focus). This will darken the viewfinder considerably. This button can also be used to display the exposure settings in the bottom of the viewfinder.

===Live View===
Both the T5i/T6i are capable of shooting in Live View mode. This will open up the mirror and the shutter in the camera body and display a live image from the camera's sensor on the screen. To turn live view on or off, press the button on the camera next to the eyepiece with the circular red Record logo and a small logo of the camera back. You can enable/disable Live View mode in the MENU.
While in Live View, auto focus will be severely limited. All video is shot in Live View mode. While the camera is in Live View, '''DO NOT''' point the camera at the sun, as the sensor is exposed and will be damaged. Note that the appearance of the image on the screen in live view mode does not reflect the brightness of the actual picture. Always use the meter or histogram, as the brightness of the LCD cannot be trusted.
While the camera is in video mode, live view mode will turn on automatically. In this case, the '''Live View''' button becomes the '''Record / Stop''' button for video recording.

===Metering Modes===
The Canon Rebels have built-in light meter systems. The metering modes measure the light of an image in order to determine whether or not it is properly exposed. The light meter is displayed in multiple places, including in the bottom of the viewfinder, in the Q Menu, and the bottom of the LCD screen in Live View mode.
T5i/T6i both have four different modes to meter the lighting in a scene.
* '''Evaluative Metering''' is the camera's standard metering mode. It is suited for most shooting situations, including some moderate back-lighting of a subject.
* '''Partial Metering''' is effective when the background is significantly brighter or darker than the subject.
* '''Center-Weighted Average Metering''' takes the average of lighting across the frame with slight preference given to lighting in the center of the frame.
* '''Spot Metering''' meters from a small area in the center of the frame. Spot metering is the most accurate, but only accounts for a small part of the picture, so several meter readings may be necessary to evaluate the lighting of a scene.

===Shutter Drive Modes===
Shutter drive modes determine the way the camera will react when the shutter button is pressed. The T5i/T6i both have:
* '''Single Shooting''' will take a picture each time the shutter button is fully depressed.
* '''Continuous Shooting''' will take pictures as long as the shutter button is pressed down. The camera will take pictures as fast as the shutter mechanism and the data buffer will allow. (max. aprox. 3 shots/second)
* '''Self Timer / Remote Control''' will allow the shutter to be released via wired or wireless remote, or, if the shutter button is depressed, take a single shot after 2 or 10 seconds.
The T6i has some additional drive features that the T5i doesn’t:
* '''Single silent shooting''' is single shooting with less sound
* '''Silent continuous shooting''' is continuous shooting with less sound
* '''Self-timer: Continuous''' Press the up and down arrow keys to set the number of multiple shots (2 to 10) to be taken with the self-timer. 10 seconds after you press the shutter button, the set number of multiple shots will be taken.

===Image Size and Quality===
All Rebels have a number of image size and quality options. In most cases, the best option is to shoot at the highest resolution and quality possible, but space and processing limitations can make high-resolution images impractical.
===RAW Images===
Raw images are a direct feed from the camera's image sensor. Due to this, Raw files are extremely large and versatile. Raw image files have far better dynamic range than JPEG image files. Settings such as ISO and White balance can be changed during post processing, because Raw image files do not bake info into the image.

====JPEG Images====
JPEG images are compressed image files that save memory space by removing some of the detail and dynamic range from photographs. Canon Rebels apply a noise reduction process during the creation of JPEG images, which can make images look smoother in low-ISO situations, but can create a large amount of digital artifacts in high-ISO images. The T5i and T6i both have various resolution and quality settings for JPEG image capture.

===Menu System===
The full menu system of the Rebels can be accessed by pressing the '''MENU''' button on the back of the camera by the viewfinder. Image quality settings, picture style customization, memory management, screen brightness, and more are controlled from within the main menu. Use the cross keys to navigate the menu. Use the '''SET''' button to choose the highlighted option. At any time you can return to the main menu by pressing the '''MENU''' button again, or the home screen by halfway depressing the '''shutter release'''.

===Quick Exposure Settings Guide===
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the T5i/T6i. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder (enable with the depth-of-field preview button) and the LCD screen. The main ways to adjust exposure settings is with the top scroll wheel, the touch screen, set and cross keys, and the ISO and Av buttons.
The exposure settings can be adjusted in multiple ways:
* '''Exterior buttons:''' In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. To adjust the shutter speed, scroll back and forth with the top wheel. Aperture can be changed while holding down the Av button and scrolling with the top wheel. To adjust the ISO, press the ISO button (located on top of the camera near the mode dial) and then use the scroll wheel to make a selection.
* '''Q Menu (Live View Off):''' Enable the Q menu by turning off Live View. You can then adjust exposure settings in manual shooting modes. Press the Q button to enable selections and set button to go into specific settings. You can use the touch screen instead of buttons, as well as the exterior buttons.
* '''Live View:''' Enable the manipulation of the exposure settings in Live View by pressing the INFO button. Multiple depressions of INFO will enable various settings. Once engaged, you can use the touch screen or exterior buttons.

=== Custom White Balance ===
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure under the actual light source to be used.

'''Photograph a white object.'''
* The plain, white object should fill the spot metering circle.
* Focus manually and set the standard exposure for the white object.
* You can have have any white balance set for initial photograph--AWB, daylight, etc.

'''Select Custom White Balance in the menus.'''
* Under the second camera sub menu, select Custom White Balance, then press set.
* The photo you took should appear and then select OK and this white balance data will be imported.
* When the menu reappears, press the MENU button to exit the menu.

'''Make sure you are on the custom white balance setting.'''
* Press the WB button or the Quick Menu and select custom white balance and press set.
[[File:Media Loan Custom White Balance.png|none|thumb|100x100px|alt=Icon for Custom White Balance with 2 triagles on the bottom corners and a rounded black rectangle in the middle.]]
=== Putting your Media onto a Computer ===
There are two ways to put photos and videos onto a computer from you camera.
* '''SD card:''' Remove the SD card from your camera. Use a card reader from media loan to connect it to the computer via a USB mini to USB A cable. a folder should pop up automatically to the computer desktop, or be seen in the computer's file management system like Apples “Finder”. Remember to “eject” the folder before disconnecting the SD card.
* '''Direct connection:''' Connect your camera to the computer using a USB mini to USB A cable. the cable connects to a socket on your camera labeled “A/V out Digital” behind a rubber flap. Once connected turn on you camera and open a photo viewing software like Apples “Photos” desktop application. Within the application, your photos from the camera should be available as a folder. It should work similarly on the equivalent Windows photo application.

==Troubleshooting==

See [[Troubleshooting Media Equipment]] Guide for general information.

==Media Loan Gear it Connects With Well==

See the [[Media Loan Catalog]] for more info about the below items.
[[File:CanonRebelwithaddons.JPG|thumbnail|right|Rebel T6i with Fisheye lens, and flash added on top.]]
* EF and EF-S Lenses like the fisheye (shown right)
* Flash to add on top (shown right)
* Tripods and other stabilizers
* Other cameras for a multi-cam shoot
* Remote for time-lapse or wireless triggering
* Lighting for video and lighting control tools
* Zoom H4n Audio Recorder and microphones for higher quality audio


</div>

<div class="col-md-1"></div>

<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">

{{GA Proficiency Information

|Testlink= [https://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Canon_Rebel_Proficiency_Test Rebel Proficiency Test]

}}



{{Precautions, Help, and Other Wikis for all Media Loan Gear

|Exceptions=

*'''For This Gear Specifically'''

** Don't point camera toward Sun.
** Don't leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!
** Don't use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera
** Don't store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals
** Don't touch the mirror or sensor
** Don't please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!
}}





</div>


</div>


</div>



__NOEDITSECTION__
[[category:Digital Cameras and Accessories]]

Canon Rebel T5i/T6i/T7i Gear Guide

2026-06-17T18:11:47Z

Zornesn:

{{Media Loan Covid Message}}

<div class="container-fluid">

<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">

<div class="lead">

<div class="lead">[[File:Media Loan Logo.png|left|frameless|90x90px]]Our most popular camera for both photo and video. </div>

<div class="pull-right"></div></div>

{{#ev:youtube|z-hYgQuEDRc|800|center}}

==Overview==
The Canon Rebel can be easy to use for beginners and has many features and controls for advanced users as well. This camera can be used with many other items at Media Loan, especially our variety of lenses, giving camera users the ability to get a wide variety of shots. We have many models for Canon Rebels. Starting form oldest to newest model, they are: XSi, T1i, T2i, T5i, T6i and T7i.
[http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/images/8/8b/Rebel_t5i_guide.pdf Canon Rebel T5i Complete Manual]

==Differences in the Models==
{{Collapsed|
=== New Features to the T5i/T6i===
The newer Rebel models have a separate video mode switch, a flip-out LCD monitor, touch screen functionality, and a depth-of-field preview button.
===LCD Flip-out Screen===
To flip the monitor out, pull on the right side of the screen. When it is swung out you can rotate it up, down, or over 180 degrees to face the subject. This allows you to view your Live View image or exposure settings from various angles.

===Touch Screen===
The LCD screen monitor on the T5i/T6i has touch screen capabilities, unlike the other Rebel models available at Media Loan. You can use the touch screen to navigate the MENU, adjust settings, and change exposure. It is automatically activated in Live View mode and the MENU; with Live View off you will need to press the Q button to activate the touch screen and navigate the Q Menu. Touch screen can be enabled/disabled in the MENU. The touch shutter function, activated in Live View mode, enables you to take a picture by simply tapping the LCD screen with your finger.

===T5i/T6i Differences===
The Canon Rebel T5i and T6i are very similar in design and functionality. They are both equipped with the same censor, the APS-C 332.3mm2 and have the same ISO range of 100-12,800. Media Loan has very few T6i’s available. Here are the major differences between these models:
* Megapixels: 18MP – T5i vs. 24.2MP – T6i
* Pixels: T5i – Bigger pixels, better in low-light vs. T6i – More pixels, higher resolution
* Even though they have the same ISO range, the T6i handles noise better
* The T6i has more Auto-Focus (AF) points
They have slight differences in exterior buttons, explained below.

===T5i Diagrams===
<gallery>
File:T5i front.jpg|T5i front diagram
File:T5i back.jpg|T5i front diagram
File:T5i Dial.jpg|T5i front diagram
</gallery>

===T6i Diagrams===
<gallery>
[[File:Canon T6i Front Diagram.png|none|thumb|186x186px|T6i Front Diagram ]][[File:Canon Rebel T6i Back Diagram.png|none|thumb|177x177px|T6i Back Diagram]][[File:Canon T6i Mode Dial.png|none|thumb|178x178px]]
</gallery>
}}

==How to Use It==

===Battery===

To insert a battery into the Canon Rebel:
# Open the battery door located on the bottom of the camera by pulling on the latch and swinging the door open.
# Align the battery attachment on the camera to the attachment in the slot.
# Slide the battery into place and lock it in.
# Close the battery door.

The battery will only fit in one way, so if it does not seem to fit properly, the battery is not oriented correctly. When powering the camera off, it takes several seconds for it to clean the sensor, so make sure that the "Sensor Cleaning" logo is no longer on the screen before removing the battery.
To charge the battery, slide it into the provided charger and then plug the charger into a standard 120 VAC outlet. '''Do not charge more than 24 hours. Do not use any charger other than the one provided with the camera.'''

====Battery Life====
The Canon Rebel shows charge level in three stages: "Battery OK", "Battery Low", and "Needs to be Charged". To conserve battery life, the Rebel will go into a sleep mode after a period of disuse with default settings. To wake the camera, press the shutter button down halfway. If you know you will not be using the camera, it is best to fully turn the camera off.

===Camera Memory===
The T5i/T6i/T7i can use SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards. Most Media Loan Rebels will come with a 16 gigabyte card already in the camera. If you wish to use your own card, make sure the speed rating is at least Class 4 for RAW photos, and Class 10 45mb/s for video.
To switch memory cards, open the door on the back of the camera's hand grip, and press the back of the memory card. The card will pop out far enough to grab the back. Remove the card. To insert a new card, make sure it is oriented correctly, and insert the new memory card until it stops.

===Canon Rebel Lenses===
The Canon Rebel will accept any Canon EF of EF-S bayonet lenses. Media Loan has several different zoom and prime lenses that can be checked out alongside a Canon Rebel. Prime lenses (fixed focal length) are recommended for faster apertures and picture quality, while zoom lenses are recommended for changing shooting settings, or long telephoto applications.
====Removing and Replacing Lenses====
'''Please do not remove the included kit lens from the camera unless you intend to attach a different lens immediately.''' On the Canon Rebel, there is a half-circle shaped button on the right side of the lens mount (viewed from the front of the camera). To remove the lens, press this button, and turn the lens approximately 90 degrees clockwise. To attach a new lens, find the guide mark on the lens body. If it is an EF lens, the guide mark will be a red circle. If the lens is EF-S, the guide mark will be a white square. Line up the guide mark with the matching mark on the Canon rebel body, set the lens into the mount, and turn it approximately 90 degrees counter clockwise until it locks into place.

When attaching or detaching the lens, '''take care to prevent dust from entering the camera through the lens mount.''' Removing the lens can cause debris to get inside the camera making the camera highly susceptible to serious damage. If the lens is removed, avoid putting your fingers inside the camera. If the mirror, or any other part of the inside of this camera gets dirty, please do not try to clean it yourself and bring it to Media Loan so that a qualified staff member can service the camera.
====Auto / Manual Focus Switch====
The Canon Rebel uses an in-lens focusing system, which is switched on and off on the body of the lens. Regardless of the settings on the camera body, if the switch on the lens is set to MF (Manual Focus), the camera will not perform AF (Auto Focus) functions.
====Image Stabilization====
Some canon lenses feature an optical IS (Image Stabilization) function. This can be useful for shooting fast-moving hand-held shots, shots in low-light environments, etc. Because the IS is optical, it will not deteriorate the quality of the image as digital image stabilization does. However, using the IS feature on a lens will drain the battery much faster. Due to power consumption concerns, we recommend that the IS be turned off when shooting from a tripod, or at high enough shutter speeds that hand movement will not be a concern. The IS controlled on the lens body, and if the lens has an IS feature, the switch will be next to the AF/MF switch next to the lens mount.

===Controls===
The T6i has two added buttons on top of the camera body, above the Mode Dial: DISP. and one for Auto-Focus (AF) functionality. The DISP. button will turn the LCD screen on/off when Live View is disengaged, and the AF allows for quick access to Auto-Focus settings.
====Mode Dial====
<gallery>

</gallery>
=====A-DEP=====
A-DEP (Automatic DEPth of Field) mode on the Canon Rebel is designed to maximize focus across a picture, and is primarily intended for landscapes or large groups of people. A-DEP must be used with AF turned on, as the camera will use the AF sensor array to search through the frame for the distance of all subjects, then determine aperture and shutter values to create a depth of field that will keep all subjects in focus. A-DEP is not recommended for moving subjects, portraits, or shots where foreground and background de-focus is desired. The only controllable exposure settings in A-DEP mode are ISO and Exposure compensation.

=====M=====
M (Manual) mode offers full control over all features on the Canon Rebel. All exposure settings and picture styles must be changed by the user. This allows for the most creative control over the camera, but also demands an understanding of the camera's features, and basic principals of photography. In manual mode, the shutter speed is controlled by the dial next to the shutter release button. Aperture is controlled by the same dial while the AV button on the back of the camera is pressed. ISO can be set by pressing the button on the top of the camera between the Mode Dial and the Shutter Speed Dial. While in M, you can choose Auto ISO.

=====Av=====
Av (Aperture Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed to let the user choose aperture values, and automatically determine shutter speed for correct exposure. While in Av mode, the dial next to the shutter button will control the aperture. ISO is controlled the same way as in M mode, and shutter speed is determined by the camera. Av mode is designed to let the user control depth of field in a shot (to customize deep of shallow focus), but may not be good for high speed subjects, as the camera may use a slow shutter speed to acquire correct exposure.

=====Tv=====
Tv (Shutter Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed for photography where shutter speed is crucial. In Tv mode, the shutter speed is controlled with the dial next to the shutter button. In this mode, the user determines shutter speed, and the camera will automatically determine an aperture value for correct exposure. ISO is controlled in the same manner as in M mode. Tv mode is designed for applications such as sports photography, where depth of field is not particularly important, but fast shutter speeds to minimize motion blur are desired.

=====P=====
P (Program Auto-Exposure) mode allows the camera to control both the shutter speed and the aperture value. Users may still set the ISO as in M mode. In P mode, the user may change the shutter / aperture combination by turning the dial next to the shutter button. When the user changes the shutter / aperture setting like this, the camera will automatically change both shutter speed and aperture value simultaneously to maintain correct exposure. This mode is good for shooting in rapidly changing environments, or learning how the combination of shutter and aperture change both exposure and visual elements within the picture.

=====CA=====
CA (Creative Auto) mode operates exactly like full automatic mode with several more user controlled options allowed. In CA mode, the user may turn the flash on or off, change exposure compensation, choose picture styles, and change the drive mode of the camera. All other values are locked to camera-control.

=====Auto (Green Square)=====
Auto mode locks all options into camera control. User cannot override any options on the camera, including exposure, picture style, or drive mode. Auto mode is not recommended for any shooting situation.

=====Other Still Photo Modes=====
The Canon Rebel has several specialized automatic modes, designed for various different applications. They mimic the manual control modes without giving the user any actual manual control of the camera. '''Flash Off''' mode runs like full auto, but locks out the flash. '''Portrait''' mode uses a wide aperture to defocus the background and emphasize the subject. '''Landscape''' mode uses a small aperture to create deep focus from the foreground to the background. '''Macro''' mode attempts to optimize exposure and shutter drive for close-up photography (NOTE: the close-focus distance of the rebel is determined by the lens, and will not change regardless of what mode the camera body is set to. To take photos with small subjects near the camera, check out a macro-specialized lens from Media Loan). '''Sports''' mode will use the fastest shutter speed possible to minimize motion blur in pictures. '''Night Portrait''' mode will fire the flash to get a clear photo of the foreground subject, and use a long shutter speed to capture the background. Although each of these modes has specific applications, manual camera modes will offer more control in any situation.

====Video Mode====
The T5i/T6i cameras have full-manual HD video functionality. Unlike other Rebel models at Media Loan, the video mode on the T5i/T6i is activated on the same switch '''near the Mode Dial as ON/OFF'''. This allows the user to easily change '''exposure modes with the mode dial''' while shooting video.
Turn the switch to the video camera icon to engage video mode. The mirror will open, and live view will automatically activate '''(the Q menu is disabled in video mode)'''. To record or stop recording video, press the live view button. You can change the exposure and image settings the same way in video mode as in photo mode (exterior buttons, touch screen). You can also adjust image settings in the '''MENU'''. Pressing '''INFO''' will display more or less information.
====Aperture / Exposure Compensation Button====
The '''Aperture / Exposure Compensation''' button (Av +/-) allows control over the aperture while in manual shooting mode. While in other modes, the button controls exposure compensation, allowing the user to make the camera expose lighter or darker than the internal meter would under normal operation.

====Quick Control Button (Q) / Q Menu====
The '''Quick Control (Q)''' button allows camera settings to be controlled via the cross keys when the '''Q Menu''' is engaged. To use the quick control feature, turn off Live View and press the Q button. You can then use the cross keys to select the setting you wish to change.

====Display Button====
'''T6i ONLY'''. The '''Display''' (DISP) button on the camera will turn the the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the '''Display''' button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.

====Info Button====
The '''INFO''' button on the camera will turn the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the INFO button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.
When Live View mode is engaged, the INFO button will display exposure settings on the LCD screen. Press the INFO button multiple times to display more or less settings.

====Depth-of-field Preview Button====
The aperture opening changes only at the moment when the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open. Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the LCD screen, the depth of field will look narrow. Press the depth-of-field preview button (located on the camera body near the lens mount) to stop down the lens to the current aperture setting and check the actual depth of field (range of acceptable focus). This will darken the viewfinder considerably. This button can also be used to display the exposure settings in the bottom of the viewfinder.

===Live View===
Both the T5i/T6i are capable of shooting in Live View mode. This will open up the mirror and the shutter in the camera body and display a live image from the camera's sensor on the screen. To turn live view on or off, press the button on the camera next to the eyepiece with the circular red Record logo and a small logo of the camera back. You can enable/disable Live View mode in the MENU.
While in Live View, auto focus will be severely limited. All video is shot in Live View mode. While the camera is in Live View, '''DO NOT''' point the camera at the sun, as the sensor is exposed and will be damaged. Note that the appearance of the image on the screen in live view mode does not reflect the brightness of the actual picture. Always use the meter or histogram, as the brightness of the LCD cannot be trusted.
While the camera is in video mode, live view mode will turn on automatically. In this case, the '''Live View''' button becomes the '''Record / Stop''' button for video recording.

===Metering Modes===
The Canon Rebels have built-in light meter systems. The metering modes measure the light of an image in order to determine whether or not it is properly exposed. The light meter is displayed in multiple places, including in the bottom of the viewfinder, in the Q Menu, and the bottom of the LCD screen in Live View mode.
T5i/T6i both have four different modes to meter the lighting in a scene.
* '''Evaluative Metering''' is the camera's standard metering mode. It is suited for most shooting situations, including some moderate back-lighting of a subject.
* '''Partial Metering''' is effective when the background is significantly brighter or darker than the subject.
* '''Center-Weighted Average Metering''' takes the average of lighting across the frame with slight preference given to lighting in the center of the frame.
* '''Spot Metering''' meters from a small area in the center of the frame. Spot metering is the most accurate, but only accounts for a small part of the picture, so several meter readings may be necessary to evaluate the lighting of a scene.

===Shutter Drive Modes===
Shutter drive modes determine the way the camera will react when the shutter button is pressed. The T5i/T6i both have:
* '''Single Shooting''' will take a picture each time the shutter button is fully depressed.
* '''Continuous Shooting''' will take pictures as long as the shutter button is pressed down. The camera will take pictures as fast as the shutter mechanism and the data buffer will allow. (max. aprox. 3 shots/second)
* '''Self Timer / Remote Control''' will allow the shutter to be released via wired or wireless remote, or, if the shutter button is depressed, take a single shot after 2 or 10 seconds.
The T6i has some additional drive features that the T5i doesn’t:
* '''Single silent shooting''' is single shooting with less sound
* '''Silent continuous shooting''' is continuous shooting with less sound
* '''Self-timer: Continuous''' Press the up and down arrow keys to set the number of multiple shots (2 to 10) to be taken with the self-timer. 10 seconds after you press the shutter button, the set number of multiple shots will be taken.

===Image Size and Quality===
All Rebels have a number of image size and quality options. In most cases, the best option is to shoot at the highest resolution and quality possible, but space and processing limitations can make high-resolution images impractical.
===RAW Images===
Raw images are a direct feed from the camera's image sensor. Due to this, Raw files are extremely large and versatile. Raw image files have far better dynamic range than JPEG image files. Settings such as ISO and White balance can be changed during post processing, because Raw image files do not bake info into the image.

====JPEG Images====
JPEG images are compressed image files that save memory space by removing some of the detail and dynamic range from photographs. Canon Rebels apply a noise reduction process during the creation of JPEG images, which can make images look smoother in low-ISO situations, but can create a large amount of digital artifacts in high-ISO images. The T5i and T6i both have various resolution and quality settings for JPEG image capture.

===Menu System===
The full menu system of the Rebels can be accessed by pressing the '''MENU''' button on the back of the camera by the viewfinder. Image quality settings, picture style customization, memory management, screen brightness, and more are controlled from within the main menu. Use the cross keys to navigate the menu. Use the '''SET''' button to choose the highlighted option. At any time you can return to the main menu by pressing the '''MENU''' button again, or the home screen by halfway depressing the '''shutter release'''.

===Quick Exposure Settings Guide===
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the T5i/T6i. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder (enable with the depth-of-field preview button) and the LCD screen. The main ways to adjust exposure settings is with the top scroll wheel, the touch screen, set and cross keys, and the ISO and Av buttons.
The exposure settings can be adjusted in multiple ways:
* '''Exterior buttons:''' In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. To adjust the shutter speed, scroll back and forth with the top wheel. Aperture can be changed while holding down the Av button and scrolling with the top wheel. To adjust the ISO, press the ISO button (located on top of the camera near the mode dial) and then use the scroll wheel to make a selection.
* '''Q Menu (Live View Off):''' Enable the Q menu by turning off Live View. You can then adjust exposure settings in manual shooting modes. Press the Q button to enable selections and set button to go into specific settings. You can use the touch screen instead of buttons, as well as the exterior buttons.
* '''Live View:''' Enable the manipulation of the exposure settings in Live View by pressing the INFO button. Multiple depressions of INFO will enable various settings. Once engaged, you can use the touch screen or exterior buttons.

=== Custom White Balance ===
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure under the actual light source to be used.

'''Photograph a white object.'''
* The plain, white object should fill the spot metering circle.
* Focus manually and set the standard exposure for the white object.
* You can have have any white balance set for initial photograph--AWB, daylight, etc.

'''Select Custom White Balance in the menus.'''
* Under the second camera sub menu, select Custom White Balance, then press set.
* The photo you took should appear and then select OK and this white balance data will be imported.
* When the menu reappears, press the MENU button to exit the menu.

'''Make sure you are on the custom white balance setting.'''
* Press the WB button or the Quick Menu and select custom white balance and press set.
[[File:Media Loan Custom White Balance.png|none|thumb|100x100px|alt=Icon for Custom White Balance with 2 triagles on the bottom corners and a rounded black rectangle in the middle.]]
=== Putting your Media onto a Computer ===
There are two ways to put photos and videos onto a computer from you camera.
* '''SD card:''' Remove the SD card from your camera. Use a card reader from media loan to connect it to the computer via a USB mini to USB A cable. a folder should pop up automatically to the computer desktop, or be seen in the computer's file management system like Apples “Finder”. Remember to “eject” the folder before disconnecting the SD card.
* '''Direct connection:''' Connect your camera to the computer using a USB mini to USB A cable. the cable connects to a socket on your camera labeled “A/V out Digital” behind a rubber flap. Once connected turn on you camera and open a photo viewing software like Apples “Photos” desktop application. Within the application, your photos from the camera should be available as a folder. It should work similarly on the equivalent Windows photo application.

==Troubleshooting==

See [[Troubleshooting Media Equipment]] Guide for general information.

==Media Loan Gear it Connects With Well==

{{Collapsed|

See the [[Media Loan Catalog]] for more info about the below items.
[[File:CanonRebelwithaddons.JPG|thumbnail|right|Rebel T6i with Fisheye lens, and flash added on top.]]
* EF and EF-S Lenses like the fisheye (shown right)
* Flash to add on top (shown right)
* Tripods and other stabilizers
* Other cameras for a multi-cam shoot
* Remote for time-lapse or wireless triggering
* Lighting for video and lighting control tools
* Zoom H4n Audio Recorder and microphones for higher quality audio

}}


</div>

<div class="col-md-1"></div>

<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">

{{GA Proficiency Information

|Testlink= [https://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Canon_Rebel_Proficiency_Test Rebel Proficiency Test]

}}



{{Precautions, Help, and Other Wikis for all Media Loan Gear

|Exceptions=

*'''For This Gear Specifically'''

** Don't point camera toward Sun.
** Don't leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!
** Don't use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera
** Don't store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals
** Don't touch the mirror or sensor
** Don't please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!
}}





</div>


</div>


</div>



__NOEDITSECTION__
[[category:Digital Cameras and Accessories]]

Media Loan Catalog

2026-04-16T00:42:31Z

Zornesn:

{{Media Loan Covid Message}}
<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">

<div class="lead">

<div class="lead">[[File:Media Loan Logo.png|left|frameless|90x90px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:Media_Loan_Logo.png]] Media Loan gear available to all Evergreen students. </div></div></div></div>

== '''Overview:''' ==
<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">
=== '''General Access:''' ===
<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">

This catalog shows all "General Access" gear available at Media Loan. General Access means any enrolled student can use it. Some items have gear guides for more information about how to use them. Some gear guides have videos produced in house or sourced online. We have more equipment that is only accessible to specific classes. To see more equipment, see our other catalogs linked in the sidebar on the right. All of our other General Access gear does not require instruction in order to check it out from us. For that reason be sure to review the gear guide and especially the precautions in each gear. If you would like any help learning our gear or have any issues feel free to reach out to us at the front desk, or call or email. See our website linked in the sidebar on the right for contact information.

</div></div></div>

<div class="col-md-1"></div>
<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">
{{Media Loan Basic Sidebar}}


</div>

</div>__NOTOC____NOEDITSECTION__
=== '''Media Loan Intro Video''' ===
{{#ev:youtube|C5rL0-HZTbM|1000|left}}

== Catalog==
=== Camera and Accessories===
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible" style="text-align: center; vertical-align:middle"
|+

!Item
!Brand & Model
!Description
|-
|DSLR
Camera
|[[File:Rebel.png|frameless|150x150px|alt=Canon Rebel T6i DSLR Camera]]
Canon Rebel T6i
|[[Canon Rebel T5i/T6i/T7i Gear Guide|Canon Rebel T6i Gear Guide]] & [[Camera Fundamentals]]
Used for photo and video. Our most popular camera that is ideal for new camera users but has all the features a professional would need. Can connect with our many lenses, stabilizers and flashes.

We have fixed and zoom lens options ranging from focal lengths of 8mm to 300mm. We have EF and EF-S Mounts that connect to the Canon Rebels. Some notable qualities are Macro, Portrait, Fisheye, and the improved kit lens
|-
|Palmcorder
|[[File:Vixia.png|frameless|150x150px|alt=Canon Vixia Camcorder]]
Vixia HF M500
|[[Vixia HD Camcorder Gear Guide]]
Used for video. This camcorder is easy to use and can get good footage with minimal menu diving.
|-
|Go Pro
|[[File:IMG 0110.jpg|frameless|150x150px|alt=Go Pro Hero 4]]
Go Pro Hero 4
|[[GoPro Hero 4 Gear Guide]]
Used for action shots and timelapse. This well-known camera comes with a waterproof case.
|-
|Point and Shoot Camera
|[[File:Olympus Tough TG-2.png|frameless|150x150px|alt=Olympus Tough TG-2]]
Olympus Tough TG-2
|A simple camera that requires the least experience and camera knowledge to use. This camera is also waterproof.
|-
|35mm Film
Camera
|[[File:K1000front.png|frameless|150x150px|alt=K1000 35mm film camera]]
Pentax K-1000
|[[35mm SLR Camera Gear Guide]] & [[Camera Fundamentals]]

Our most popular film camera. We have fixed and zoom lens options ranging from focal lengths of 8mm to 210mm. These lenses are K mount, meaning they only connect to our 35mm film cameras like the K-1000. We have some lenses that are fisheye as well as macro. We have other options for film cameras like the Holga 120 GCFN Medium format camera. Film can be developed in [https://sites.evergreen.edu/photoland/ Photoland.]
|-
|Light Meter
|[[File:Light meter.png|frameless|150x150px|alt=Sekonic L-308s Light Meter]]
Sekonic L-308s
|A tool that analyzes light in order to help set the correct exposure in film photography.
|-
|LED Light
|[[File:GA 2 light kit.png|frameless|150x150px|alt=Genarary SP-E-240B LED Light]]
Genarary SP-E-240B
|[https://youtu.be/OJtJ_gPrXLw LED With 3 Point Lighting Gear Guide]
This kit comes with 2 adjustable lights and all the stands and power to make it work. We also have the GVM 560AS 2 light kit, the Dracast 500 S-Series Kit 3 light kit, Genaray Spectroled Studio 500, GVM Ring light, and Smallrig RM100 LED.
|-
|Lighting Control
|[[File:Light tools.png|frameless|150x150px|alt=A small arrangement of lighting control tools including 2 bounce disks, diferrent colored square gels, and small containers with lens filters. These items are all resting on a white background]]
|We have an assortment of accessories like gels, diffusers, scrim, bounce, grey card, lens hoods, lens filters, C-stands, etc. We have many tools to adjust existing lighting and other related aspects of photography and videography.

We have many of the objects used to alter the quality of light like black flags, diffusion flags, scrim cookies, wood cookies, a light control kit and more.
|-
|Camera Flash
|[[File:Flash on camera.png|frameless|125x125px|alt=Flash on a Canon rebel DSLR digital camera]]
|Photography tool used to add more flash than the built in flash of a camera.

We have a well stocked Speedlite flash kit with 2 flashes, a transmitter and many modifiers like reflector, bounce, beauty dish, honeycomb, filter, and more.

We also have the a studio flash kit, read the [[Elinchrom Studio Flash Kit Gear Guide|Elinchrom Studio Flash Kit Gear Guide.]]

Lights that can be triggered to flash when a camera takes a picture. They come with stands and attachments to modify the lights.
|-
|Tripod
|[[File:Photo tripod.png|frameless|150x150px|alt=Photo Tripod]]
|We have different sizes of tripods for stabilizing shots. Specialized tripods are for photos and others are for video. The the video tripod is different from a photo tripod because it has a "fluid head" which allows for smooth movements. We have smaller options like Joby Gorillapod with posable legs, and the monopod with just one leg for lighter packing.
|-
|Phone Gimbal
|DJI OM6
|Small automated stabilizer for making smooth handheld shot on phone camera.
|-
|Sandbag
|[[File:Sandbag.png|frameless|150x150px|alt=Canvas Sandbag]]
|Used to weigh stands. These are essential for top heavy set ups. we have 15lb bags and 5lb bags
|-
|Intervalometer
|[[File:Timelapse.png|frameless|150x150px|alt=Vello ShutterBoss II Intervalometer]]
Vello ShutterBoss II
|A tool that plugs into a DSLR like the Canon Rebel and can be used make a timelapse by taking photos at an interval of your choosing.
|-
|Clapboard
|[[File:Clap board.png|frameless|150x150px|alt=Clapboard opened with text on the front that says "Prod, Roll, Scene, Take, Director, Camera, Date, Day, Night, Int, Ext, Mos, Filter, Sync"]]
|Used for video production to note scenes and sync audio to video sources when they are recorded separately.
|}

=== Audio ===
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible" style="text-align: center; vertical-align:middle"
|+

!Item
!Brand & Model
!Description
|-
|Stage Mic
|[[File:SM5-8.png|frameless|170x170px|alt=Shure SM58 Stage Microphone]]
Shure SM58
|[[Microphones in General Access]]
[[Audio Fundamentals]]

The most popular mic in the world.
|-
|Podcast Mic
|[[File:Electrovoice edit.png|frameless|170x170px|alt=Electrovoice RE27ND Broadcast mic]]Electrovoice RE27ND
|A mic often used by professional broadcasts and podcasts.
|-
|Shotgun Mic
|[[File:Sennheiser combo.png|frameless|170x170px|alt=Sennheiser K6 Kit microphone]]Sennheiser K6 Kit
|A versatile mic kit with adjustable attachments to make the mic a shotgun, cardioid or omni-directional pick-up pattern.
|-
|Lavalier Mic
|[[File:Lapel.JPG|frameless|132x132px|alt=AudioTechnica AT899 Lavalier Mic]]
AudioTechnica AT899
|Good for interviews or other close mic situations where you want to attach the mic to the performers collar.
|-
|Camera Mounted Mic
|[[File:Mic RODE.png|frameless|170x170px|alt=Rode Videomic Camera Mouted Mic]]
Rode Videomic
|A microphone that mounts on top of a camera like the Canon Rebel T6i and can give it much better sound than it's little built in mic.
|-
|Field Recorder
|[[File:H4N recorder.png|frameless|150x150px|alt=Zoom H4n Field Recorder]]
Zoom H4n
|[[Zoom H4n Audio Recorder Gear Guide]]
[[Olympus LS-100 Audio Recorder Gear Guide]]

.

[[Audio Fundamentals]]

An audio recorder well suited for field recording or interviews. Has 2 built in mics, but can also use any 2 of mics like the ones listed above. We also have the H4essential
|-
|2 channel interface
|[[File:Motu M2.png|frameless|150x150px|alt=Motu M2 2 channel audio interface]]
Motu M2
|[https://youtu.be/HuU7OoR7InE Motu M2 Video Gear Guide]
An audio device built specifically for getting sounds in and out of a computer. This can get be used for audio recording or video conferencing. We also have the Mackie BlackJack.
|-
|Over-Ear
|[[File:HeadphonesBehringer.png|frameless|120x120px|alt=Behringer HPM1000 Headphones]]
Behringer HPM1000
|Good headphones that go around your ears.
|-
|Small Speaker
|[[File:Mackie speaker.png|frameless|150x150px|alt=Mackie SRM150 speaker]]
Mackie SRM150
|A small speaker that you can use in various ways like connecting microphones directly to it for a simple public address sytem. We have other speaker options as well.
|-
|Synthesizer
|Moog Mother 32
|A powerful semi-modular synthezier with 10 patch cable. It can be played as a keyboard and sequence on its own, as well as connect to other eurorack synthesizers.
|-
|Mic Floor Stand
|[[File:Mic stand.png|frameless|225x225px|alt=Mic Floor Stand]]
|The most common kind of stand you see on stage and in studio. We have standard height and shorter stand. We also have desk stands that is perfect for voice over, interviews, or audio project that happens at a desk
|-
|Boom Pole
|[[File:Boom Pole Gen.png|centre|frameless|226x226px|alt=A boom pole fully retracted with no microphone]]

Rode BoomPole
|A pole that can hold a microphone on one end while a "boom operator" holds the other end. used to get good sound right next to a source without being in camera frame.
|-
|Cable and Adapter Assortment
|Many Items
|[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=T7BAYs1-hq4 Cable Wrapping Video]
We have many XLR cables for microphones ranging from 6ft to 50ft. We have many adapters for XLR, 1/4"(guitar), 1/8"(ipod), and RCA. We also have DI Boxes for guitars and much more. See the [[Cables and Adapters Catalog]] for what is available.
|}

=== Presentation ===
[[Category:Media Loan Catalogs]]
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible" style="text-align: center; vertical-align:middle"
|+

!Item
!Brand & Model
!Description
|-
|Projector
|[[File:Projector.png|frameless|150x150px|alt=Vivitek Qumi Q6 small projector]]
Vivitek Qumi Q6
|A small portable projector that can use HDMI and a variety of other inputs. Can be set up quickly and easily. We also have the Sharp XG C435X-L. We have various screens to project to.
|-
|USB capable Document Camera
|[[File:Epson DC21.png|frameless|147x147px|alt=Epson DC-21 document camera]]

Epson DC-21
|A document camera that can connect over USB to project or make a "2nd camera" as a "shared screen" while video conferencing. Can zoom in and focus on documents and objects in the document area. We also have the DC-20
|-
|Video Player
|[[File:Bluray.png|frameless|150x150px|alt=DVD Player]]Panasonic Dmp-bd85
|We have players for DVD, Blu-Ray Player, CD and VHS Player. We also have the Mica Video Player for looping video from a flashdrive.
|-
|Audio for presentation
|[[File:MHA-SureSM58.jpg|frameless|alt=Shure SM58 stage microphone]]
Shure SM58
|The most popular mic the world. Just needs an XLR cable and something to connect it to like a Mackie SRM150 Speaker.
|-
|Display Adapters Assortment
|Many Items
|Many connections for, USB (A, B and C), HDMI, RCA, VGA

and SD Card Readers
|}

__NOEDITSECTION__

Media Services Events

2026-03-20T22:58:50Z

Zornesn:

{{TwoColumn|lead=

'''Media Services''' is hosting a variety of events and workshops during Spring 2026.
<div class="gradientshadow"></div>

|content=

==Creator Meet-Up==
'''Week 2 Monday 4/6 4:00PM'''

Are you an actor looking for a role? A photographer looking for a model? A musician looking for an engineer? Come mingle and meet your next collaborator! Refreshments will be served.

TV Studio Evans Hall 1353

==Up and Running: Film Photography==
'''Weeks 3 and 5 and 7 Friday 4/17 and 5/1 and 5/15 1:00 pm'''

Learn how to process and print your own black and white film. This training is required to access
the analog photography facilities. Sign up in advance by emailing photolandstaff@evergreen.edu

Photoland Evans Hall 1310

==Evergreen Media Internship Information Session==
'''Week 4 Monday 4/20 4:00 pm'''

Applications for the 2026-2027 Media Internship will open week 5 of Spring quarter, and will close at the end of week 6. We are also hosting an information session in the TV Studio in Evans Hall that students and faculty are encouraged to attend. We will have tables where attendees can ask questions to our current media interns and their supervisors.

TV Studio Evans Hall 1353

==Tiny Desk Contest Video Screening==
'''Week 6 Monday 5/4 4:00 pm'''

Earlier this year, our Multimedia Interns produced videos of musicians from the Evergreen community performing original music to enter in NPR's 2026 Tiny Desk Contest. This quarter, we are excited to host a screening of these videos, as well as a surprise live performance, in our TV Studio in Evans Hall. Come enjoy some popcorn while we celebrate the hard work and creativity of the participating artists and our interns!

TV Studio Evans Hall 1353

==Ask Media Anything==
'''Weeks 1-10 Wednesday 4-5pm'''

Media staff in all areas are available every week to help you towards all your media-related dreams! No sign up needed. Just drop in to meet with a specialist in any of the areas listed.
* Audio: Audio Lab Evans Hall 1360
* Gear: Media Loan Evans Hall 2504
* Photography: Photoland Evans Hall 1310
* Video & Production: TV Studio Evans Hall 1353
* Software: Multimedia Lab Evans Hall 1404

|sidebar=
{{Media Services Sidebar}}
}}
[[Category:Media Services]]

Microphone Catalog

2026-03-20T22:15:53Z

Zornesn:

{{Media Loan Covid Message}}

<div class="container-fluid">

<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">

<div class="lead">

<div class="lead">[[File:Media Loan Logo.png|left|frameless|90x90px]] All Mics Available in Media Loan. </div>

<div class="pull-right"></div>

</div>

"General Access" mic is a category of Media Loan microphones that are accessible to all enrolled students. The General Access section of Media Loan is different from the "Audio Studio" section, which is just for advanced audio classes and to be used exclusively inside the audio facilities on campus. For help learning about mics, check our [https://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Audio_Fundamentals#MICROPHONES Microphone Basics] section inside our [[Audio Fundamentals]] page.

==== Explanation of Columns ====
* '''Type''': The most common category used to describe each mic.
* '''Usage''': The most common use the mic is built for.
* '''Power Source''': Power needed, see the Microphone Basics page to learn about Condensers and Dynamics and what type of transducer needs power to work.
This catalog has sortable columns. Click on the triangle and the top of the column to put the catalog in the order of contents within that column. You can also press Command F (on Mac) and Control F (on Windows) to search for specific details on this web page.

__NOTOC__

</div>

<div class="col-md-1"></div>
<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">
{{Media Loan Basic Sidebar}}


</div>


</div>


</div>

__NOEDITSECTION__

== GENERAL ACCESS MICROPHONES ==
{| class="wikitable sortable" style="text-align: center; background: #e9f5f9;"
|-
! Type
!Brand/Model
! Image !! Pattern !! Standard Usage !! Transducer !! Power Source!! Connector
|-
|Stage
|Shure
SM58
|[[File:MHA-SureSM58.jpg]]
|Cardioid
[[File:Cardioid.png|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Shure
SM57
|[[File:MHE-SureSM57.jpg]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Shure
Beta 57A
|[[File:MHC-ShureBeta57A.jpg]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Sennheiser
MD 421-II
|[[File:MNA-Sennheiser421.jpg]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|| Broadcast
|Electrovoice RE-27 N/D||[[File:RE 27 Photo.jpeg|frameless]]
| Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
| Voice
|Dynamic
|Not required|| XLR
|-
|Broadcast
|Sennheiser MD46
|[[File:MSM-SureMD46.jpg]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Isolating from noise
|Beyerdynamic M88 TG
|[[File:MTG-BeyerDynamicM88TG.jpg]]
|Hypercardioid[[File:HyperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Vocals and instruments, specifically to capture lower frequency sounds
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Broadcast
|Beyerdynamic M58
|[[File:MBD-BeyerDynamicM58.jpg]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|75x75px|frameless]]

|Voice
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Broadcast
|Electrovoice 635A
|[[File:MED-EV-635A.jpg]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Isolating from noise
|Electrovoice RE18
|[[File:MEG-EV-RE16.jpg]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
||Isolating from noise
|Electrovoice RE16|| [[File:MER-EV-RE15.jpg]]
|Supercardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
| Voice and instruments ||Dynamic
|Not required|| XLR
|-
|Isolating from noise
|Electrovoice RE15
|[[File:MER-EV-RE18.jpg]]
|Supercardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|All purpose studio
|Aston
Origin
|[[File:AstonOrigin.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|General purpose condenser mic, used on instruments and vocals
|Condenser

| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|All purpose studio
|Pacific Pro Audio
LD1
|[[File:LD1.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|General purpose condenser mic, used on instruments and vocals
|Condenser

| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|All purpose studio
|Marshall MXL2003
|[[File:MXL2003.jpg|frameless|110x110px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:MXL2003.jpg]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|General purpose condenser mic, used on instruments and vocals
|Condenser

| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Stereo pair
|Studio
Projects C4
|[[File:SPC4.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: Cardioid, Omni
|General purpose condenser mic, used on instruments
|Condenser
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Combo Kit
|Sennheiser
K6
|[[File:MNC-SennheiserK6Combo.jpg]]
|Variable: Cardioid, Omni, Super Cardioid
|Can cater to almost all settings. Great for video, stage use, and studio recording. 1 module + 3 different capsules.
|Condenser
|1 AA Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Shotgun
|Audio Technica 835B
|[[File:MAU-AT835B.jpg]]
|Hypercardioid[[File:HyperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Video, broadcast, and field work.
|Condenser
|1 AA Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Shotgun
|Rode
NTG1
|[[File:MCNTG-RodeNTG1.jpg]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Video, broadcast, and field work.
|Condenser
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Lavalier
|Shure
MX185
|[[File:MOX-SureMX185.jpg]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Interview, broadcast, and presentation.
|Condenser
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Lavalier
|Audio Technica 899
|[[File:MOJ-AT8537.jpg]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Interview, broadcast, and presentation.
|Condenser
|1 AA Battery
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Shure
SM86
| [[File:MSCC-SureSM86.jpg]]
| Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
| Voice ||Condenser|| +48v Phantom Power || XLR
|-
|Stereo
|Audio Technica AT825
|[[File:MAI-AT825.jpg]]
|Stereo: X/Y Dual Cardioid capsules
|Instruments and video
|Condenser
|1 AA Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Stereo
|Rode
NT4
|[[File:MCNTG4-RodeNT4.jpg]]
|Stereo: X/Y Dual Cardioid capsules
|Instruments and video
|Condenser
|1 9V Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Shotgun
|Rode
VideoMic
|[[File:MCV-RodeVideoMic.jpg]]
|Super Cardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Video, broadcast, and field work.
|Condenser
|1 9V Battery
|1/8”
|-
|Stereo
|Sony
ECM-MS957
|[[File:MOS-SonyECM-MS957.jpg]]
|Stereo
|Recording live concerts, conferences, interviews and sound effects.
|Condenser
|1 AA Battery
|XLR
|-
|Lavalier
|Sennheiser ME2
|[[File:MON-SennheiserME2.jpg]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Interview, broadcast, and presentation.
|Condenser
|1/8" plug-in power
|1/8”
|-
|PZM
|Crown Optimus Sound Grabber|| [[File:MCPX-CrownPZM.jpg]]
| Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
| Pressure zone mic for recording conferences, interviews, and lectures. ||Condenser||1 AA Battery|| XLR
|-
|USB
|Blue
Yeti Pro
|[[File:MBY-BlueYeti.jpg]]
|Variable: Cardioid, Omni, Bidirectional & Stereo.
|Voice
|Condenser
|Powered by USB, +48v Phantom Power for XLR
|USB & XLR
|-
|Hydrophone
|DolphinEar Pro
|[[File:MHP-DolphinEar.jpg]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Designed to capture underwater sounds to depths of 100 meters. Not ideal for shallow water. Proficiency required.
|Contact
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Parabolic
|Parabolic Kits with Sennheiser K6
|[[File:MGP K6.jpg]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Includes K6 power module, cardioid capsule, rollable dish, dish transport bag, pistol grip handle, tripod adapter, dish cover and duffle bag. Designed for distant low level sounds such as bird calls. Proficiency required.
|Condenser
|1 AA Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|}
Most recent update: February 2025.

"Audio Studio" microphones are not available for checkout. This page is only here for reference. They are only used by the advanced audio classes and are to be used exclusively in the audio facilities on campus.

== AUDIO STUDIO MICROPHONES (Advanced Audio Classes Only) ==
{| class="mw-collapsible sortable mw-collapsed wikitable" style="text-align: center; background: #d3eaf2;"
|+ style="white-space:nowrap" | Expand to see Audio Studio Microphones
|-
!Type
!Brand/Model!! Image !! Pattern !! Standard Usage !! Transducer !! Power
Source
! Connector
|-
|Stage
|AKG
D202E
|[[File:AKGD202E.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Designed to eliminate proximity effect, very flat frequency response.
|Dynamic
|Not required||XLR
|-
|High SPL
|AKG
D224E
|[[File:AKGD224E.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|High SPL, good for loud sources.
|Dynamic
|Not required||XLR
|-
|Instrument
|AKG
460B
|[[File:AKGC460B.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Low self-noise. Equipped with low cut filters or 10db pad.
|Condenser
(Small diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Drum mic
|AKG
D112
|[[File:AKGD112.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Used primarily on kick drums. Handles high SPL.
|Dynamic
|Not required||XLR
|-
|All purpose studio
|AKG
C414
|[[File:C414XL2.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: Cardioid, bidirectional, hypercardioid, omnidirectional, subcardioid
|All purpose studio standard mic. Comes in varying versions, B-ULS (vintage, warm tone), XLS (modern, warm tone), and XLII (modern, bright tone)
|Condenser
(Large diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Tube mic
|Audio
Technica 4060
|[[File:AT4060.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Vacuum tube condenser. Used on vocals, instruments and amps.
|Tube condenser
(Large diaphragm)
|External power supply
|XLR
|-
|Stereo pair kit
|Neumann
KM84
|[[File:KM84.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Great detail on acoustic instruments and drum overheads.
|Condenser
(Small diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|All purpose studio
|Neumann
U87
|[[File:U87.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional
|Used on vocals instruments, flat frequency response and great detail
|Condenser
(Large diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Instruments
|Neumann
KM83
|[[File:KM83.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Omnidirectional equivalent of the KM84.
|Condenser
(Small diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|All purpose studio
|Neumann

U47 (FET)
|[[File:U47.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Hypercardioid[[File:HyperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Great for vocals, also used on instruments.
|Condenser
(Large diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Stereo mic
|Avantone
CK40
|[[File:CK40.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional
|Stereo condenser with adjustable pickup patterns and swiveling capsule. Good for recording a room or in a bidirectional pattern.
|Condenser
(Large diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Stereo mic
|Rode
NT4
|[[File:RodeNT4.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Stereo: X/Y Dual Cardioid capsules
|Instruments and video
|Condenser
|1 9V Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|PZM
|Crown
PZM
|[[File:CrownPZM.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Used for recording multiple voices in a conference or meeting setting.
|PZM
|2 9V Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Broadcast
|Electrovoice

635A
|[[File:MED-EV-635A.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice and room mic
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Isolating from noise
|Electrovoice RE16
|[[File:RE16.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Isolating from noise
|Electrovoice RE15
|[[File:RE15.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Broadcast
|Electrovoice RE55
|[[File:RE55.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice and room mic
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Instruments
|Electrovoice CS15
|[[File:CS15E.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: cardioid and omnidirectional
|Versatile instrument use
|Condenser
(Small diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Broadcast
|Electrovoice RE20
|[[File:EVRE20.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice for recording and broadcast
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Isolating from noise
|Electrovoice RE18
|[[File:RE18.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Voice, designed to reduce handling noise.
|Dynamic
|Not required||XLR
|-
|Drum mic
|Electrovoice 408B
|[[File:EV408B.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|High SPL, good for loud sources.
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Drum mic
|Electrovoice 308B
|[[File:EV308B.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Cardioid version of the 408B.
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Reference mic
|Earthworks

TC20
|[[File:TC20.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Flat reference microphone, high SPL. Good for sound measurement and loud sources.
|Condenser
(Small diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Ribbon
|Cascade Fathead
|[[File:Fathead.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Bidirectional[[File:Bidirectional.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Dark tone for instruments and vocals, often used in mid-side pair.
|Ribbon
|Do NOT supply +48v Phantom Power, ribbons will be damaged!
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Shure
SM58
|[[File:SM58.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Shure
Beta 87A
|[[File:ShureBeta87A.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Hand held vocal mic with good feedback rejection
|Condenser
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Voice
|Shure
SM53
|[[File:SM53.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Hand held vocal mic, reduces proximity effect.
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Shure
SM57
|[[File:MHE-SureSM57.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Instruments
|Shure
SM81
|[[File:SM81.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Used on instruments, popular for pianos.
|Condenser
(Small diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Stereo
|Shure
VP88
|[[File:ShureVP88.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: cardioid and bidirectional
|Stereo, used in broadcasting.
|Condenser
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|All purpose studio
|Shure
KSM32
|[[File:KSM32.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|General purpose condenser mic
|Condenser
(Large diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Instruments
|Shure
KSM137
|[[File:KSM137.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Instruments.
|Condenser
(Small diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Voice
|Shure
SM7B
|[[File:SM7B.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Popular vocal mic for recording and broadcast
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Drum mic
|Shure
Beta 52A
|[[File:ShureBeta52A.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|High SPL and good low end, for kick drums
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Sennheiser MD 421-II
|[[File:Sen421.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Instruments
|Sennheiser MKH40
|[[File:MKH40.jpg|centre|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Great detail on acoustic instruments and drum overheads.
|Condenser
(Small diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Drum mic
|Sennheiser E604 Kit
|[[File:SenE604.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Clip on mics for snares and toms
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Combo Kit
|Sennheiser K6
|[[File:SenComboKit.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: Cardioid, Omni, Super Cardioid
|Can cater to almost all settings. Great for video, stage use, and studio recording. 1 module + 3 different capsules.
|Condenser
(Small diaphragm)
|1 AA Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Voice
|Sennheiser 441
|[[File:Sen441.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Binaural mic
|Dr. Normar's Binaural head
(Sennhesier MKE 2002)
|[[File:MKE2002.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Sennheiser binaural microphone pair to record a 3d stereo field for playback over headphones.
|Condenser
|1 9V Battery
|XLR
|-
|Lavalier
|Sony
ECM50
|[[File:ECM50.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Interview, broadcast, and presentation.
|Condenser
|1 E90 Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Ribbon
|Beyerdynamic M160
|[[File:M160.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Hypercardioid[[File:HyperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Instruments, popular on strings.
|Ribbon
|Do NOT supply +48v Phantom Power, ribbons will be damaged!
|XLR
|-
|Ribbon
|Coles
4038
|[[File:Coles4038.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Bidirectional[[File:Bidirectional.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Classic instrument and voice mic
|Ribbon
|Do NOT supply +48v Phantom Power, ribbons will be damaged!
|XLR
|-
|Ribbon
|RCA
77DX
|[[File:RCA77DX.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional
|Vintage ribbon mic, popular in broadcasting for vocals.
|Ribbon
|Do NOT supply +48v Phantom Power, ribbons will be damaged!
|XLR
|-
|Ribbon
|Royer
R121
|[[File:R121.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Bidirectional[[File:Bidirectional.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Instruments
|Ribbon
|Do NOT supply +48v Phantom Power, ribbons will be damaged!
|XLR
|-
|Tube mic
|Chameleon Labs
TS-1
|[[File:TS1.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable:
cardioid, omnidirectional
|Instruments
|Tube condenser
(Small diaphragm)
|External power supply
|XLR
|-
|Tube mic
|Chameleon Labs
TS-2
|[[File:TS2.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional
|General purpose condenser mic
|Tube condenser
(Large diaphragm)
|External power supply
|XLR
|-
|Tube mic
|sE Electronics sE5000
|[[File:SE5000.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|General purpose condenser mic
|Tube condenser
(Large diaphragm)
|External power supply
|XLR
|-
|Tube mic
|sE Electronics sE5600
|[[File:SE5600.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional, with 5 intermediate stages selectable on power supply
|General purpose condenser mic
|Tube condenser
(Large diaphragm)
|External power supply
|XLR
|}

[[Category:Media Loan Catalogs]]
__NOEDITSECTION__

Microphone Catalog

2026-03-20T22:15:34Z

Zornesn:

{{Media Loan Covid Message}}

<div class="container-fluid">

<div class="row">

<div class="col-md-8">

<div class="lead">

<div class="lead">[[File:Media Loan Logo.png|left|frameless|90x90px]] All Mics Available in Media Loan. </div>

<div class="pull-right"></div>

</div>

"General Access" mic is a category of Media Loan microphones that are accessible to all enrolled students. The General Access section of Media Loan is different from the "Audio Studio" section, which is just for advanced audio classes and to be used exclusively inside the audio facilities on campus. For help learning about mics, check our [https://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Audio_Fundamentals#MICROPHONES Microphone Basics] section inside our [[Audio Fundamentals]] page.

==== Explanation of Columns ====
* '''Type''': The most common category used to describe each mic.
* '''Sound''': Example audio for various mics.
* '''Usage''': The most common use the mic is built for.
* '''Power Source''': Power needed, see the Microphone Basics page to learn about Condensers and Dynamics and what type of transducer needs power to work.
This catalog has sortable columns. Click on the triangle and the top of the column to put the catalog in the order of contents within that column. You can also press Command F (on Mac) and Control F (on Windows) to search for specific details on this web page.

__NOTOC__

</div>

<div class="col-md-1"></div>
<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">
{{Media Loan Basic Sidebar}}


</div>


</div>


</div>

__NOEDITSECTION__

== GENERAL ACCESS MICROPHONES ==
{| class="wikitable sortable" style="text-align: center; background: #e9f5f9;"
|-
! Type
!Brand/Model
! Image !! Pattern !! Standard Usage !! Transducer !! Power Source!! Connector
|-
|Stage
|Shure
SM58
|[[File:MHA-SureSM58.jpg]]
|Cardioid
[[File:Cardioid.png|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Shure
SM57
|[[File:MHE-SureSM57.jpg]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Shure
Beta 57A
|[[File:MHC-ShureBeta57A.jpg]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Sennheiser
MD 421-II
|[[File:MNA-Sennheiser421.jpg]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|| Broadcast
|Electrovoice RE-27 N/D||[[File:RE 27 Photo.jpeg|frameless]]
| Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
| Voice
|Dynamic
|Not required|| XLR
|-
|Broadcast
|Sennheiser MD46
|[[File:MSM-SureMD46.jpg]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Isolating from noise
|Beyerdynamic M88 TG
|[[File:MTG-BeyerDynamicM88TG.jpg]]
|Hypercardioid[[File:HyperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Vocals and instruments, specifically to capture lower frequency sounds
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Broadcast
|Beyerdynamic M58
|[[File:MBD-BeyerDynamicM58.jpg]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|75x75px|frameless]]

|Voice
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Broadcast
|Electrovoice 635A
|[[File:MED-EV-635A.jpg]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Isolating from noise
|Electrovoice RE18
|[[File:MEG-EV-RE16.jpg]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
||Isolating from noise
|Electrovoice RE16|| [[File:MER-EV-RE15.jpg]]
|Supercardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
| Voice and instruments ||Dynamic
|Not required|| XLR
|-
|Isolating from noise
|Electrovoice RE15
|[[File:MER-EV-RE18.jpg]]
|Supercardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|All purpose studio
|Aston
Origin
|[[File:AstonOrigin.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|General purpose condenser mic, used on instruments and vocals
|Condenser

| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|All purpose studio
|Pacific Pro Audio
LD1
|[[File:LD1.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|General purpose condenser mic, used on instruments and vocals
|Condenser

| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|All purpose studio
|Marshall MXL2003
|[[File:MXL2003.jpg|frameless|110x110px|link=http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/File:MXL2003.jpg]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|General purpose condenser mic, used on instruments and vocals
|Condenser

| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Stereo pair
|Studio
Projects C4
|[[File:SPC4.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: Cardioid, Omni
|General purpose condenser mic, used on instruments
|Condenser
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Combo Kit
|Sennheiser
K6
|[[File:MNC-SennheiserK6Combo.jpg]]
|Variable: Cardioid, Omni, Super Cardioid
|Can cater to almost all settings. Great for video, stage use, and studio recording. 1 module + 3 different capsules.
|Condenser
|1 AA Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Shotgun
|Audio Technica 835B
|[[File:MAU-AT835B.jpg]]
|Hypercardioid[[File:HyperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Video, broadcast, and field work.
|Condenser
|1 AA Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Shotgun
|Rode
NTG1
|[[File:MCNTG-RodeNTG1.jpg]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Video, broadcast, and field work.
|Condenser
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Lavalier
|Shure
MX185
|[[File:MOX-SureMX185.jpg]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Interview, broadcast, and presentation.
|Condenser
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Lavalier
|Audio Technica 899
|[[File:MOJ-AT8537.jpg]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Interview, broadcast, and presentation.
|Condenser
|1 AA Battery
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Shure
SM86
| [[File:MSCC-SureSM86.jpg]]
| Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
| Voice ||Condenser|| +48v Phantom Power || XLR
|-
|Stereo
|Audio Technica AT825
|[[File:MAI-AT825.jpg]]
|Stereo: X/Y Dual Cardioid capsules
|Instruments and video
|Condenser
|1 AA Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Stereo
|Rode
NT4
|[[File:MCNTG4-RodeNT4.jpg]]
|Stereo: X/Y Dual Cardioid capsules
|Instruments and video
|Condenser
|1 9V Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Shotgun
|Rode
VideoMic
|[[File:MCV-RodeVideoMic.jpg]]
|Super Cardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Video, broadcast, and field work.
|Condenser
|1 9V Battery
|1/8”
|-
|Stereo
|Sony
ECM-MS957
|[[File:MOS-SonyECM-MS957.jpg]]
|Stereo
|Recording live concerts, conferences, interviews and sound effects.
|Condenser
|1 AA Battery
|XLR
|-
|Lavalier
|Sennheiser ME2
|[[File:MON-SennheiserME2.jpg]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Interview, broadcast, and presentation.
|Condenser
|1/8" plug-in power
|1/8”
|-
|PZM
|Crown Optimus Sound Grabber|| [[File:MCPX-CrownPZM.jpg]]
| Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
| Pressure zone mic for recording conferences, interviews, and lectures. ||Condenser||1 AA Battery|| XLR
|-
|USB
|Blue
Yeti Pro
|[[File:MBY-BlueYeti.jpg]]
|Variable: Cardioid, Omni, Bidirectional & Stereo.
|Voice
|Condenser
|Powered by USB, +48v Phantom Power for XLR
|USB & XLR
|-
|Hydrophone
|DolphinEar Pro
|[[File:MHP-DolphinEar.jpg]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Designed to capture underwater sounds to depths of 100 meters. Not ideal for shallow water. Proficiency required.
|Contact
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Parabolic
|Parabolic Kits with Sennheiser K6
|[[File:MGP K6.jpg]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Includes K6 power module, cardioid capsule, rollable dish, dish transport bag, pistol grip handle, tripod adapter, dish cover and duffle bag. Designed for distant low level sounds such as bird calls. Proficiency required.
|Condenser
|1 AA Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|}
Most recent update: February 2025.

"Audio Studio" microphones are not available for checkout. This page is only here for reference. They are only used by the advanced audio classes and are to be used exclusively in the audio facilities on campus.

== AUDIO STUDIO MICROPHONES (Advanced Audio Classes Only) ==
{| class="mw-collapsible sortable mw-collapsed wikitable" style="text-align: center; background: #d3eaf2;"
|+ style="white-space:nowrap" | Expand to see Audio Studio Microphones
|-
!Type
!Brand/Model!! Image !! Pattern !! Standard Usage !! Transducer !! Power
Source
! Connector
|-
|Stage
|AKG
D202E
|[[File:AKGD202E.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Designed to eliminate proximity effect, very flat frequency response.
|Dynamic
|Not required||XLR
|-
|High SPL
|AKG
D224E
|[[File:AKGD224E.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|High SPL, good for loud sources.
|Dynamic
|Not required||XLR
|-
|Instrument
|AKG
460B
|[[File:AKGC460B.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Low self-noise. Equipped with low cut filters or 10db pad.
|Condenser
(Small diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Drum mic
|AKG
D112
|[[File:AKGD112.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Used primarily on kick drums. Handles high SPL.
|Dynamic
|Not required||XLR
|-
|All purpose studio
|AKG
C414
|[[File:C414XL2.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: Cardioid, bidirectional, hypercardioid, omnidirectional, subcardioid
|All purpose studio standard mic. Comes in varying versions, B-ULS (vintage, warm tone), XLS (modern, warm tone), and XLII (modern, bright tone)
|Condenser
(Large diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Tube mic
|Audio
Technica 4060
|[[File:AT4060.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Vacuum tube condenser. Used on vocals, instruments and amps.
|Tube condenser
(Large diaphragm)
|External power supply
|XLR
|-
|Stereo pair kit
|Neumann
KM84
|[[File:KM84.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Great detail on acoustic instruments and drum overheads.
|Condenser
(Small diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|All purpose studio
|Neumann
U87
|[[File:U87.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional
|Used on vocals instruments, flat frequency response and great detail
|Condenser
(Large diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Instruments
|Neumann
KM83
|[[File:KM83.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Omnidirectional equivalent of the KM84.
|Condenser
(Small diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|All purpose studio
|Neumann

U47 (FET)
|[[File:U47.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Hypercardioid[[File:HyperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Great for vocals, also used on instruments.
|Condenser
(Large diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Stereo mic
|Avantone
CK40
|[[File:CK40.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional
|Stereo condenser with adjustable pickup patterns and swiveling capsule. Good for recording a room or in a bidirectional pattern.
|Condenser
(Large diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Stereo mic
|Rode
NT4
|[[File:RodeNT4.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Stereo: X/Y Dual Cardioid capsules
|Instruments and video
|Condenser
|1 9V Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|PZM
|Crown
PZM
|[[File:CrownPZM.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Used for recording multiple voices in a conference or meeting setting.
|PZM
|2 9V Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Broadcast
|Electrovoice

635A
|[[File:MED-EV-635A.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice and room mic
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Isolating from noise
|Electrovoice RE16
|[[File:RE16.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Isolating from noise
|Electrovoice RE15
|[[File:RE15.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Broadcast
|Electrovoice RE55
|[[File:RE55.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice and room mic
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Instruments
|Electrovoice CS15
|[[File:CS15E.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: cardioid and omnidirectional
|Versatile instrument use
|Condenser
(Small diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Broadcast
|Electrovoice RE20
|[[File:EVRE20.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice for recording and broadcast
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Isolating from noise
|Electrovoice RE18
|[[File:RE18.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Voice, designed to reduce handling noise.
|Dynamic
|Not required||XLR
|-
|Drum mic
|Electrovoice 408B
|[[File:EV408B.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|High SPL, good for loud sources.
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Drum mic
|Electrovoice 308B
|[[File:EV308B.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Cardioid version of the 408B.
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Reference mic
|Earthworks

TC20
|[[File:TC20.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Flat reference microphone, high SPL. Good for sound measurement and loud sources.
|Condenser
(Small diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Ribbon
|Cascade Fathead
|[[File:Fathead.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Bidirectional[[File:Bidirectional.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Dark tone for instruments and vocals, often used in mid-side pair.
|Ribbon
|Do NOT supply +48v Phantom Power, ribbons will be damaged!
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Shure
SM58
|[[File:SM58.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Shure
Beta 87A
|[[File:ShureBeta87A.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Hand held vocal mic with good feedback rejection
|Condenser
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Voice
|Shure
SM53
|[[File:SM53.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Hand held vocal mic, reduces proximity effect.
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Shure
SM57
|[[File:MHE-SureSM57.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Instruments
|Shure
SM81
|[[File:SM81.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Used on instruments, popular for pianos.
|Condenser
(Small diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Stereo
|Shure
VP88
|[[File:ShureVP88.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: cardioid and bidirectional
|Stereo, used in broadcasting.
|Condenser
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|All purpose studio
|Shure
KSM32
|[[File:KSM32.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|General purpose condenser mic
|Condenser
(Large diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Instruments
|Shure
KSM137
|[[File:KSM137.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Instruments.
|Condenser
(Small diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Voice
|Shure
SM7B
|[[File:SM7B.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Popular vocal mic for recording and broadcast
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Drum mic
|Shure
Beta 52A
|[[File:ShureBeta52A.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|High SPL and good low end, for kick drums
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Stage
|Sennheiser MD 421-II
|[[File:Sen421.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Instruments
|Sennheiser MKH40
|[[File:MKH40.jpg|centre|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Great detail on acoustic instruments and drum overheads.
|Condenser
(Small diaphragm)
| +48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Drum mic
|Sennheiser E604 Kit
|[[File:SenE604.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Clip on mics for snares and toms
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Combo Kit
|Sennheiser K6
|[[File:SenComboKit.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: Cardioid, Omni, Super Cardioid
|Can cater to almost all settings. Great for video, stage use, and studio recording. 1 module + 3 different capsules.
|Condenser
(Small diaphragm)
|1 AA Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Voice
|Sennheiser 441
|[[File:Sen441.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Supercardioid[[File:SuperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|76x76px]]
|Voice and instruments
|Dynamic
|Not required
|XLR
|-
|Binaural mic
|Dr. Normar's Binaural head
(Sennhesier MKE 2002)
|[[File:MKE2002.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Sennheiser binaural microphone pair to record a 3d stereo field for playback over headphones.
|Condenser
|1 9V Battery
|XLR
|-
|Lavalier
|Sony
ECM50
|[[File:ECM50.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Omni[[File:Omni.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Interview, broadcast, and presentation.
|Condenser
|1 E90 Battery
or

+48v Phantom Power
|XLR
|-
|Ribbon
|Beyerdynamic M160
|[[File:M160.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Hypercardioid[[File:HyperCardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Instruments, popular on strings.
|Ribbon
|Do NOT supply +48v Phantom Power, ribbons will be damaged!
|XLR
|-
|Ribbon
|Coles
4038
|[[File:Coles4038.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Bidirectional[[File:Bidirectional.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Classic instrument and voice mic
|Ribbon
|Do NOT supply +48v Phantom Power, ribbons will be damaged!
|XLR
|-
|Ribbon
|RCA
77DX
|[[File:RCA77DX.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional
|Vintage ribbon mic, popular in broadcasting for vocals.
|Ribbon
|Do NOT supply +48v Phantom Power, ribbons will be damaged!
|XLR
|-
|Ribbon
|Royer
R121
|[[File:R121.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Bidirectional[[File:Bidirectional.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|Instruments
|Ribbon
|Do NOT supply +48v Phantom Power, ribbons will be damaged!
|XLR
|-
|Tube mic
|Chameleon Labs
TS-1
|[[File:TS1.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable:
cardioid, omnidirectional
|Instruments
|Tube condenser
(Small diaphragm)
|External power supply
|XLR
|-
|Tube mic
|Chameleon Labs
TS-2
|[[File:TS2.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional
|General purpose condenser mic
|Tube condenser
(Large diaphragm)
|External power supply
|XLR
|-
|Tube mic
|sE Electronics sE5000
|[[File:SE5000.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Cardioid[[File:Cardioid.png|centre|frameless|75x75px]]
|General purpose condenser mic
|Tube condenser
(Large diaphragm)
|External power supply
|XLR
|-
|Tube mic
|sE Electronics sE5600
|[[File:SE5600.jpg|frameless|110x110px]]
|Variable: cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional, with 5 intermediate stages selectable on power supply
|General purpose condenser mic
|Tube condenser
(Large diaphragm)
|External power supply
|XLR
|}

[[Category:Media Loan Catalogs]]
__NOEDITSECTION__